Your email was sent successfully. Check your inbox.

An error occurred while sending the email. Please try again.

Proceed reservation?

Export
Filter
  • MPI Ethno. Forsch.  (104)
  • DNB
  • HU Berlin
  • 1990-1994  (104)
  • Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands  (56)
  • Boston, MA : Springer US  (48)
  • Social sciences.  (104)
Datasource
  • MPI Ethno. Forsch.  (104)
  • DNB
  • HU Berlin
  • BSZ  (6)
Material
Language
Years
Year
  • 1
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461521570
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 354 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Industrial engineering. ; Production engineering. ; Agriculture. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Dedication -- Preface -- 1. Introduction and Historical -- 2. Bacteriology of the Heat Sterilization of Milk . -- 3. Chemical and Physical Changes in Milk at High Temperatures -- 4. Types of UHT Processing Plant -- 5. Performance of UHT Processing Plant . -- 6. Aseptic Filling -- 7. Cleaning and Sterilization of UHT Processing Plant and Aseptic Fillers -- 8. Connection of Aseptic Fillers to UHT Processing Plant -- 9. Properties of UHT -Processed Milk -- 10. Fouling of Heat Exchangers -- 11. Laboratory and Legislative Control.
    Abstract: This book attempts to explain the scientific basis for UHT sterilization and aseptic filling, as well as describe the processes and equipment used. I have tried to avoid producing merely a catalogue of sterilizers and aseptic fillers. Instead I have attempted to explain the principles on which the different types of plant operate, and discuss the factors which influence performance, so that information given by manufac­ turers may be assessed by readers in relation to their own processing requirements. Statements are generally supported by references. Where no re­ ference is given, personal experience or my interpretation of the work of others is my justification. Although the book deals mainly with milk and milk products, I hope that the information it contains will be useful to those dealing with other products, since the principles of processing are in general the same. The book is based on more than 30 years' involvement with research into UHT processing and aseptic filling. During this time I have been fortunate to work with and to talk to many people from whom I have learned a great deal. I benefited from conta.cts with Dr T. R. Ashton (England) and Professor H. Hostettler. (Switzerland), who were pioneers in the commercial development of UHT milk. More recently I have been privileged to know and work with research workers in many countries having a common interest in UHT processing. Of these, I should mention particularly Professors E. L. Thomas, V. A.
    Description / Table of Contents: DedicationPreface -- 1. Introduction and Historical -- 2. Bacteriology of the Heat Sterilization of Milk . -- 3. Chemical and Physical Changes in Milk at High Temperatures -- 4. Types of UHT Processing Plant -- 5. Performance of UHT Processing Plant . -- 6. Aseptic Filling -- 7. Cleaning and Sterilization of UHT Processing Plant and Aseptic Fillers -- 8. Connection of Aseptic Fillers to UHT Processing Plant -- 9. Properties of UHT -Processed Milk -- 10. Fouling of Heat Exchangers -- 11. Laboratory and Legislative Control.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 2
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401106894
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1 v)
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Introduction -- 2. Chemical Lists and List Descriptions -- 3. Cross-Reference Indexes of Chemical Names and Synonyms -- B. Regulatory Summaries -- Appendix: Key to RCRA “F”- and “K”- Series Wastes.
    Abstract: The Regulated Chemicals Directory"lM is meant to be a convenient source of information for everyone who needs to keep up-to-date regarding the regulations and recommendations that pertain to chemical substances. The RCD™ is designed to be the first reference book to consult when beginning compliance efforts. Every regulatory or advisory list used in the RCD™ is keyed to its source, to help readers who need more detailed information on regulations, recommendations, or guidelines readily locate source documents. Some organizations now center their compliance efforts on computerized information stored in cross-referenced databases. A unique feature of the RCDTM is the availability of an electronic version suitable for use on IBM-compatible personal computers, download onto mainframes and CD-ROM players. Both the print and electronic versions are updated with the same timeliness. For more information on the electronic versions of the Regulated Chemicals DirectoryTM, contact Chapman & Hall directly (One Penn Plaza, New York, NY 10119, fax-212-564-1505). Many companies working on product development need information on what may be regulated in the future. The RCD™ provides selected information on pending regulations and in-progress testing lists, which can provide a starting place for tracking future regulatory considerations. Information for the RCD™ is continually gathered and updated. Suggestions from readers for information that should be added to the RCD™ or for other ways to improve the book are welcomed by Chapman & Hall. - Patricia L. Dsida, Pres. ChemADVISOR® , Inc. ix Part A. Chemical Lists and Indexes Section 1.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Introduction2. Chemical Lists and List Descriptions -- 3. Cross-Reference Indexes of Chemical Names and Synonyms -- B. Regulatory Summaries -- Appendix: Key to RCRA “F”- and “K”- Series Wastes.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 3
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461597148
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I Total System -- 1. Total Framework of the Toyota Production System -- II Subsystems -- 2. Adaptable Kanban System Maintains Just-In-Time Production -- 3. Supplier Kanban and the Sequence Schedule Used by Suppliers -- 4. Smoothed Production Helps Toyota Adapt to Demand Changes and Reduce Inventory -- 5. The Information System Between Toyota, Its Dealers, and Parts Manufacturers -- 6. Computer Control System in an Automobile Factory -- 7. How Toyota Shortened Production Lead Time -- 8. Reduction of Setup Time—Concepts and Techniques -- 9. Practical Procedure for Reducing Setup Time -- 10. Standard Operations Can Attain Balanced Production with Minimum Labor -- 11. Machine Layout, Multi-Function Workers, and Job Rotation Help Realize Flexible Workshops -- 12. Improvement Activities Help Reduce the Work Force and Increase Worker Morale -- 13. 5S—Foundation for Improvements -- 14. “Autonomous Defects Control” Assures Product Quality -- 15. Functional Management to Promote Company-Wide Quality Control and Cost Management -- III Quantitative Techniques -- 16. Sequencing Method for the Mixed-Model Assembly Line to Realize Smoothed Production -- 17. New Sequence Scheduling Method for Smoothing -- 18. Determining the Number of Kanban Pertinent to the Alternative Withdrawal Systems -- 19. Computer System for Kanban System Support -- 20. Numerical Analysis for Productivity Improvement -- IV Implementation -- 21. Review of Kanban System Principles -- 22. Prerequisites to Implementing the Toyota Production System -- 23. Applying the Toyota Production System Overseas -- Appendix 1: JIT Delivery System Can Ease Traffic Congestion and the Labor Shortage -- Appendix 2: Goals Coordination Method -- Appendix 3: Quantitative Analysis of Stocks in a JIT Multistage Production System Using the Constant Order Cycle Withdrawal Method -- Appendix 4: Quantitative Analysis of Lot Size in a JIT Production System Using Constant Order Quantity Withdrawal Method.
    Abstract: The Just-in-time (JIT) manufacturing system is an internal system in use by its founder, Toyota Motor Corporation, but it has taken on a new look. Toyota Production System, Second Edition systematically describes the changes that have occurred to the most efficient production system in use today. Since the publication of the first edition of this book in 1983, Toyota has integrated JIT with computer integrated manufacturing technology and a strategic informa­ tion system. The JIT goal of producing the necessary items in the necessary quantity at the necessary time is an internal driver of production and operations management. The addition of computer integrated technology (including expert systems by artificial intelligence) and information systems technology serve to further reduce costs, increase quality, and improve lead time. The new Toyota production system considers how to adapt production schedules to the demand changes in the marketplace while satisfying the goals of low cost, high quality, and timely delivery. The first edition of this book, Toyota Production System, published in 1983, is the basis for this book. It was translated into many languages including Spanish, Russian, Italian, Japanese, etc., and has played a definite role in inspiring production management systems throughout the world.
    Description / Table of Contents: I Total System1. Total Framework of the Toyota Production System -- II Subsystems -- 2. Adaptable Kanban System Maintains Just-In-Time Production -- 3. Supplier Kanban and the Sequence Schedule Used by Suppliers -- 4. Smoothed Production Helps Toyota Adapt to Demand Changes and Reduce Inventory -- 5. The Information System Between Toyota, Its Dealers, and Parts Manufacturers -- 6. Computer Control System in an Automobile Factory -- 7. How Toyota Shortened Production Lead Time -- 8. Reduction of Setup Time-Concepts and Techniques -- 9. Practical Procedure for Reducing Setup Time -- 10. Standard Operations Can Attain Balanced Production with Minimum Labor -- 11. Machine Layout, Multi-Function Workers, and Job Rotation Help Realize Flexible Workshops -- 12. Improvement Activities Help Reduce the Work Force and Increase Worker Morale -- 13. 5S-Foundation for Improvements -- 14. “Autonomous Defects Control” Assures Product Quality -- 15. Functional Management to Promote Company-Wide Quality Control and Cost Management -- III Quantitative Techniques -- 16. Sequencing Method for the Mixed-Model Assembly Line to Realize Smoothed Production -- 17. New Sequence Scheduling Method for Smoothing -- 18. Determining the Number of Kanban Pertinent to the Alternative Withdrawal Systems -- 19. Computer System for Kanban System Support -- 20. Numerical Analysis for Productivity Improvement -- IV Implementation -- 21. Review of Kanban System Principles -- 22. Prerequisites to Implementing the Toyota Production System -- 23. Applying the Toyota Production System Overseas -- Appendix 1: JIT Delivery System Can Ease Traffic Congestion and the Labor Shortage -- Appendix 2: Goals Coordination Method -- Appendix 3: Quantitative Analysis of Stocks in a JIT Multistage Production System Using the Constant Order Cycle Withdrawal Method -- Appendix 4: Quantitative Analysis of Lot Size in a JIT Production System Using Constant Order Quantity Withdrawal Method.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 4
    ISBN: 9781461526469
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XLII, 823 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Hydropower -- Lesotho Highlands Water Project: design and layout of underground works for ’Muela Hydropower Project -- Design and construction of the cooling water intake tunnel system for Point Aconi generating station, Nova Scotia -- Comparison of two classification systems as applied to the Alpe Devero tunnel, Italy -- Metro/Rail -- Planning and design of tunnels for the Jubilee Line extension, London -- New St Clair River tunnel, Canada-USA -- Application of NATM to design of underground stations in London Clay -- Water/Waste -- Underground works on Third Nairobi Water Supply Project -- Design and construction of caverns for an underground sewage treatment plant, Hong Kong -- The Snake: a rock tunnel for storing combined sewage water, Stockholm -- Tunnelling on the Penzance and St. Ives sewerage scheme, Cornwall, England -- Tunnel-boring Machines -- Two tunnel-boring machines for Lesotho: a design and case history -- Open TBM tunnelling in complex geology for railroad in Sweden -- Use of sedimentary rock impact indices in evaluation of tunnel-boring machine performance -- Development and performance of tunnel-boring machines on Phase II of the London Water Ring Main -- Environmental Issues -- Environmental planning for the Massachusetts Water Resources Authority’s MetroWest water supply tunnel -- Palais Bernheimer in Munich: tunnelling for parking space under a historic building -- Limiting the damage to historic buildings due to tunnelling: experience at the Mansion House, London -- Compensation grouting to limit settlements during tunnelling at Waterloo Station, London -- Ground movement model validation at the Heathrow Express trial tunnel -- Case Histories -- Gjøvik Olympic Mountain Hall, Norway -- Construction of new escalator shaft and passageways at London Underground’s Waterloo Station -- Water in TBM drives, Delivery Tunnel South, Lesotho Highlands Water Project -- Tunnel-boring Machines -- CEN safety standards for tunnelling machines and air locks -- Tunnels below waste disposal tips -- Machine tunnelling in the northwest of England -- EPB-shield tunnelling for the Taipei Metro, contract 201A -- TBM drive management by use of computerized systems -- Research -- Long-term measurements of loads on tunnel linings in overconsolidated clay -- Non-destructive investigation of tunnels -- Case Histories -- Design, construction and performance of a 700-m ‘cover and cut’ tunnel in soft clay, Norway -- Shotcrete in the construction of Pen-Y-Clip tunnel, North Wales -- Face support for a large Mix-Shield in heterogeneous ground conditions -- Design -- Tunnel ring design, development, testing and manufacture for the London Water Ring Main -- Medway tunnel detailed design -- Developments in precast concrete tunnel linings in the United Kingdom -- Case Histories -- Channel tunnel: French undersea crossover design and construction -- Design and construction of Metsovon road tunnel, Greece -- Construction of the ‘Passante Ferroviario’ link in Milan, Italy, lots 3P, 5P and 6P: excavation by large earth pressure balanced shield with chemical foam injection -- Pen-Y-Clip road tunnel, North Wales: achieving a dry lining through a pervious rock formation -- Hydropower -- Tunnel design in the design and construct context—the Pergau experience, Malaysia -- Serra da Mesa project, Brazil: excavation of shafts and penstocks -- Tunnel Machinery -- Rock cutting with roadheaders -- Increased productivity in construction of civil and mining tunnels through the use of high-capacity tunnel-boring machines and continuous belt conveyor muck haulage.
    Abstract: It is now more than twenty years since a proposal was first mooted to hold an international tunnelling symposium in Britain. At the time of the first symposium, held in London in 1976, the Channel Tunnel pro­ ject had just been shelved. Last weekend a charity walk was held in the finished tunnel, which will be open for business later in the year. Tunnels have figured prominently, and at times spectacularly, in the development of national and international links and it is hoped that such links gather pace in the future. It is particularly pleasing that Alastair Biggart of Storebrelt has agreed to deliver the twenty-sixth Sir Julius Wernher Memorial Lecture of the Institution of Mining and Metallurgy, entitled 'The changing face of tunnelling', at the start of this event. * Although almost every edition of the technical journals on tunnelling reports another £1 billion scheme somewhere in the world, it would be unfair of me to suggest that tunnelling is restricted to these prestigious schemes for major transport links. Much of the work that makes mod­ ern life possible receives hardly a mention outside the technical press and one suspects that society at large applies the 'out of sight, out of mind' attitude even more readily to underground construction than it does to other forms of engineering. Clearly, there is a contiiming need to improve the capacity and performance of our infrastructure, while hav­ ing a careful regard for the environment.
    Description / Table of Contents: HydropowerLesotho Highlands Water Project: design and layout of underground works for ’Muela Hydropower Project -- Design and construction of the cooling water intake tunnel system for Point Aconi generating station, Nova Scotia -- Comparison of two classification systems as applied to the Alpe Devero tunnel, Italy -- Metro/Rail -- Planning and design of tunnels for the Jubilee Line extension, London -- New St Clair River tunnel, Canada-USA -- Application of NATM to design of underground stations in London Clay -- Water/Waste -- Underground works on Third Nairobi Water Supply Project -- Design and construction of caverns for an underground sewage treatment plant, Hong Kong -- The Snake: a rock tunnel for storing combined sewage water, Stockholm -- Tunnelling on the Penzance and St. Ives sewerage scheme, Cornwall, England -- Tunnel-boring Machines -- Two tunnel-boring machines for Lesotho: a design and case history -- Open TBM tunnelling in complex geology for railroad in Sweden -- Use of sedimentary rock impact indices in evaluation of tunnel-boring machine performance -- Development and performance of tunnel-boring machines on Phase II of the London Water Ring Main -- Environmental Issues -- Environmental planning for the Massachusetts Water Resources Authority’s MetroWest water supply tunnel -- Palais Bernheimer in Munich: tunnelling for parking space under a historic building -- Limiting the damage to historic buildings due to tunnelling: experience at the Mansion House, London -- Compensation grouting to limit settlements during tunnelling at Waterloo Station, London -- Ground movement model validation at the Heathrow Express trial tunnel -- Case Histories -- Gjøvik Olympic Mountain Hall, Norway -- Construction of new escalator shaft and passageways at London Underground’s Waterloo Station -- Water in TBM drives, Delivery Tunnel South, Lesotho Highlands Water Project -- Tunnel-boring Machines -- CEN safety standards for tunnelling machines and air locks -- Tunnels below waste disposal tips -- Machine tunnelling in the northwest of England -- EPB-shield tunnelling for the Taipei Metro, contract 201A -- TBM drive management by use of computerized systems -- Research -- Long-term measurements of loads on tunnel linings in overconsolidated clay -- Non-destructive investigation of tunnels -- Case Histories -- Design, construction and performance of a 700-m ‘cover and cut’ tunnel in soft clay, Norway -- Shotcrete in the construction of Pen-Y-Clip tunnel, North Wales -- Face support for a large Mix-Shield in heterogeneous ground conditions -- Design -- Tunnel ring design, development, testing and manufacture for the London Water Ring Main -- Medway tunnel detailed design -- Developments in precast concrete tunnel linings in the United Kingdom -- Case Histories -- Channel tunnel: French undersea crossover design and construction -- Design and construction of Metsovon road tunnel, Greece -- Construction of the ‘Passante Ferroviario’ link in Milan, Italy, lots 3P, 5P and 6P: excavation by large earth pressure balanced shield with chemical foam injection -- Pen-Y-Clip road tunnel, North Wales: achieving a dry lining through a pervious rock formation -- Hydropower -- Tunnel design in the design and construct context-the Pergau experience, Malaysia -- Serra da Mesa project, Brazil: excavation of shafts and penstocks -- Tunnel Machinery -- Rock cutting with roadheaders -- Increased productivity in construction of civil and mining tunnels through the use of high-capacity tunnel-boring machines and continuous belt conveyor muck haulage.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 5
    ISBN: 9781461526742
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (LXIV, 1085 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Keynote Lecture -- Plenary Lectures -- Physical and Physicochemical Properties of Food -- Application of NMR to Food Engineering -- Mechanical Processing of Food -- Thermal and Mass Transfer Operations of Food -- Phase Change Operation -- Concentration and Dehydration Processes -- Reaction Kinetics in Food Processing -- Fermentation Processes -- Bioreactors Using Enzymes and Cells -- Separation and Purification Processes -- Membrane Processes -- Pasteurization and Sterilization Processes -- Aseptic Processes -- Packaging Science and Technology -- Fouling and Cleaning -- Processing under Unusual Conditions -- Transportation and Preservation of Food -- Sensors, Process Control, and Factory Automation -- Innovation in Equipment Design and Plant Operation -- Environmental Problems in Food Industry -- Innovation in Traditional Food Processing -- Design of Physiological Functions of Foods from Engineering Viewpoints.
    Abstract: The necessity of prediction and fine control in the food manufacturing process is becoming more important than ever before, and food researchers and engineers must confront difficulties arising from the specificity of food materials and the sensitivity of human beings to taste. Fortunately, an overview of world research reveals that the mechanisms of the many complex phenomena found in the food manufacturing process have been gradually elucidated by skilful experiments using new analytical tools, methods and theoretical analyses. This book, the proceedings of the 6th International Congress on Engineering and Food (ICEF6), held for the first time in Asia - in Chiba, Japan May 23 -27, 1993 - summarizes the frontiers of world food engineering in 1993. Congress was joined by the 4th International Conference on Fouling and Cleaning. There were 476 active members from 31 countries participating in the Congress. The editors hope that readers will find this book to be a useful review of the current state of food engineering, and will consider future developments in this research field. The editors extend thanks to the members of the organizing committee of ICEF6, and the advisors, Dr. Ryozo Toei, Professor Emeritus of Kyoto University and Dr. Masao Fujimaki, Professor Emeritus of the University of Tokyo. They also acknowledge the international advisory board members who helped the organizing committee in many ways, and the 10 foundations and 66 companies that financially supported the ICEF6. Finally, the editors are indebted to the reviewers of the manuscripts of these proceedings.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 6
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461535546
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVII, 302 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Base oils from petroleum -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Base oil composition -- 1.3 Products and specifications -- 1.4 Conventional base oil manufacturing methods -- 1.5 Modern catalytic processes -- 1.6 Future developments -- References -- 2 Synthetic base fluids -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Polyalphaolefins -- 2.3 Alkylated aromatics -- 2.4 Polybutenes -- 2.5 Synthetic esters -- 2.6 Polyalkylene glycols -- 2.7 Phosphate esters -- References -- 3 Detergents/dispersants -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Detergents -- 3.3 Dispersants -- 3.4 Other lubricants -- 3.5 Performance evaluation -- References -- Further reading -- 4 Oxidative degradation and stabilisation of mineral oil based lubricants -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Autoxidation of hydrocarbons -- 4.3 Oxidation stability of base oils -- 4.4 Inhibition of oxidative degradation of lubricants -- 4.5 Application of antioxidants -- 4.6 Future antioxidant technology -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 5 Viscosity index improvers and thickeners -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Overview of VI improver chemistry -- 5.3 Chemistry and manufacture of commercial VI improvers -- 5.4 Function and properties -- 5.5 Performance -- 5.6 Prognosis for future developments -- References -- 6 Miscellaneous additives -- 6.1 Friction modifiers -- 6.2 Pour point depressants -- 6.3 Demulsifiers and antifoams -- 6.4 Corrosion inhibitors -- Reference -- 7 The formulation of automotive lubricants -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 What type of lubricant is wanted? -- 7.3 Why there are so many types oflubricant -- 7.4 Multifunctional lubricants -- 7.5 Definition oflubricant performance -- 7.6 Lubricant formulation—the physical phase -- 8 Industrial lubricants -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Bearing lubricants -- 8.3 Compressor lubricants -- 8.4 Hydraulic lubricants (fluids) -- 8.5 Industrial gear lubricants -- 8.6 Turbine lubricants -- 8.7 Metalworking lubricants -- 8.8 Specialities -- References -- 9 Aviation lubricants -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Lubrication of rotary engines -- 9.3 Lubrication of conventional aircraft piston engines -- 9.4 Lubrication of aircraft turbine engines -- 9.5 Aircraft hydraulic fluids -- 9.6 Helicopter gearboxes -- 9.7 Undercarriage lubrication -- 9.8 Airframe lubrication -- 9.9 Safety aspects of aircraft lubrication -- 9.10 Space lubrication -- References -- 10 Marine lubricants -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Marine diesel engines -- 10.3 Fuel oil -- 10.4 Base oils -- 10.5 Additives -- 10.6 Properties and formulation of marine lubricants -- 10.7 System oils -- 10.8 Cylinder oils -- 10.9 Trunk piston engine oils -- 10.10 Used oil analysis -- References -- 11 Lubricating grease -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Structure and properties -- 11.3 Chemistry -- 11.4 Applications -- 11.5 Future developments -- 11.6 Conclusions -- References -- 12 Extreme-pressure and anti-wear additives -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Anti-wear additives -- 12.3 Extreme-pressure additives -- 12.4 Mechanisms of action of anti-wear and EP additives -- 12.5 Application of different classes of additive -- 12.6 Future developments -- References -- 13 Lubricants and their environmental impact -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Collection of waste lubricant -- 13.3 Treatment of collected lubricant -- 13.4 Re-refined base oil quality -- 13.5 Health and safety aspects of re-refined oil -- 13.6 Environmental considerations of waste lubricant -- 13.7 Environmental impact of ‘consumed’ lubricant -- 13.8 Biodegradation tests for oils -- 13.9 Future trends -- References -- Further reading.
    Abstract: The use oflubricants began in ancient times and has developed into a major international business through the need to lubricate machines of increasing complexity. The impetus for lubricant development has arisen from need, so lubricatingpractice has precededan understandingofthescientificprinciples. This is not surprising as the scientific basis of the technology is, by nature, highly complex and interdisciplinary. However, we believe that the under­ standing of lubricant phenomena will continue to be developed at a mol­ ecular level to meet future challenges. These challenges will include the control of emissions from internal combustion engines, the reduction of friction and wear in machinery, and continuing improvements to lubricant performanceand life-time. More recently, there has been an increased understanding ofthe chemical aspects of lubrication, which has complemented the knowledge and under­ standing gained through studies dealing with physics and engineering. This book aims to bring together this chemical information and present it in a practical way. It is written by chemists who are authorities in the various specialisations within the lubricating industry, and is intended to be of interest to chemists who may already be working in the lubricating industry or in academia, and who are seeking a chemist's view of lubrication. It will also be of benefit to engineers and technologists familiar with the industry who requirea more fundamental understanding oflubricants.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Base oils from petroleum1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Base oil composition -- 1.3 Products and specifications -- 1.4 Conventional base oil manufacturing methods -- 1.5 Modern catalytic processes -- 1.6 Future developments -- References -- 2 Synthetic base fluids -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Polyalphaolefins -- 2.3 Alkylated aromatics -- 2.4 Polybutenes -- 2.5 Synthetic esters -- 2.6 Polyalkylene glycols -- 2.7 Phosphate esters -- References -- 3 Detergents/dispersants -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Detergents -- 3.3 Dispersants -- 3.4 Other lubricants -- 3.5 Performance evaluation -- References -- Further reading -- 4 Oxidative degradation and stabilisation of mineral oil based lubricants -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Autoxidation of hydrocarbons -- 4.3 Oxidation stability of base oils -- 4.4 Inhibition of oxidative degradation of lubricants -- 4.5 Application of antioxidants -- 4.6 Future antioxidant technology -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 5 Viscosity index improvers and thickeners -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Overview of VI improver chemistry -- 5.3 Chemistry and manufacture of commercial VI improvers -- 5.4 Function and properties -- 5.5 Performance -- 5.6 Prognosis for future developments -- References -- 6 Miscellaneous additives -- 6.1 Friction modifiers -- 6.2 Pour point depressants -- 6.3 Demulsifiers and antifoams -- 6.4 Corrosion inhibitors -- Reference -- 7 The formulation of automotive lubricants -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 What type of lubricant is wanted? -- 7.3 Why there are so many types oflubricant -- 7.4 Multifunctional lubricants -- 7.5 Definition oflubricant performance -- 7.6 Lubricant formulation-the physical phase -- 8 Industrial lubricants -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Bearing lubricants -- 8.3 Compressor lubricants -- 8.4 Hydraulic lubricants (fluids) -- 8.5 Industrial gear lubricants -- 8.6 Turbine lubricants -- 8.7 Metalworking lubricants -- 8.8 Specialities -- References -- 9 Aviation lubricants -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Lubrication of rotary engines -- 9.3 Lubrication of conventional aircraft piston engines -- 9.4 Lubrication of aircraft turbine engines -- 9.5 Aircraft hydraulic fluids -- 9.6 Helicopter gearboxes -- 9.7 Undercarriage lubrication -- 9.8 Airframe lubrication -- 9.9 Safety aspects of aircraft lubrication -- 9.10 Space lubrication -- References -- 10 Marine lubricants -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Marine diesel engines -- 10.3 Fuel oil -- 10.4 Base oils -- 10.5 Additives -- 10.6 Properties and formulation of marine lubricants -- 10.7 System oils -- 10.8 Cylinder oils -- 10.9 Trunk piston engine oils -- 10.10 Used oil analysis -- References -- 11 Lubricating grease -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Structure and properties -- 11.3 Chemistry -- 11.4 Applications -- 11.5 Future developments -- 11.6 Conclusions -- References -- 12 Extreme-pressure and anti-wear additives -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Anti-wear additives -- 12.3 Extreme-pressure additives -- 12.4 Mechanisms of action of anti-wear and EP additives -- 12.5 Application of different classes of additive -- 12.6 Future developments -- References -- 13 Lubricants and their environmental impact -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Collection of waste lubricant -- 13.3 Treatment of collected lubricant -- 13.4 Re-refined base oil quality -- 13.5 Health and safety aspects of re-refined oil -- 13.6 Environmental considerations of waste lubricant -- 13.7 Environmental impact of ‘consumed’ lubricant -- 13.8 Biodegradation tests for oils -- 13.9 Future trends -- References -- Further reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 7
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401095921
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. An Overview of the Evolution of the U.S. Pecan Industry -- 2. Pecan Production -- 3. Pecan Physiology and Composition -- 4. Pecan Processing -- 5. Mechanization of Post-Harvest Pecan Processing -- 6. Microbiology and Sanitation -- 7. Pecan Composition -- 8. Methods for Measurement of Pecan Quality -- 9. Structure and Performance of the Pecan Market -- Appendix: Further Reading.
    Abstract: Flavorwise and texturewise pecans are the "Queen of the Edible Nuts. " This has been verified by salters, bakers, confectioners and ice cream manufacturers in America and western Europe. Hickory nuts and macadamia nuts are close behind, but are available only in limited supply. Pecans are among the nuts highest in oil content. In general, the varieties of nuts with the highest oil content are also rich in flavor and tender in texture. Some varieties of pecans (i. e. , Schley and Curtis) have been shown to contain as much as 76% oil. The oil in pecans is highly unsaturated, which means it is desirable from a nutritional standpoint but that it is also highly susceptible to oxidation which can cause pecans to tum stale and rancid. Pecans used in confections, bakery goods, cereals, or in snacks are more subject to staleness and rancidity than most nuts because these products are often stored at ambient temperatures. For this reason, pecans are considered to be semi-perishable and are not used in some "fine" products due to their limited shelf-life. Research at the Georgia Experiment Station has shown that raw pecans or most pecan products may be held in good condition for more than 20 years if freezing is the mode of preservation. However, development of new products demands that pecans be stored at ambient temperatures for extended intervals. Pecan 'meat' is easily bruised during shelling and handling.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. An Overview of the Evolution of the U.S. Pecan Industry2. Pecan Production -- 3. Pecan Physiology and Composition -- 4. Pecan Processing -- 5. Mechanization of Post-Harvest Pecan Processing -- 6. Microbiology and Sanitation -- 7. Pecan Composition -- 8. Methods for Measurement of Pecan Quality -- 9. Structure and Performance of the Pecan Market -- Appendix: Further Reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 8
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461568414
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Climate, climate change, climate fluctuations and climatic trends are only a few of the terms used today, in not only conferences, scientific symposia and workshops, but also parliaments and in discussions throughout society. To climatologists these terms may be well known; to the vast majority of people, however, they are new, and they require definition and explanation. The World Meteorological Organization (WMO) inherited an interest and involvement in the studies of climate and climate change from its predecessor, the International Meteorological Organization (IMo), which was established in 1873. By 1929 the IMO had set up a Commission for Climatology to deal with matters related to climate studies. When, in 1950, the World Meteorological Organization assumed the mantle of the IMO, it retained the commission which, among other responsibilities, had already recognized the need for the definition and explana­ tion of terms used in climatology. It must also be said that much of what we now know about climate derives from the scientific and technical programmes co­ ordinated by IMO and now, to a much greater extent, by WMO. In 1979, the First World Climate Conference made an assessment of the status of knowledge of climate and climate variability, and recommended the establishment of a World Climate Programme. This recommendation was fully endorsed by the Eighth World Meteorological Congress, and the World Climate Programme was subse­ quently established by WMO in co-operation with the International Council of Scientific Unions (ICSU) and the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP)
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 9
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468477672
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Electronics. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Thermomechanics for Electronics Packaging -- 2. Thermal Expansivity and Thermal Stress in Multilayered Structures -- 3. Thermal Stresses in Anisotropic Multilayered Structures -- 4. Transient Thermal Stresses in Multilayered Devices -- 5. Temperature Dependence of Thermal Expansion of Materials for Electronics Packages -- 6. Thermal Stress Considerations in Die-Attachment -- 7. Die Stress Measurement Using Piezoresistive Stress Sensors -- 8. Analysis of the Thermal Loading on Electronics Packages by Enhanced Moiré Interferometry -- 9. Correlation of Analytical and Experimental Approaches to Determination of Thermally Induced Printed Wiring Board (PWB) Warpage -- 10. Thermal Stress-Induced Open-Circuit Failure in Microelectronics Thin-Film Metallizations -- 11. Thermal Stress and Stress-Induced Voiding in Passivated Narrow Line Metallizations on Ceramic Substrates -- 12. Predicted Bow of Plastic Packages of Integrated Circuit (IC) Devices -- 13. Thermal and Moisture Stresses in Plastic Packages -- 14. Solutions to Moisture Resistance Degradation During Solder Reflow of Plastic Surface Mount Components -- 15. Thermomechanical Fatigue of 63Sn-37Pb Solder Joints -- 16. A Prediction of the Thermal Fatigue Life of Solder Joints Using Crack Propagation Rate and Equivalent Strain Range -- 17. Microstructural Evaluation of Sn-Pb Solder and Pd-Ag Thick-Film Conductor Metallization Under Thermal Cycling and Aging Conditions -- 18. Solder Joint Reliability of Leadless Chip Carriers -- 19. Solder Creep-Fatigue Interactions with Flexible Leaded Surface Mount Components -- 20. Thermal Stress Issues in Plated-Through-Hole Reliability -- 21. Nonlinear Analysis of a Ceramic Pin Grid Array (PGA) Soldered to an Orthotropic Epoxy Substrate -- 22. Mechanics of Wirebond Interconnects -- 23. Corrosion in Microelectronics Packages -- Author Biographies.
    Abstract: Microelectronics packaging and interconnection have experienced exciting growth stimulated by the recognition that systems, not just silicon, provide the solution to evolving applications. In order to have a high density/ performance/yield/quality/reliability, low cost, and light weight system, a more precise understanding of the system behavior is required. Mechanical and thermal phenomena are among the least understood and most complex of the many phenomena encountered in microelectronics packaging systems and are found on the critical path of neatly every design and process in the electronics industry. The last decade has witnessed an explosive growth in the research and development efforts devoted to determining the mechanical and thermal behaviors of microelectronics packaging. With the advance of very large scale integration technologies, thousands to tens of thousands of devices can be fabricated on a silicon chip. At the same time, demands to further reduce packaging signal delay and increase packaging density between communicat­ ing circuits have led to the use of very high power dissipation single-chip modules and multi-chip modules. The result of these developments has been a rapid growth in module level heat flux within the personal, workstation, midrange, mainframe, and super computers. Thus, thermal (temperature, stress, and strain) management is vital for microelectronics packaging designs and analyses. How to determine the temperature distribution in the elec­ tronics components and systems is outside the scope of this book, which focuses on the determination of stress and strain distributions in the electronics packaging.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Thermomechanics for Electronics Packaging2. Thermal Expansivity and Thermal Stress in Multilayered Structures -- 3. Thermal Stresses in Anisotropic Multilayered Structures -- 4. Transient Thermal Stresses in Multilayered Devices -- 5. Temperature Dependence of Thermal Expansion of Materials for Electronics Packages -- 6. Thermal Stress Considerations in Die-Attachment -- 7. Die Stress Measurement Using Piezoresistive Stress Sensors -- 8. Analysis of the Thermal Loading on Electronics Packages by Enhanced Moiré Interferometry -- 9. Correlation of Analytical and Experimental Approaches to Determination of Thermally Induced Printed Wiring Board (PWB) Warpage -- 10. Thermal Stress-Induced Open-Circuit Failure in Microelectronics Thin-Film Metallizations -- 11. Thermal Stress and Stress-Induced Voiding in Passivated Narrow Line Metallizations on Ceramic Substrates -- 12. Predicted Bow of Plastic Packages of Integrated Circuit (IC) Devices -- 13. Thermal and Moisture Stresses in Plastic Packages -- 14. Solutions to Moisture Resistance Degradation During Solder Reflow of Plastic Surface Mount Components -- 15. Thermomechanical Fatigue of 63Sn-37Pb Solder Joints -- 16. A Prediction of the Thermal Fatigue Life of Solder Joints Using Crack Propagation Rate and Equivalent Strain Range -- 17. Microstructural Evaluation of Sn-Pb Solder and Pd-Ag Thick-Film Conductor Metallization Under Thermal Cycling and Aging Conditions -- 18. Solder Joint Reliability of Leadless Chip Carriers -- 19. Solder Creep-Fatigue Interactions with Flexible Leaded Surface Mount Components -- 20. Thermal Stress Issues in Plated-Through-Hole Reliability -- 21. Nonlinear Analysis of a Ceramic Pin Grid Array (PGA) Soldered to an Orthotropic Epoxy Substrate -- 22. Mechanics of Wirebond Interconnects -- 23. Corrosion in Microelectronics Packages -- Author Biographies.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 10
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401114967
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Sixth edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 Growth and nutrition -- 3 Zygomycotina and Mastigomycotina -- 4 Ascomycotina -- 5 Basidiomycotina -- 6 Deuteromycotina -- 7 Dispersal in fungi -- 8 Fungal genetics -- 9 Ecology of saprotrophic fungi -- 10 Fungi as plant pathogens -- 11 Fungi as mutualistic symbionts -- 12 Fungi and human affairs -- Further reading: Books on fungi.
    Abstract: This book has passed through a number of editions each involving some modifications while retaining the general character of the first. The most substantial changes occurred in the fifth (1983), but that is now out-of-date. Mycology has not been immune from the rapid evolution of biology in the past decade and the preparation was a long way beyond the capacity of the older writer (C.T.I.). So a younger one (H.J.H.) has collaborated with him. Substantial changes have been made throughout, particularly in relation to taxonomy but in general Chapters 1-7 have undergone relatively little revision. However, this is not true of Chapters 8-12 where the influence of the younger author is paramount. The basic idea of the book remains, namely to present fungi as living organisms profoundly affecting the lives of other kinds of living organisms, especially Man. Their study is of the greatest importance and what is more it is great fun. Many of the diagrams have been retained, but some have been redrawn and new ones added. Weare pleased to acknowledge the patience and artistic skills of Mrs Lindsay J. Wilson in producing these. Some coloured plates have also been introduced from photographs taken by H.J .H.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 Growth and nutrition -- 3 Zygomycotina and Mastigomycotina -- 4 Ascomycotina -- 5 Basidiomycotina -- 6 Deuteromycotina -- 7 Dispersal in fungi -- 8 Fungal genetics -- 9 Ecology of saprotrophic fungi -- 10 Fungi as plant pathogens -- 11 Fungi as mutualistic symbionts -- 12 Fungi and human affairs -- Further reading: Books on fungi.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 11
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781489960900
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVII, 361 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Mathematics ; Life sciences. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities. ; Science. ; Engineering.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 12
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401114929
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Edition 1
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One: Directory Section -- Glass Fibre Materials for the Composites Industry -- Glass Fibre Materials Other Than for the Composites Industry -- Optical Fibres & Cables -- Two: Data Section -- Section 1: Continuous Filament Yarns -- Glass Fibre Materials for the Composites Industry -- Section 2: Reinforcements for Thermosets -- Section 3: Reinforcements for Thermoplastics -- Section 4: Reinforcements for Cement & Gypsum -- Section 5: Tissues, Surfacing Veils, Mats & Fabrics -- Glass Fibre Materials Other Than for the Composites Industry -- Section 6: Filtration Materials -- Section 7: Insulation Materials -- Section 8: Glass Fibre Fabrics for Printed Circuit Boards -- Section 9: Miscellaneous Materials -- Materials for the Optical Fibre Industry -- Section 10: Fibres -- Section 11: Fibre Cables -- Section 12: Optical Fibre Cable Support Members -- Late Entries -- Index to Advertisers.
    Description / Table of Contents: One: Directory SectionGlass Fibre Materials for the Composites Industry -- Glass Fibre Materials Other Than for the Composites Industry -- Optical Fibres & Cables -- Two: Data Section -- Section 1: Continuous Filament Yarns -- Glass Fibre Materials for the Composites Industry -- Section 2: Reinforcements for Thermosets -- Section 3: Reinforcements for Thermoplastics -- Section 4: Reinforcements for Cement & Gypsum -- Section 5: Tissues, Surfacing Veils, Mats & Fabrics -- Glass Fibre Materials Other Than for the Composites Industry -- Section 6: Filtration Materials -- Section 7: Insulation Materials -- Section 8: Glass Fibre Fabrics for Printed Circuit Boards -- Section 9: Miscellaneous Materials -- Materials for the Optical Fibre Industry -- Section 10: Fibres -- Section 11: Fibre Cables -- Section 12: Optical Fibre Cable Support Members -- Late Entries -- Index to Advertisers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 13
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401121323
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1048 p)
    Edition: 10th edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: A -- B -- C -- D -- E -- F -- G -- H -- I -- J -- K -- L -- M -- N -- O -- P -- Q -- R -- S -- T -- U -- V -- W -- X -- Y -- Z.
    Abstract: This edition of over 60 000 entries, including significantly more than 20% new or revised material, not only updates its predecessor but also continues the policy of extending coverage to areas dealt with only sparsely in previous editions. Special attention has been paid to the Far East, Australasia and Latin America in general, and to the People's Republic of China in particular. The cross-referencing between a defunct organization and its successor (indicated by ex and now) introduced into the last edition, has been extended. Otherwise the policies adopted in previous editions have been retained. All kinds of organizations are included - international, national, governmental, individual, large or small - but strictly local organizations have been omitted. The subject scope includes activities of all kinds, in the fields of commerce and industry, education, law, politics, public administration, religion, recreation, medicine, science and technology. The country of origin of a national organization is given in brackets, unless it is the home country of the title language or can be deduced readily from the title itself. Acronyms of parent bodies of subsidiary organizations are also added in brackets. Equivalences are used to link acronyms in different languages for the same organization. A select bibliography guides the reader to specialist works providing more detailed information.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 14
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401115049
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1: Information management -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Spatial data systems -- 1.3 Decision making -- 1.4 Organisations and their objectives -- 1.5 The management of information -- 1.6 Information networks -- 1.7 Information systems -- 1.8 Geo-information systems -- 1.9 Spatial decision support systems -- 2: Data for geo-information systems -- 2.1 Data into information -- 2.2 Describing geographic location -- 2.3 Objects and hierarchies -- 2.4 Maps and cartographic representation -- 2.5 Considerations in using maps -- 2.6 Map-based geo-information systems -- 2.7 Data derived from spatial analysis -- 2.8 Address-based spatial information -- 2.9 Postcodes -- 2.10 Other spatial datasets -- 2.11 Attribute data -- 2.12 Metadata -- 3: Geo-information databases -- 3.1 Choosing the right data structure -- 3.2 Data structures and data models -- 3.3 Spatial data models -- 3.4 Spatial data structures -- 3.5 Problems of three dimensional data -- 3.6 Temporal data model -- 3.7 Database management systems -- 3.8 Physical and logical database design -- 3.9 DBMS structures -- 3.10 Standard query language (SQL) -- 3.11 Object-oriented databases -- 4: Integrated approaches to GIS -- 4.1 Benefits of information integration -- 4.2 Integrated data models -- 4.3 Information networks -- 4.4 Integration with existing databases -- 4.5 Open systems environment -- 4.6 Integration frameworks -- 4.7 Corporate solutions -- 4.8 Organisational issues -- 4.9 Implementation strategies -- 4.10 Benefits and costs -- 5: Low cost spatial information systems -- 5.1 Low cost strategies -- 5.2 Development of the microcomputer -- 5.3 Availability of software -- 5.4 Developing technologies -- 5.5 Stand alone solutions -- 5.6 Network solutions -- 5.7 Data availability -- 5.8 Human resourcing issues -- 5.9 Implementation issues -- 5.10 Low cost GIS users -- 6: Copyright and legal issues -- 6.1 Who owns the data? -- 6.2 Law related to information -- 6.3 Access to information -- 6.4 Data ownership and copyright -- 6.5 Added value information -- 6.6 Liability and GIS -- 6.7 Accuracy of information -- 6.8 Inappropriate map usage -- 6.9 Data availability and government policy -- 7: Standards for spatial information -- 7.1 The role of standards -- 7.2 Standards organisations -- 7.3 Data transfer standards -- 7.4 UK National Transfer Format -- 7.5 US Spatial Data Transfer Standard -- 7.6 DIGEST -- 7.7 ASRP Raster Standard -- 7.8 Other standards -- 7.9 Importance of standards -- 8: Analysis functions in GIS -- 8.1 Analysis in GIS -- 8.2 Manipulation versus analysis -- 8.3 Query and manipulation in integrated solutions -- 8.4 Statistical analysis -- 8.5 Modelling of spatial data -- 8.6 Models for managing derived data -- 8.7 Metadatabases and data dictionaries -- 8.8 Developing operating procedures for analytical processes -- 9: Graphical user interfaces -- 9.1 Human-computer interface -- 9.2 User-friendly GIS -- 9.3 Generic interface types -- 9.4 User interfaces for decision support systems -- 9.5 GIS-independent user interfaces -- 9.6 Specific applications of graphical user interfaces -- 9.7 Issues of communication -- 9.8 Help facilities -- 10: Visualisation -- 10.1 Cartographic visualisation -- 10.2 Perception and patterns -- 10.3 Map design issues -- 10.4 Colour and symbolisation -- 10.5 Typology and text placement -- 10.6 Interactive map specifications -- 10.7 Scientific visualisation -- 10.8 Terrain representation -- 10.9 Three dimensional visualisation -- 10.10 Perspective cartography -- 10.11 Visualisaton of temporal information -- 10.12 Virtual reality -- 11: Image-based spatial information systems -- 11.1 Image-based information systems -- 11.2 Vertical aerial photography -- 11.3 Photogrammetric data collection -- 11.4 Recent technical advances -- 11.5 Photo interpretation -- 11.6 Orthophotos -- 11.7 Digital photogrammetry -- 11.8 Seamless aerial photography -- 11.9 Changing role of aerial photography in GIS -- 11.10 Remote sensing -- 11.11 Image analysis -- 11.12 Role of remote sensing -- 11.13 Integrated image-based systems -- 12: Multimedia and hypermaps -- 12.1 The multimedia concept -- 12.2 Multimedia data -- 12.3 Digital video -- 12.4 Sound -- 12.5 Animation -- 12.6 Hypertext concept -- 12.7 Hyperdocuments -- 12.8 Hypertext user interfaces -- 12.9 Hypermaps -- 12.10 Cartographic representation in multimedia -- 12.11 Integrated geo-based multimedia solutions -- Appendix A: Acronyms -- Appendix B: A summary of the main GIS and related software that has been developed for microcomputers.
    Abstract: This book was inspired by the revolution in geographical information systems during the late 1970s and 1980s which introduced to many the concept of computer-based information systems for spatially referenced data. The map, the aerial photograph and the satellite image were wedded to a database of textual information through the rapidly developing technology of powerful graphics workstations. This brought the skills of the geographer to a wide range of disciplines and specialists. But this book is not about the basic concepts of geographical information systems themselves. It is not about hardware or software per se, nor the integral concepts of geo-referenced data handling built into such systems; these are to be found in a growing number of introductory texts on the subject. Instead the focus of this book is on of geo-information management. the much wider issues While an understanding of the systems, their capabilities and limitations is necessary, of greater importance to the long term application of geographical understanding to problem solving is the wider context of information handling. Spatial data are becoming increasingly important in understanding the issues that confront the world. Chapter 1 is a discussion of the general issues which relate to management and information systems. It concludes with review of spatial decision support systems which are of increasing importance to the GIS community.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1: Information management1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Spatial data systems -- 1.3 Decision making -- 1.4 Organisations and their objectives -- 1.5 The management of information -- 1.6 Information networks -- 1.7 Information systems -- 1.8 Geo-information systems -- 1.9 Spatial decision support systems -- 2: Data for geo-information systems -- 2.1 Data into information -- 2.2 Describing geographic location -- 2.3 Objects and hierarchies -- 2.4 Maps and cartographic representation -- 2.5 Considerations in using maps -- 2.6 Map-based geo-information systems -- 2.7 Data derived from spatial analysis -- 2.8 Address-based spatial information -- 2.9 Postcodes -- 2.10 Other spatial datasets -- 2.11 Attribute data -- 2.12 Metadata -- 3: Geo-information databases -- 3.1 Choosing the right data structure -- 3.2 Data structures and data models -- 3.3 Spatial data models -- 3.4 Spatial data structures -- 3.5 Problems of three dimensional data -- 3.6 Temporal data model -- 3.7 Database management systems -- 3.8 Physical and logical database design -- 3.9 DBMS structures -- 3.10 Standard query language (SQL) -- 3.11 Object-oriented databases -- 4: Integrated approaches to GIS -- 4.1 Benefits of information integration -- 4.2 Integrated data models -- 4.3 Information networks -- 4.4 Integration with existing databases -- 4.5 Open systems environment -- 4.6 Integration frameworks -- 4.7 Corporate solutions -- 4.8 Organisational issues -- 4.9 Implementation strategies -- 4.10 Benefits and costs -- 5: Low cost spatial information systems -- 5.1 Low cost strategies -- 5.2 Development of the microcomputer -- 5.3 Availability of software -- 5.4 Developing technologies -- 5.5 Stand alone solutions -- 5.6 Network solutions -- 5.7 Data availability -- 5.8 Human resourcing issues -- 5.9 Implementation issues -- 5.10 Low cost GIS users -- 6: Copyright and legal issues -- 6.1 Who owns the data? -- 6.2 Law related to information -- 6.3 Access to information -- 6.4 Data ownership and copyright -- 6.5 Added value information -- 6.6 Liability and GIS -- 6.7 Accuracy of information -- 6.8 Inappropriate map usage -- 6.9 Data availability and government policy -- 7: Standards for spatial information -- 7.1 The role of standards -- 7.2 Standards organisations -- 7.3 Data transfer standards -- 7.4 UK National Transfer Format -- 7.5 US Spatial Data Transfer Standard -- 7.6 DIGEST -- 7.7 ASRP Raster Standard -- 7.8 Other standards -- 7.9 Importance of standards -- 8: Analysis functions in GIS -- 8.1 Analysis in GIS -- 8.2 Manipulation versus analysis -- 8.3 Query and manipulation in integrated solutions -- 8.4 Statistical analysis -- 8.5 Modelling of spatial data -- 8.6 Models for managing derived data -- 8.7 Metadatabases and data dictionaries -- 8.8 Developing operating procedures for analytical processes -- 9: Graphical user interfaces -- 9.1 Human-computer interface -- 9.2 User-friendly GIS -- 9.3 Generic interface types -- 9.4 User interfaces for decision support systems -- 9.5 GIS-independent user interfaces -- 9.6 Specific applications of graphical user interfaces -- 9.7 Issues of communication -- 9.8 Help facilities -- 10: Visualisation -- 10.1 Cartographic visualisation -- 10.2 Perception and patterns -- 10.3 Map design issues -- 10.4 Colour and symbolisation -- 10.5 Typology and text placement -- 10.6 Interactive map specifications -- 10.7 Scientific visualisation -- 10.8 Terrain representation -- 10.9 Three dimensional visualisation -- 10.10 Perspective cartography -- 10.11 Visualisaton of temporal information -- 10.12 Virtual reality -- 11: Image-based spatial information systems -- 11.1 Image-based information systems -- 11.2 Vertical aerial photography -- 11.3 Photogrammetric data collection -- 11.4 Recent technical advances -- 11.5 Photo interpretation -- 11.6 Orthophotos -- 11.7 Digital photogrammetry -- 11.8 Seamless aerial photography -- 11.9 Changing role of aerial photography in GIS -- 11.10 Remote sensing -- 11.11 Image analysis -- 11.12 Role of remote sensing -- 11.13 Integrated image-based systems -- 12: Multimedia and hypermaps -- 12.1 The multimedia concept -- 12.2 Multimedia data -- 12.3 Digital video -- 12.4 Sound -- 12.5 Animation -- 12.6 Hypertext concept -- 12.7 Hyperdocuments -- 12.8 Hypertext user interfaces -- 12.9 Hypermaps -- 12.10 Cartographic representation in multimedia -- 12.11 Integrated geo-based multimedia solutions -- Appendix A: Acronyms -- Appendix B: A summary of the main GIS and related software that has been developed for microcomputers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 15
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468471151
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I. Conversions and Equivalents -- II. Water Chemistry -- III. Enrichment Formulations -- IV. Hatchery Systems and Methods -- V. Plumbing and Materials -- VI. Feeds and Nutrition -- VII. Aquaculture Ponds -- VIII. Chemicals and Treatments -- References.
    Abstract: As the aquaculture industry has expanded throughout the world, it has embraced the experiences of many fields of study to meet increasing technological challenges. The complexities of modern hatchery methodology, more intensive growout systems, and the application of diverse biological and physical sciences to aquatic animal husbandry have reached beyona the ability of most aquaculturists to enjoy an in-depth knowledge of all phases of the aquaculture process. More importantly, in order for tne culturist to have at hand the information necessary to make basic decisions, it requires an extensive library of textbooks and scientific literature. The Aquaculture Desk Reference serves as a concise compila­ tion of tables, graphs, conversions, formulas and design specifica­ tions useful to the aquaculture industry. It also provides examples, in a straightforward manner, of how information in tabulature can be used to derive values for specific system design and process strategies. Tables and graphs in this volume also provide back­ ground documentation and authority for further reference. The Aquaculture Desk Reference is a convenient source book that will alleviate the need for an extensive personal library to access basic information useful for practicing aquaculturists. Many thanks to Mrs. Ruth Aldrich for her assistance in the preparation of this book. My family, friends and associates also deserve my special appreciation for their encouragement and sup­ port.
    Description / Table of Contents: I. Conversions and EquivalentsII. Water Chemistry -- III. Enrichment Formulations -- IV. Hatchery Systems and Methods -- V. Plumbing and Materials -- VI. Feeds and Nutrition -- VII. Aquaculture Ponds -- VIII. Chemicals and Treatments -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 16
    ISBN: 9781468465518
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Section I Introduction -- 1 The i386/i486 Architecture -- Section II Real-Address Mode -- 2 Programming in Real-Address Mode -- Section III Protected Mode -- 3 Memory Management -- 4 Enter and Leave Protected Mode -- 5 Page Programming -- 6 Control Transfers -- 7 Multitasking -- 8 Debugging -- 9 Input/Output -- 10 Exceptions and Interrupts -- Section IV Virtual-8086 Mode -- 11V86 Mode Programming -- Section V Appendices -- Appendix A Sample i486 Programs -- Appendix B The i386/i486 Instruction Set -- Appendix C Assembler and Linker.
    Abstract: This book gives x86 assembly language programmers a view about how to use the resources and features provided by the i386/i486 processor, the newest and most advanced microprocessor from the Intel x86 family. Because the i386/i486 processor is entirely compatible with its predecessor, the 8086/88 processor, this book concentrates on the enhanced features compared to its predecessor. We assume the reader is already familiar with the concepts of 8086/88 assembly language programming. Our goal is to show you the programming methods that apply to powerful features of the i386/i486. The i387 math coprocessor is not discussed in this book. A detailed explanation about how to use each i386/i486 instruction is not covered in this book. However, we list the complete i386/i486 instruction set in Appendix B. Organization of the Book This book is divided into sections to help readers start learning from the concepts that are similar to the 8086/8088 processor. Then, the discussion shifts to the resources and environment of the i386/i486 processor. Throughout the book, real-life program examples are used to illustrate in detail how you can use the enhanced features or functions of the processor. Chapter 1 introduces the i386/i486 architecture and its enhanced features. The discussion includes the operation mode, general registers, segment registers, system registers, and system data structures. Chapter 2 discusses the method that the i386/i486 processor uses to make itself fully compatible with the 8086/88 processor and to define the interrupt vector table address, which is different from the 8086/88 processor.
    Description / Table of Contents: Section I Introduction1 The i386/i486 Architecture -- Section II Real-Address Mode -- 2 Programming in Real-Address Mode -- Section III Protected Mode -- 3 Memory Management -- 4 Enter and Leave Protected Mode -- 5 Page Programming -- 6 Control Transfers -- 7 Multitasking -- 8 Debugging -- 9 Input/Output -- 10 Exceptions and Interrupts -- Section IV Virtual-8086 Mode -- 11V86 Mode Programming -- Section V Appendices -- Appendix A Sample i486 Programs -- Appendix B The i386/i486 Instruction Set -- Appendix C Assembler and Linker.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 17
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401180900
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Fundamentals For All Capacitors -- Application Information -- 2 Ceramic Capacitors -- Application Information -- 3 Plastic Film Capacitors -- Application Information -- 4 Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors -- Production Technology -- Electro-mechanical Considerations -- 5 Tantalum Capacitors -- Tantalum Foil Style -- Wet Tantalum Style -- Solid Tantalum Style -- Application Information -- 6 Glass Capacitors -- Application Information -- 7 Mica Capacitors -- Application Information -- Appendix A Capacitor Selection Guidelines -- Ceramic -- Paper/Plastic Dielectric -- Aluminum Electrolytic -- Tantalum Electrolytic -- Glass -- Mica -- Trimmer Capacitors -- Appendix B Equations and Symbol Definitions -- Basic Capacitor Formulas -- Metric Prefixes -- Symbols.
    Abstract: A long and varied experience in many areas of electronic circuit design has convinced me that capacitors are the most misunderstood and misused electronic component. This book provides practical guidance in the understanding, construction, use, and application of capacitors. Theory, combined with circuit application advice, will help to under­ stand what goes on in each component and in the final design. All chapters are arranged with the theory of the dielectric type discussed first, followed by circuit application information. With all chapters arranged in the same manner, this will make reading and using this book for reference easier. A practical glossary of terms used in the capacitor industry is included. The first chapter covers basic information that applies to all types of capacitors. Each following chapter addresses a different capacitor dielectric. This book could have been titled: 'Everything You Wanted To Know About Capacitors, But Were Afraid To Ask .. .' ix Preface THE CAPACITOR HANDBOOK Chapter 1 Fundamentals For All Capacitors For all practical purposes, consider only the parallel plate capacitor as illustrated in Fig. 1.1-two conductors or electrodes separated by a dielectric material of uniform thickness. The conductors can be any material that will conduct electricity easily. The dielectric must be a poor conductor-an insulator. Conductor (Electrode) Dielectric ,;~;...--~ Conductor (Electrode) 1..-----Wire to Outside World Fig. 1.1 The Parallel-Plate Capacitor Fig. 1.2 illustrates the symbol for a capacitor used in schematic diagrams of electronic circuits. The symbol resembles a parallel-plate model.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Fundamentals For All CapacitorsApplication Information -- 2 Ceramic Capacitors -- Application Information -- 3 Plastic Film Capacitors -- Application Information -- 4 Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors -- Production Technology -- Electro-mechanical Considerations -- 5 Tantalum Capacitors -- Tantalum Foil Style -- Wet Tantalum Style -- Solid Tantalum Style -- Application Information -- 6 Glass Capacitors -- Application Information -- 7 Mica Capacitors -- Application Information -- Appendix A Capacitor Selection Guidelines -- Ceramic -- Paper/Plastic Dielectric -- Aluminum Electrolytic -- Tantalum Electrolytic -- Glass -- Mica -- Trimmer Capacitors -- Appendix B Equations and Symbol Definitions -- Basic Capacitor Formulas -- Metric Prefixes -- Symbols.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 18
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461534501
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 274 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Computer networks . ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Local ATM -- Architecture of Local and Metropolitan ATM Networks: New Trends -- Supercomputer Communications as an Application for ATM Local Area Networks -- Gigabit Local Area Networks -- Congestion Control I -- An Overview of Bandwidth Management Procedures in High-Speed Networks -- Performance of the Buffered Leaky Bucket Policing Mechanism -- Congestion Control II -- Explicit Foward Congestion Notification in ATM Networks -- A Novel Architecture and Flow Control Scheme for Private ATM Networks -- Gateway Congestion Controls in High-Speed Backbone Networks -- Standards -- What’s New in B-ISDN Standards? -- Routing -- Routing in ATM Networks -- A Queueing-Network Model for Half-Duplex Routing in Data Communication Networks -- Transport Protocols -- The Xpress Transfer Protocol -- Radiology Communications for Imaging Systems -- High-Speed Transport Protocol Evaluation in the VISTAnet Project -- Traffic Measurements -- Traffic Models for ISDN and B-ISDN Users -- Traffic Characterization in a Wide Area Network -- Telecommunications Software Engineering -- Engineering of Telecommunications Software -- Reliability of Telecommunications Software: Assessing Sensitivity of Least Squares Reliability Estimates -- Software Metrics and the Quality of Telecommunication Software.
    Abstract: TriComm '92 was the fifth in the series of Research Triangle conferences on Computer Communications. This series emerged from a need to provide a forum for the people who are actively involved in Research and Development in the Research Triangle area in which they could present and discuss new ideas in Computer Communications. TriComm '92 was dedicated to High Speed networks. In particular, the program was developed around the following themes: local ATM, preventive and reactive congestion control. routing. transport protocols. traffic measurements, software engineering for telecommunication systems. and standards. I would like to thank all the speakers who agreed to present a paper. and the members of the program committee who patiently refereed the papers despite their busy schedules. I would also like to thank Mr. Ed Bowen, IBM, Research Triangle Park, for covering the expenses for the preparation of the pre-conference proceedings. and Dr. Raif Onvural. IBM, Research Triangle Park, for overseeing the photocopying of the proceedings. I would also like to thank my "Guardian Angel" Ms. Margaret Hudacko. Center for Communications and Signal Processing. State University, who made all the local arrangements. North Carolina Without her help, this conference would have been a complete disaster. Many thanks also go to Norene Miller. Center for Communications and Signal Processing. North Carolina State University. Finally. I would like to thank Mr. Charles Lord, Eastern NC Chapter of the IEEE Communications SOCiety. for providing us with mailing lists.
    Description / Table of Contents: Local ATMArchitecture of Local and Metropolitan ATM Networks: New Trends -- Supercomputer Communications as an Application for ATM Local Area Networks -- Gigabit Local Area Networks -- Congestion Control I -- An Overview of Bandwidth Management Procedures in High-Speed Networks -- Performance of the Buffered Leaky Bucket Policing Mechanism -- Congestion Control II -- Explicit Foward Congestion Notification in ATM Networks -- A Novel Architecture and Flow Control Scheme for Private ATM Networks -- Gateway Congestion Controls in High-Speed Backbone Networks -- Standards -- What’s New in B-ISDN Standards? -- Routing -- Routing in ATM Networks -- A Queueing-Network Model for Half-Duplex Routing in Data Communication Networks -- Transport Protocols -- The Xpress Transfer Protocol -- Radiology Communications for Imaging Systems -- High-Speed Transport Protocol Evaluation in the VISTAnet Project -- Traffic Measurements -- Traffic Models for ISDN and B-ISDN Users -- Traffic Characterization in a Wide Area Network -- Telecommunications Software Engineering -- Engineering of Telecommunications Software -- Reliability of Telecommunications Software: Assessing Sensitivity of Least Squares Reliability Estimates -- Software Metrics and the Quality of Telecommunication Software.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 19
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461572961
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Engineering geology. ; Geotechnical engineering. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction and Overview -- 1.1 Need for Trenchless Technology -- 1.2 Horizontal Boring Techniques -- 1.3 General Procedures -- 1.4 Selection of Method -- 1.5 Limitations -- 1.6 Future Outlook -- 1.7 Looking Ahead -- 2 Background -- 2.1 Early Underground Work -- 2.2 The Stimulus of the Industrial Revolution -- 2.3 Early Trenchless Methods—1890–1960 -- 2.4 Trenchless Methods—1960–1985 -- 3 Creating the Hole -- 3.1 Thrust Boring -- 3.2 Impact Moling -- 3.3 Impact Ramming -- 3.4 Rock Hammer -- 3.5 Auger Boring -- 3.6 Wet/Slurry Boring -- 3.7 Fluid Jet Cutting -- 3.8 Pipe Jacking and Microtunnelling -- 3.9 Rotary/Directional Drilling -- 4 Steerable Horizontal Boring -- 4.1 Methods of Steering the Bit -- 4.2 Available Systems -- 4.3 Planning the Job -- 4.4 Applications -- 4.5 Preventing and Controlling Problems -- 5 Pipe Jacking and Microtunnelling -- 5.1 Pipe Jacking -- 5.2 Microtunnelling -- 6 On-Line Replacement and Structural Renovation -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Options -- 6.3 On-Line Replacement -- 6.4 Renovation -- 7 Instrumentation Systems for Guided Boring -- 7.1 Unguided Systems -- 7.2 Guided Boring -- 7.3 Guidance Instrumentation Systems -- 7.4 Equipment Selection -- 7.5 Needs and Future Trends -- 8 Economics of Trenchless Technology -- 8.1 Economic Costs -- 8.2 Open-Cut Method -- 8.3 Economic Studies and Models -- 8.4 Effect of Drilling Rate -- 8.5 System Utilization -- 9 Investigation, Routing, and Location -- 9.1 Selection of Trenchless Equipment -- 9.2 Planning and Design of Project -- 9.3 Job Implementation and Precautions -- 10 Case Histories -- 10.1 Case History 1: Horizontal Drilling -- 10.2 Case History 2: Guided Piercing Tool -- 10.3 Case History 3: Microtunnelling -- 10.4 Case History 4: Pipeline Insertion Machine -- 10.5 Case History 5: UTILX Guidedril Tunnelling Machine -- 10.6 Case History 6: Microtunnelling -- 10.7 Case History 7: Renovation -- 11 Future Needs -- 11.1 The Future in Perspective -- 11.2 Attitudes and Awareness -- 11.3 Technical Needs.
    Abstract: In the past decade, the field of trenchless technology has expanded rapidly in products, equipment, and utilization. This expansion would not have occurred without a strong increase in economic incentives to the user. Because the operating environment has changed, trenchless technology is often the preferred alternative to traditional methods of digging holes and installing conduits. The infrastructure in which we live has become more congested and has to be shared by several users. In addition, the cost of restoring a road or landscaped area after construction may be higher than the cost of installing the conduit. These factors add to the need for trenchless technology-the ability to dig holes without disturbing the surface. In some ways, trenchless technology is a futuristic concept. Ruth Krauss in a children's book of definitions wrote, "A Hole .. .Is to Dig." But this statement is not necessarily true. Today, a hole could be to bore.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction and Overview1.1 Need for Trenchless Technology -- 1.2 Horizontal Boring Techniques -- 1.3 General Procedures -- 1.4 Selection of Method -- 1.5 Limitations -- 1.6 Future Outlook -- 1.7 Looking Ahead -- 2 Background -- 2.1 Early Underground Work -- 2.2 The Stimulus of the Industrial Revolution -- 2.3 Early Trenchless Methods-1890-1960 -- 2.4 Trenchless Methods-1960-1985 -- 3 Creating the Hole -- 3.1 Thrust Boring -- 3.2 Impact Moling -- 3.3 Impact Ramming -- 3.4 Rock Hammer -- 3.5 Auger Boring -- 3.6 Wet/Slurry Boring -- 3.7 Fluid Jet Cutting -- 3.8 Pipe Jacking and Microtunnelling -- 3.9 Rotary/Directional Drilling -- 4 Steerable Horizontal Boring -- 4.1 Methods of Steering the Bit -- 4.2 Available Systems -- 4.3 Planning the Job -- 4.4 Applications -- 4.5 Preventing and Controlling Problems -- 5 Pipe Jacking and Microtunnelling -- 5.1 Pipe Jacking -- 5.2 Microtunnelling -- 6 On-Line Replacement and Structural Renovation -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Options -- 6.3 On-Line Replacement -- 6.4 Renovation -- 7 Instrumentation Systems for Guided Boring -- 7.1 Unguided Systems -- 7.2 Guided Boring -- 7.3 Guidance Instrumentation Systems -- 7.4 Equipment Selection -- 7.5 Needs and Future Trends -- 8 Economics of Trenchless Technology -- 8.1 Economic Costs -- 8.2 Open-Cut Method -- 8.3 Economic Studies and Models -- 8.4 Effect of Drilling Rate -- 8.5 System Utilization -- 9 Investigation, Routing, and Location -- 9.1 Selection of Trenchless Equipment -- 9.2 Planning and Design of Project -- 9.3 Job Implementation and Precautions -- 10 Case Histories -- 10.1 Case History 1: Horizontal Drilling -- 10.2 Case History 2: Guided Piercing Tool -- 10.3 Case History 3: Microtunnelling -- 10.4 Case History 4: Pipeline Insertion Machine -- 10.5 Case History 5: UTILX Guidedril Tunnelling Machine -- 10.6 Case History 6: Microtunnelling -- 10.7 Case History 7: Renovation -- 11 Future Needs -- 11.1 The Future in Perspective -- 11.2 Attitudes and Awareness -- 11.3 Technical Needs.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 20
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781489926531
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVI, 240 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Security systems. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 Program Design and Initiation -- 3 Comprehensive Descriptive Method -- 4 Quality Ratings Method -- 5 “In/Out” Method -- 6 Difference-from-Control Method (Degree of Difference) -- Appendix 1 Basic Data Analysis Methods -- Graphical Summaries -- Summary Statistics -- Confidence Intervals -- Appendix 2 Statistical Hypothesis Testing -- Type I and Type II Errors -- Example of a Statistical Hypothesis Test -- Appendix 3 The Statistical Design of Sensory Panels -- Randomized (Complete) Block Designs -- Balanced Incomplete Block Designs -- Appendix 4 Multivariate Methods -- Multivariate Summary Statistics -- Principal Components/Factor Analysis -- Cluster Analysis -- Appendix 5 Statistical Quality Control -- Control Charts -- R-Charts -- I-Charts -- Statistical Control Versus Specifications -- Panel Maintenance -- References.
    Abstract: This book addresses an important, but so far neglected, topic: the application of sensory evaluation to quality control. Although several articles have been pub­ lished that have discussed concepts of quality control/sensory evaluation (QC/sen­ sory) programs, Sensory Evaluation in Quality Control is the first publication that addresses this topic in a comprehensive and practical way. This book is com­ prehensive, in that it presents the sensory and statistical information that is needed to design and implement several types of QCfsensory programs at the plant level. The book is practical, in that it provides a step-by-step description of the complete process to implement such programs, and it illustrates this process through real examples encountered by various consumer products companies (e. g. , foods, personal care products, paper products). With this practical information, sensory and quality professionals can design and implement sound QC/sensory programs at the plant level. This book was developed to provide the sensory and quality professional with an overview and guide to apply, in a production facility, the unique techniques that are used to measure sensory responses. Therefore, the book is intended for QC and/or R&D personnel (e. g. , sensory managers and analysts, and quality profes­ sionals) in charge of implementing an in-plant program, as well as for the plant management and plant technical personnel (sensory coordinator and quality pro­ fessionals) who are ultimately responsible for the routine operation of the estab­ lished program.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 21
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401123747
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 229 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The baculoviruses -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Isolation and host range -- 1.3 Structure and classification -- 1.4 Baculovirus replication in vivo -- 1.5 Baculovirus replication in vitro -- 1.6 Genetic engineering of baculovirus insecticides -- 2 The development of baculovirus expression vectors -- 2.1 Introduction and historical perspective -- 2.2 The merits of the baculovirus expression system -- 2.3 General principles for inserting foreign genes into the baculovirus genome -- 2.4 Baculovirus transfer vectors -- 2.5 Selection of recombinant viruses -- 3 Processing of foreign proteins synthesized using baculovirus vectors in insect cells -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Glycosylation -- 3.3 Phosphorylation, acylation and amidation -- 3.4 Proteolytic processing -- 3.5 Cellular targeting and secretion -- 3.6 Tertiary and quaternary structure formation -- 3.7 Expression of viral genes -- 3.8 Expression of bacterial and fungal genes -- 3.9 Post-transcriptional processing -- 4 Construction of transfer vectors containing the foreign gene -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Isolation of foreign gene coding sequences -- 4.3 Modifying the ends of DNA molecules -- 4.4 Preparation of the transfer vector -- 4.5 DNA ligations -- 4.6 Transformation of bacteria -- 4.7 Screening for recombinant baculovirus transfer vectors -- 4.8 Analysis of recombinant transfer vectors -- 4.9 Isolation of highly purified plasmid DNA (maxi-preps) -- 5 Insect cell culture media and maintenance of insect cell lines -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Cell lines -- 5.3 Culture media -- 5.4 Preparation of culture media -- 5.5 Glassware and disposable plasticware -- 5.6 Insect cell culture -- 5.7 A guide to Sf cell seeding densities for experimental work -- 5.8 Freezing, storage and recovery of insect cells in liquid nitrogen -- 5.9 A guide to adapting cells to serum-free media -- 6 Propagation, titration and purification of AcMNPV in cell culture -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Infection of cells with virus for experimental work -- 6.3 Titration of virus by plaque-assay -- 6.4 Plaque-picking and plaque-purification -- 6.5 Amplification of virus stocks -- 6.6 Large-scale production of virus for the purification of virus particles -- 6.7 Purification of infectious virus DNA -- 6.8 Titration of virus by TCID50 -- 7 Production and selection of recombinant virus -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Preparation of linear AcMNPV.lacZ (or AcMNPV.SC) DNA -- 7.3 Co-transfection of insect cells -- 7.4 Separation of parental and recombinant viruses by plaque-assay -- 7.5 Plaque-purification and amplification of recombinant virus stocks -- 7.6 Amplification and detection of recombinant viruses by limiting dilution and dot-blot hybridization -- 8 Characterization of recombinant viruses -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Analysis of recombinant virus genomes -- 8.3 Analysis of foreign gene expression by polyacrylamide gel electophoresis, using unlabelled or radiolabelled cell proteins -- 8.4 Analysis of recombinant protein synthesis in insect cells using immunological techniques -- 8.5 Analysis of post-translational processing events in insect cells -- 8.6 Analysis of transcription in recombinant virus-infected cells -- 9 Scaling up the production of recombinant protein in insect cells; laboratory bench level -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Large-scale culture of insect cells -- 9.3 The importance of highly infectious virus stocks -- 9.4 Multiplicity of infection -- 9.5 The optimum time to harvest virus-infected cells -- 9.6 Purification of recombinant protein from infected cell cultures -- 10 Propagation of baculoviruses in insect larvae -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Rearing insects in the laboratory -- 10.3 Infection of insect larvae with polyhedra from cell culture -- 10.4 Purification of polyhedra from infected larvae -- 10.5 Bioassays of polyhedra -- 10.6 Purification of virus particles and DNA from polyhedra -- 10.7 Isolation of virus particles from infected larvae to establish infections in cell culture -- 10.8 Preparation of semi-synthetic insect diet -- 11 Trouble-shooting guide -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Insertion of foreign gene coding sequences into transfer vectors -- 11.3 Cell culture -- 11.4 Preparation of virus stocks and infectious DNA -- 11.5 Co-transfections -- 11.6 Baculovirus plaque-assays -- 11.7 Screening for recombinant viruses -- 11.8 Instability of recombinant viruses -- 11.9 Poor yields of recombinant protein -- Appendix A list of selected suppliers -- References.
    Abstract: The decision to write a book about the practical aspects of the baculovirus expression system stems from the numerous phone calls for help we have had, and from the many visitors to our labora­ tories requiring assistance to find the elusive polyhedrin-negative virus containing their favourite gene. We have also organized two expression system workshops and from the manuals we wrote for these, it seemed a logical progression to extend them into book form. We appreciate that those who are 'old-hands' at the baculovirus expression system may have differing views on some of our procedures, but the methods in this book are presented in the light of our own experiences in the laboratory and from our practical workshops, and we hope that the book will be especially useful to those new to the system. The first three chapters give the background information to the baculovirus expression system, and includes advice on how to choose the right transfer vector and discusses the various methods that are available to select recombinant viruses. The practical chapters concentrate on those aspects which are novel to the baculovirus system (insect cell culture, virus amplification and titration, etc. ) and, in general, leave the standard molecular biological techniques to the other excellent laboratory manuals that are available. However, for completeness sake and to avoid constant reference to other manuals, we have included brief details of some standard techniques where they are integral to the success of the baculovirus protocols.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The baculoviruses1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Isolation and host range -- 1.3 Structure and classification -- 1.4 Baculovirus replication in vivo -- 1.5 Baculovirus replication in vitro -- 1.6 Genetic engineering of baculovirus insecticides -- 2 The development of baculovirus expression vectors -- 2.1 Introduction and historical perspective -- 2.2 The merits of the baculovirus expression system -- 2.3 General principles for inserting foreign genes into the baculovirus genome -- 2.4 Baculovirus transfer vectors -- 2.5 Selection of recombinant viruses -- 3 Processing of foreign proteins synthesized using baculovirus vectors in insect cells -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Glycosylation -- 3.3 Phosphorylation, acylation and amidation -- 3.4 Proteolytic processing -- 3.5 Cellular targeting and secretion -- 3.6 Tertiary and quaternary structure formation -- 3.7 Expression of viral genes -- 3.8 Expression of bacterial and fungal genes -- 3.9 Post-transcriptional processing -- 4 Construction of transfer vectors containing the foreign gene -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Isolation of foreign gene coding sequences -- 4.3 Modifying the ends of DNA molecules -- 4.4 Preparation of the transfer vector -- 4.5 DNA ligations -- 4.6 Transformation of bacteria -- 4.7 Screening for recombinant baculovirus transfer vectors -- 4.8 Analysis of recombinant transfer vectors -- 4.9 Isolation of highly purified plasmid DNA (maxi-preps) -- 5 Insect cell culture media and maintenance of insect cell lines -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Cell lines -- 5.3 Culture media -- 5.4 Preparation of culture media -- 5.5 Glassware and disposable plasticware -- 5.6 Insect cell culture -- 5.7 A guide to Sf cell seeding densities for experimental work -- 5.8 Freezing, storage and recovery of insect cells in liquid nitrogen -- 5.9 A guide to adapting cells to serum-free media -- 6 Propagation, titration and purification of AcMNPV in cell culture -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Infection of cells with virus for experimental work -- 6.3 Titration of virus by plaque-assay -- 6.4 Plaque-picking and plaque-purification -- 6.5 Amplification of virus stocks -- 6.6 Large-scale production of virus for the purification of virus particles -- 6.7 Purification of infectious virus DNA -- 6.8 Titration of virus by TCID50 -- 7 Production and selection of recombinant virus -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Preparation of linear AcMNPV.lacZ (or AcMNPV.SC) DNA -- 7.3 Co-transfection of insect cells -- 7.4 Separation of parental and recombinant viruses by plaque-assay -- 7.5 Plaque-purification and amplification of recombinant virus stocks -- 7.6 Amplification and detection of recombinant viruses by limiting dilution and dot-blot hybridization -- 8 Characterization of recombinant viruses -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Analysis of recombinant virus genomes -- 8.3 Analysis of foreign gene expression by polyacrylamide gel electophoresis, using unlabelled or radiolabelled cell proteins -- 8.4 Analysis of recombinant protein synthesis in insect cells using immunological techniques -- 8.5 Analysis of post-translational processing events in insect cells -- 8.6 Analysis of transcription in recombinant virus-infected cells -- 9 Scaling up the production of recombinant protein in insect cells; laboratory bench level -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Large-scale culture of insect cells -- 9.3 The importance of highly infectious virus stocks -- 9.4 Multiplicity of infection -- 9.5 The optimum time to harvest virus-infected cells -- 9.6 Purification of recombinant protein from infected cell cultures -- 10 Propagation of baculoviruses in insect larvae -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Rearing insects in the laboratory -- 10.3 Infection of insect larvae with polyhedra from cell culture -- 10.4 Purification of polyhedra from infected larvae -- 10.5 Bioassays of polyhedra -- 10.6 Purification of virus particles and DNA from polyhedra -- 10.7 Isolation of virus particles from infected larvae to establish infections in cell culture -- 10.8 Preparation of semi-synthetic insect diet -- 11 Trouble-shooting guide -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Insertion of foreign gene coding sequences into transfer vectors -- 11.3 Cell culture -- 11.4 Preparation of virus stocks and infectious DNA -- 11.5 Co-transfections -- 11.6 Baculovirus plaque-assays -- 11.7 Screening for recombinant viruses -- 11.8 Instability of recombinant viruses -- 11.9 Poor yields of recombinant protein -- Appendix A list of selected suppliers -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 22
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461534846
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 171 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Introduction to Total Quality Management (TQM) -- 1 — Total Quality Management — worldwide effect -- 2 — The management methodology -- 3 — TQM principles -- Two Implementation of TQM -- 4 — The executive/management role -- 5 — TQM structure and top-down requirements -- 6 — Quality policy -- 7 — Measurement -- 8 — Quality improvement teams -- 9 — Education and training -- 10 — Involvement and commitment -- 11 — Supplier strategy -- 12 — Time to market -- 13 — Organizational design -- 14 — Summary -- Three Tools and Techniques for TQM.
    Abstract: TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT (TQM) - A COMPETITIVE EDGE In the context of the European and Western manufacturing challenge being set by the 'Far Eastern Machine', it is of critical importance that manufacturing competitiveness is improved in Western companies. The ability to export successfully is becoming even more critical to the economic well-being of developed countries worldwide. The Japanese domination of the motor cycle and domestic consumer markets has had a significant impact on the balance of payments in Western Europe and the USA. All the signs are that Japanese companies are ready and able to enter other markets aggressively, through takeovers, acquisitions and off-shore manufacturing facilities. In Western Europe, the creation of the 'Single Market' in 1992 has provided major opportunities for companies to increase their market share. Unfortunately, many companies in the West have shown an inability to succeed even in their market when faced with tough, well-organized opposition, such as that from the Far East. There is very little time left for Western companies to catch up - the challenge is becoming more fiercely competitive daily. The time to improve competitive edge may be too late for many companies, as the European frontiers are dismantled and the Japanese companies continue to build off-shore plants in Europe. For example, it is a fact that companies are increasingly x PREFACE being forced to achieve world class manufacturing capability in order to compete and, in many cases, survive.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Introduction to Total Quality Management (TQM)1 - Total Quality Management - worldwide effect -- 2 - The management methodology -- 3 - TQM principles -- Two Implementation of TQM -- 4 - The executive/management role -- 5 - TQM structure and top-down requirements -- 6 - Quality policy -- 7 - Measurement -- 8 - Quality improvement teams -- 9 - Education and training -- 10 - Involvement and commitment -- 11 - Supplier strategy -- 12 - Time to market -- 13 - Organizational design -- 14 - Summary -- Three Tools and Techniques for TQM.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 23
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401123068
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVI, 224 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Mars in the Solar System -- 1.1 The orbit and movements of Mars -- 1.2 Dimensions and mass -- 1.3 The Martian seasons -- 1.4 The pattern of discovery -- 1.5 Albedo markings -- 2 Spacecraft Exploration Of The Red Planet -- 2.1 Early Mars missions -- 2.2 Mariner 9 -- 2.3 Soviet Mars exploration -- 2.4 The Viking missions -- 2.5 The Soviet Phobos mission -- 3 The Present Face of Mars -- 3.1 The topography of Mars -- 3.2 Physiographic provinces -- 3.3 Thermal inertia mapping -- 3.4 The stratigraphy of Mars -- 3.5 Summary -- 4 The Atmosphere and Weather -- 4.1 The composition of the atmosphere -- 4.2 Atmospheric pressure variations -- 4.3 Isotopic abundances in the atmosphere -- 4.4 Atmospheric circulation pattern -- 4.5 Clouds -- 5 The Interior of Mars -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The figure and gravity of Mars -- 5.3 Internal density profile -- 5.4 Composition of the interior -- 5.5 Differentiation of the Martian crust -- 6 The Ancient Cratered Terrain -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 The Martian cratering record -- 6.3 Martian impact basins -- 6.4 Morphology of impact craters -- 6.5 Crater ejecta morphology -- 6.6 Channelling on the cratered plateau -- 6.7 Intercrater plains -- 6.8 Volcanoes of the cratered plateau -- 6.9 The geological story as revealed by the upland rocks -- 7 The Central Volcanoes of Mars -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Volcano distribution -- 7.3 Classification of volcano types -- 7.4 Volcano ages -- 7.5 Highland paterae -- 7.6 Shield volcanoes and paterae -- 7.7 Martian shields -- 7.8 Older Tharsis volcanoes -- 7.9 Alba Patera -- 7.10 The shield volcanoes of Elysium -- 7.11 Apollinaris Patera -- 7.12 Central volcanism on Mars -- 8 The Plains of Mars -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Noachian and Early Hesperian plains -- 8.3 Hesperian-age flow plains -- 8.4 The Medusae Fossae plains -- 8.5 Tempe Terra plains province -- 8.6 Volcanic plains of Amazonian age -- 8.7 Plains deposits of Hellas -- 8.8 The northern plains -- 8.9 Plains and major resurfacing events in Martian history -- 9 The Equatorial Canyons -- 9.1 General features of Valles Marineris -- 9.2 Details of canyon physiography -- 9.3 General form of canyon walls -- 9.4 Wall retreat and landslide deposits -- 9.5 Wall retreat - tributary canyon development -- 9.6 Interior deposits -- 9.7 Formation of the canyon system -- 10 Martian Channels and Chaotic Terrain -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Valley networks in the ancient cratered terrain -- 10.3 Outflow channels -- 10.4 Fretted channels -- 10.5 Chaotic terrain -- 11 The Polar Regions, Wind And Volatile Activity -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Nature of the polar caps -- 11.3 Laminated polar deposits -- 11.4 High-latitude plains and dune fields -- 11.5 Wind activity on Mars -- 12 The Geological History of Mars -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The tectonic history of Mars -- 12.3 The evolution of Tharsis -- 12.4 Some final thoughts concerning Tharsis -- 12.5 The crustal dichotomy -- 12.6 The geological development of Mars -- 12.7 Climatic and volatile history -- 13 The Next Steps -- 13.1 Future Mars missions -- 13.2 Climate and the search for life -- 13.3 Epilogue -- Appendices -- A Astronomical Data -- B Phobos and Deimos -- C Model Chronologies for Mars -- D Stratigraphy of Martian Geological Features and Units.
    Abstract: As I write this short preface, the red orb of Mars is high in the eastern sky, and is brighter than it has been for many years. Last night my telescope again revealed the strange polar hood which is a feature of the planet at this time in its cycle. Because of its current prominence in the night sky, it is a very appropriate time to bring together and reappraise what we know of Mars and look forward to the next wave of planetary exploration. The initial notion of writing a book about Mars is an exciting one; the practicalities involved in working through and completing the project are, however, more than a trifle exacting. The first problem I encountered was the sheer vastness of the library of information about Mars which now exists. The second was the natural extension of the first, that is, how best to analyse it and reach widely acceptable interpretations. I have tried to write the story of Mars in a logical and unbiased way, however, we all have our individual prejudices, and I would be less than truthful if I did not admit to personal bias here and there. With this in mind, I apologise to any authors who may feel either misinterpreted or less than adequately acknowledged. The project is now completed and has been superbly prepared by Chapman & Hall.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Mars in the Solar System1.1 The orbit and movements of Mars -- 1.2 Dimensions and mass -- 1.3 The Martian seasons -- 1.4 The pattern of discovery -- 1.5 Albedo markings -- 2 Spacecraft Exploration Of The Red Planet -- 2.1 Early Mars missions -- 2.2 Mariner 9 -- 2.3 Soviet Mars exploration -- 2.4 The Viking missions -- 2.5 The Soviet Phobos mission -- 3 The Present Face of Mars -- 3.1 The topography of Mars -- 3.2 Physiographic provinces -- 3.3 Thermal inertia mapping -- 3.4 The stratigraphy of Mars -- 3.5 Summary -- 4 The Atmosphere and Weather -- 4.1 The composition of the atmosphere -- 4.2 Atmospheric pressure variations -- 4.3 Isotopic abundances in the atmosphere -- 4.4 Atmospheric circulation pattern -- 4.5 Clouds -- 5 The Interior of Mars -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The figure and gravity of Mars -- 5.3 Internal density profile -- 5.4 Composition of the interior -- 5.5 Differentiation of the Martian crust -- 6 The Ancient Cratered Terrain -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 The Martian cratering record -- 6.3 Martian impact basins -- 6.4 Morphology of impact craters -- 6.5 Crater ejecta morphology -- 6.6 Channelling on the cratered plateau -- 6.7 Intercrater plains -- 6.8 Volcanoes of the cratered plateau -- 6.9 The geological story as revealed by the upland rocks -- 7 The Central Volcanoes of Mars -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Volcano distribution -- 7.3 Classification of volcano types -- 7.4 Volcano ages -- 7.5 Highland paterae -- 7.6 Shield volcanoes and paterae -- 7.7 Martian shields -- 7.8 Older Tharsis volcanoes -- 7.9 Alba Patera -- 7.10 The shield volcanoes of Elysium -- 7.11 Apollinaris Patera -- 7.12 Central volcanism on Mars -- 8 The Plains of Mars -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Noachian and Early Hesperian plains -- 8.3 Hesperian-age flow plains -- 8.4 The Medusae Fossae plains -- 8.5 Tempe Terra plains province -- 8.6 Volcanic plains of Amazonian age -- 8.7 Plains deposits of Hellas -- 8.8 The northern plains -- 8.9 Plains and major resurfacing events in Martian history -- 9 The Equatorial Canyons -- 9.1 General features of Valles Marineris -- 9.2 Details of canyon physiography -- 9.3 General form of canyon walls -- 9.4 Wall retreat and landslide deposits -- 9.5 Wall retreat - tributary canyon development -- 9.6 Interior deposits -- 9.7 Formation of the canyon system -- 10 Martian Channels and Chaotic Terrain -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Valley networks in the ancient cratered terrain -- 10.3 Outflow channels -- 10.4 Fretted channels -- 10.5 Chaotic terrain -- 11 The Polar Regions, Wind And Volatile Activity -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Nature of the polar caps -- 11.3 Laminated polar deposits -- 11.4 High-latitude plains and dune fields -- 11.5 Wind activity on Mars -- 12 The Geological History of Mars -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The tectonic history of Mars -- 12.3 The evolution of Tharsis -- 12.4 Some final thoughts concerning Tharsis -- 12.5 The crustal dichotomy -- 12.6 The geological development of Mars -- 12.7 Climatic and volatile history -- 13 The Next Steps -- 13.1 Future Mars missions -- 13.2 Climate and the search for life -- 13.3 Epilogue -- Appendices -- A Astronomical Data -- B Phobos and Deimos -- C Model Chronologies for Mars -- D Stratigraphy of Martian Geological Features and Units.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 24
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131209
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xii, 240 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 A simple factorial grazing experiment measured on 27 occasions -- 3 A 3 × 3 factorial with quantitative levels -- 4 Definable within-individual comparisons -- 5 Covariance -- 6 Pre-treatment observations in the design of experiments -- 7 Weighted regression, goodness-of-fit and related topics -- 8 Environmental variables -- 9 Correlation between series of random variables -- 10 Response (reaction) times -- Bibliographical note.
    Abstract: There are many excellent books on general statistical methods in agricul­ tural and biological research. These books cover a broad range of methods without going into detail on specialized topics. A number of topics including regression analysis, design of experiments, biological assay and categorical analysis have received in-depth treatment in specialized texts. Little appears in standard textbooks on experiments in which observations form sequences. The live weights of animals during a long-term experiment provide a familiar example of data forming a sequence, but many others occur: for example, moisture content of segments of soil cores, successive counts of insects in an orchard and hormone levels in blood over a period. Correla­ tions are likely to be found among the observations in all these examples. The book by Goldstein (1979) provided the first systematic coverage of the principles involved in longitudinal studies, but is mainly concerned with observational studies on humans. The main aims of this book are to provide research workers with methods of analysing data from comparative experiments with sequential obser­ vations and to demonstrate special features of the design of such experi­ ments. These aims are achieved by working through sets of data.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 A simple factorial grazing experiment measured on 27 occasions -- 3 A 3 × 3 factorial with quantitative levels -- 4 Definable within-individual comparisons -- 5 Covariance -- 6 Pre-treatment observations in the design of experiments -- 7 Weighted regression, goodness-of-fit and related topics -- 8 Environmental variables -- 9 Correlation between series of random variables -- 10 Response (reaction) times -- Bibliographical note.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 25
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131285
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (viii, 421 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Systems -- 1 Overview of manufacturing systems analysis in the technological age -- 2 Systems concepts -- Two Manufacturing -- 3 A conceptual model of a manufacturing system -- Three Systems Engineering -- 4 The general systems approach to problem-solving -- 5 Computer simulation in manufacturing systems analysis -- Four Manufacturing Systems -- 6 A design and evaluation methodology of manufacturing systems -- Appendices -- A Survey of traditional and current methods used for production planning and control of manufacturing systems -- A.1 Overview of production planning and control -- A.2 Traditional methodologies -- A.3 Integrated production planning and control -- A.4 Conclusion -- B Sample company document defining the system requirements for the control of supplies and services -- B.1 Introduction -- B.2 Objective -- B.3 Requirement of quality system -- C The PCModel instruction set -- C.1 Object movement -- C.2 Routeing control -- C.3 Arithmetic operation -- C.4 Data input/output -- References.
    Abstract: A technological book is written and published for one of two reasons: it either renders some other book in the same field obsolete or breaks new ground in the sense that a gap is filled. The present book aims to do the latter. On my return from industry to an academic career, I started writing this book because I had seen that a gap existed. Although a great deal of information appeared in the published literature about various technical aspects of advanced manufacturing technology (AMT), surprisingly little had been written about the systems con­ text within which the sophisticated hardware and software of AMT are utilized to increase efficiency. Therefore, I have attempted in this book to show how structured approaches in the design and evaluation of modern manufacturing plant may be adopted, with the objective of improving the performance of the factory as a whole. I hope this book will be a contribution to the newly recognized, multidisciplinary engineering function known as manufacturing sys­ tems engineering. The text has been designed specifically to demonstrate the systems aspects of modern manufacturing operations, including: systems con­ cepts of manufacturing operation; manufacturing systems modelling and evalua­ tion; and the structured design of manufacturing systems~ One of the major difficulties associated with writing a text of this nature stems from the diversity of the topics involved. I have attempted to solve this problem by adopting an overall framework into which the relevant topics are fitted.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Systems1 Overview of manufacturing systems analysis in the technological age -- 2 Systems concepts -- Two Manufacturing -- 3 A conceptual model of a manufacturing system -- Three Systems Engineering -- 4 The general systems approach to problem-solving -- 5 Computer simulation in manufacturing systems analysis -- Four Manufacturing Systems -- 6 A design and evaluation methodology of manufacturing systems -- Appendices -- A Survey of traditional and current methods used for production planning and control of manufacturing systems -- A.1 Overview of production planning and control -- A.2 Traditional methodologies -- A.3 Integrated production planning and control -- A.4 Conclusion -- B Sample company document defining the system requirements for the control of supplies and services -- B.1 Introduction -- B.2 Objective -- B.3 Requirement of quality system -- C The PCModel instruction set -- C.1 Object movement -- C.2 Routeing control -- C.3 Arithmetic operation -- C.4 Data input/output -- References.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 26
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401122665
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (IX, 224 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Calendering and embossing -- Calendering -- Embossing -- 2 Coating and laminating -- 3 Drying and curing -- Electron beam -- Hot air -- Infrared -- Radio frequency -- Ultraviolet -- 4 Fabrication -- Binding and print finishing terms -- Cartons and carton styles -- Board definitions -- Cutting and creasing definitions -- Adhesive and adhesion terms -- Miscellaneous items -- 5 Web and sheet operations -- Cutting processes -- Sheeting and sheet transportation -- Web transportation.
    Abstract: The term 'converting' is in widespread use yet there is no general agreement on its precise definition and scope. The converting industry is notoriously diffuse, encompassing wide web coating operations in paper and plastics packaging, trimming, sheeting and the intricate details of high quality bound book production. A bewildering array of jargon is in use, much of it based on customs and practices passed down for several generations and, increasingly, on new terms originating from the USA or mainland Europe. This book aims to satisfy the wishes of many converters for a standard reference work which can be used for education and as an aid to communication. The dictionary gives definitions of terms which may be encountered in any of the diverse group of technologies that is included under the general heading 'converting' which is defined as 'the process of transforming one or more preformed raw materials, usually in web or sheet form, to a state suitable for end use or further processing'. Thus both calendering and coating are included but only with reference to operations which are carried out separately from the paper machine, otherwise known as 'off-machine processes'. Also in­ cluded are methods of production of cartons, books, finished and coated papers, boards and laminates, and many other items of relevance to the paper and board, film, laminating, packaging and allied industries.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Calendering and embossingCalendering -- Embossing -- 2 Coating and laminating -- 3 Drying and curing -- Electron beam -- Hot air -- Infrared -- Radio frequency -- Ultraviolet -- 4 Fabrication -- Binding and print finishing terms -- Cartons and carton styles -- Board definitions -- Cutting and creasing definitions -- Adhesive and adhesion terms -- Miscellaneous items -- 5 Web and sheet operations -- Cutting processes -- Sheeting and sheet transportation -- Web transportation.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 27
    ISBN: 9789401123020
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVI, 260 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Most politicians have jumped on the conservation bandwagon, and nobody running for public office these days can afford to take an overtly anti­ environment stand. The fascination that children have for nature, the gen­ erous donations people make to conservation organizations, the votes cast for 'Green Parties,' the continuing popularity of zoos and wildlife films, and the strong sales of books about the environment all provide evidence to politicians that the general public supports the idea of conservation. Conservation has become a major issue for governments. No longer is it necessary for conservationists to campaign for getting the cause on the agenda: it is already there, at least as a talking point. The issue now is how to convert this generalized interest into real action. And among the many priorities competing for attention, how is a govern­ ment (or a private organization) to decide wh at to do first? From a very limited budget - for budgets will always be limited - what is the package of activities that is most likely to lead to the results that the public wants? lan Spellerberg attempts to address these questions which are at the he art of modern conservation action. It is relatively easy to prescribe useful activities that will benefit both the environment and the public at large.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 28
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401123167
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xix, 460 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 The Wiggler Field and Electron Dynamics -- 3 Incoherent Undulator Radiation -- 4 Coherent Emission: Linear Theory -- 5 Coherent Emission: Nonlinear Theory -- 6 Sideband Instabilities -- 7 Coherent harmonic Radiation -- 8 Optical Guiding -- 9 OScillator Configurations -- 10 Electromagnetic-wave Wigglers -- 11 Chaos in Free-electron Lasers -- Author Index.
    Abstract: At the time that we decided to begin work on this book, several other volumes on the free-electron laser had either been published or were in press. The earliest work of which we were aware was published in 1985 by Dr T. C. Marshall of Columbia University [1]. This book dealt with the full range of research on free-electron lasers, including an overview of the extant experiments. However, the field has matured a great deal since that time and, in our judgement, the time was ripe for a more extensive work which includes the most recent advances in the field. The fundamental work in this field has largely been approached from two distinct and, unfortunately, separate viewpoints. On the one hand, free-electron lasers at sub-millimetre and longer wavelengths driven by low-energy and high-current electron beams have been pursued by the plasma physics and microwave tube communities. This work has confined itself largely to the high-gain regimes in which collective effects may play an important role. On the other hand, short-wavelength free-electron lasers in the infrared and optical regimes have been pursued by the accelerator and laser physics community. Due to the high-energy and low-current electron beams appropriate to this spectral range, these experiments have operated largely in the low-gain single-particle regimes. The most recent books published on the free-electron laser by Dr C. A.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 The Wiggler Field and Electron Dynamics -- 3 Incoherent Undulator Radiation -- 4 Coherent Emission: Linear Theory -- 5 Coherent Emission: Nonlinear Theory -- 6 Sideband Instabilities -- 7 Coherent harmonic Radiation -- 8 Optical Guiding -- 9 OScillator Configurations -- 10 Electromagnetic-wave Wigglers -- 11 Chaos in Free-electron Lasers -- Author Index.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 29
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401128582
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction to Reliability and Risk Analysis -- 1.1 Historical perspective -- 1.2 Objectives of reliability and risk analyses -- 1.3 Subject areas. Modelling -- 1.4 Basic concepts -- 1.5 Planning, execution and use of reliability analysis -- 1.6 Planning, execution and use of risk analysis -- 1.7 Discussion -- 1.8 Problems -- 2 Basic Reliability and Risk Analysis Methods -- 2.1 Use of statistics -- 2.2 Failure mode and effect analysis -- 2.3 Fault tree analysis -- 2.4 Cause consequence analysis/Event tree analysis -- 2.5 Other reliability and risk analysis methods -- 2.6 Problems -- 3 Binary Models for Analysing System Reliability -- 3.1 Structural properties -- 3.2 Computing system reliability -- 3.3 Non-repairable systems -- 3.4 Repairable systems -- 3.5 Reliability importance measures -- 3.6 Dependent components -- 3.7 Problems -- 4 Multistate Models for Analysing System Reliability -- 4.1 Multistate monotone systems -- 4.2 Computing system reliability -- 4.3 A time dependent model -- 4.4 Discussion -- 4.5 Problems -- 5 Optimal Replacement Policies -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 General minimal repair, age replacement model -- 5.3 Block replacement model -- 5.4 On-condition replacement models -- 5.5 Problems -- 6 Safety Management -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Safety management in a company -- 6.3 Reliability management of a product -- 6.4 Problems -- 7 Some Applications -- 7.1 Risk analysis of an offshore oil and gas producing platform -- 7.2 Availability and life cycle costing in a gas project -- 7.3 Availability and life cycle costing related to a process instrumentation system -- 7.4 Discussion -- 7.5 Problems -- Appendicies -- A Probability Theory -- A.l Probabilities -- A.1.1 Probability concepts -- A.1.2 Rules for combining probabilities -- A.1.3 Conditional probabilities -- A.1.4 Independence -- A.2 Stochastic variables -- A.3 Some proofs -- A.3.1 Proof of formula (A.4) -- A.3.2 Probability calculations in event trees -- A.3.3 Proof of an error bound for the approximations (4.2) and (4.3). -- A.4 Problems -- B Stochastic Failure Models -- B.1 Non-repairable units -- B.1.1 Basic concepts -- B.1.2 Some common lifetime distributions -- B.2 Repairable units -- B.3 Binomial distribution -- B.4 Gamma function -- B.5 Problems -- C Statistical Analysis of Reliability Data -- C.1 Identification of lifetime distribution, Hazard plotting -- C.2 Estimation of parameters in lifetime distributions -- C.3 Statistical analysis of non-homogeneous Poisson processes -- C.4 Data sources -- C.5 Problems -- D Markov Models -- D.1 Introduction -- D.2 One component. No repair -- D.3 One repairable component -- D.4 Two repairable components -- D.5 Birth and death processes -- D.6 General formulation of a Markov process -- D.7 Problems -- E More on Stochastic Processes -- E.1 Renewal processes -- E.2 Renewal reward processes -- E.3 Regenerative processes -- E.4 Counting processes -- E.5 Proofs of some results in Chapters 3 and 5 -- E.5.1 Section 3.4.1 -- E.5.2 Section 3.4.2 -- E.5.3 Section 5.4 -- F An Algorithm for Calculating System Reliability -- G A Minimization Technique.
    Abstract: Analysis of reliability and risk is an important and integral part of planning, construction and operation of all technical systems. To be able to perform such analyses systematically and scientifically, there is usually a need for special methods and models. This book presents the most important of these. Particular emphasis has been placed on the ideas and the motivation for the use of the various methods and models. It has been an objective to compile a book which provides practising engineers and engineering graduates with the concepts and basic techniques for evaluating reliability and risk. It is hoped that the material presented will make them so familiar with the subject that they can carry out various types of analyses themselves and understand and make use of the more detailed applications and additional material which is available in the journals and publications associated with their own discipline. It has also been an objective to put reliability and risk analyses in context - how such analyses should be used in design and operation of components and systems. The material presented is modern and a large part of the book is at research level. The book focuses on analysis of repairable systems, not only non-repairable systems which have traditionally been given most attention in textbooks on reliability theory. Since most real-life systems are repairable, methods for analysing repairable systems are an important area of research. The book presents general methods, with most applications taken from offshore petro­ leum activities.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction to Reliability and Risk Analysis1.1 Historical perspective -- 1.2 Objectives of reliability and risk analyses -- 1.3 Subject areas. Modelling -- 1.4 Basic concepts -- 1.5 Planning, execution and use of reliability analysis -- 1.6 Planning, execution and use of risk analysis -- 1.7 Discussion -- 1.8 Problems -- 2 Basic Reliability and Risk Analysis Methods -- 2.1 Use of statistics -- 2.2 Failure mode and effect analysis -- 2.3 Fault tree analysis -- 2.4 Cause consequence analysis/Event tree analysis -- 2.5 Other reliability and risk analysis methods -- 2.6 Problems -- 3 Binary Models for Analysing System Reliability -- 3.1 Structural properties -- 3.2 Computing system reliability -- 3.3 Non-repairable systems -- 3.4 Repairable systems -- 3.5 Reliability importance measures -- 3.6 Dependent components -- 3.7 Problems -- 4 Multistate Models for Analysing System Reliability -- 4.1 Multistate monotone systems -- 4.2 Computing system reliability -- 4.3 A time dependent model -- 4.4 Discussion -- 4.5 Problems -- 5 Optimal Replacement Policies -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 General minimal repair, age replacement model -- 5.3 Block replacement model -- 5.4 On-condition replacement models -- 5.5 Problems -- 6 Safety Management -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Safety management in a company -- 6.3 Reliability management of a product -- 6.4 Problems -- 7 Some Applications -- 7.1 Risk analysis of an offshore oil and gas producing platform -- 7.2 Availability and life cycle costing in a gas project -- 7.3 Availability and life cycle costing related to a process instrumentation system -- 7.4 Discussion -- 7.5 Problems -- Appendicies -- A Probability Theory -- A.l Probabilities -- A.1.1 Probability concepts -- A.1.2 Rules for combining probabilities -- A.1.3 Conditional probabilities -- A.1.4 Independence -- A.2 Stochastic variables -- A.3 Some proofs -- A.3.1 Proof of formula (A.4) -- A.3.2 Probability calculations in event trees -- A.3.3 Proof of an error bound for the approximations (4.2) and (4.3). -- A.4 Problems -- B Stochastic Failure Models -- B.1 Non-repairable units -- B.1.1 Basic concepts -- B.1.2 Some common lifetime distributions -- B.2 Repairable units -- B.3 Binomial distribution -- B.4 Gamma function -- B.5 Problems -- C Statistical Analysis of Reliability Data -- C.1 Identification of lifetime distribution, Hazard plotting -- C.2 Estimation of parameters in lifetime distributions -- C.3 Statistical analysis of non-homogeneous Poisson processes -- C.4 Data sources -- C.5 Problems -- D Markov Models -- D.1 Introduction -- D.2 One component. No repair -- D.3 One repairable component -- D.4 Two repairable components -- D.5 Birth and death processes -- D.6 General formulation of a Markov process -- D.7 Problems -- E More on Stochastic Processes -- E.1 Renewal processes -- E.2 Renewal reward processes -- E.3 Regenerative processes -- E.4 Counting processes -- E.5 Proofs of some results in Chapters 3 and 5 -- E.5.1 Section 3.4.1 -- E.5.2 Section 3.4.2 -- E.5.3 Section 5.4 -- F An Algorithm for Calculating System Reliability -- G A Minimization Technique.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 30
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461532729
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVII, 302 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Base oils from petroleum -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Base oil composition -- 1.3 Products and specifications -- 1.4 Conventional base oil manufacturing methods -- 1.5 Modern catalytic processes -- 1.6 Future developments -- References -- 2 Synthetic base fluids -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Polyalphaolefins -- 2.3 Alkylated aromatics -- 2.4 Polybutenes -- 2.5 Synthetic esters -- 2.6 Polyalkylene glycols -- 2.7 Phosphate esters -- References -- 3 Detergents/dispersants -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Detergents -- 3.3 Dispersants -- 3.4 Other lubricants -- 3.5 Performance evaluation -- References -- Further reading -- 4 Oxidative degradation and stabilisation of mineral oil based lubricants -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Autoxidation of hydrocarbons -- 4.3 Oxidation stability of base oils -- 4.4 Inhibition of oxidative degradation of lubricants -- 4.5 Application of antioxidants -- 4.6 Future antioxidant technology -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 5 Viscosity index improvers and thickeners -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Overview of VI improver chemistry -- 5.3 Chemistry and manufacture of commercial VI improvers -- 5.4 Function and properties -- 5.5 Performance -- 5.6 Prognosis for future developments -- References -- 6 Miscellaneous additives -- 6.1 Friction modifiers -- 6.2 Pour point depressants -- 6.3 Demulsifiers and antifoams -- 6.4 Corrosion inhibitors -- Reference -- 7 The formulation of automotive lubricants -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 What type of lubricant is wanted? -- 7.3 Why there are so many types of lubricant -- 7.4 Multifunctional lubricants -- 7.5 Definition of lubricant performance -- 7.6 Lubricant formulation—the physical phase -- 8 Industrial lubricants -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Bearing lubricants -- 8.3 Compressor lubricants -- 8.4 Hydraulic lubricants (fluids) -- 8.5 Industrial gear lubricants -- 8.6 Turbine lubricants -- 8.7 Metalworking lubricants -- 8.8 Specialities -- References -- 9 Aviation lubricants -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Lubrication of rotary engines -- 9.3 Lubrication of conventional aircraft piston engines -- 9.4 Lubrication of aircraft turbine engines -- 9.5 Aircraft hydraulic fluids -- 9.6 Helicopter gearboxes -- 9.7 Undercarriage lubrication -- 9.8 Airframe lubrication -- 9.9 Safety aspects of aircraft lubrication -- 9.10 Space lubrication -- References -- 10 Marine lubricants -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Marine diesel engines -- 10.3 Fuel oil -- 10.4 Base oils -- 10.5 Additives -- 10.6 Properties and formulation of marine lubricants -- 10.7 System oils -- 10.8 Cylinder oils -- 10.9 Trunk piston engine oils -- 10.10 Used oil analysis -- References -- 11 Lubricating grease -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Structure and properties -- 11.3 Chemistry -- 11.4 Applications -- 11.5 Future developments -- 11.6 Conclusions -- References -- 12 Extreme-pressure and anti-wear additives -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Anti-wear additives -- 12.3 Extreme-pressure additives -- 12.4 Mechanisms of action of anti-wear and EP additives -- 12.5 Application of different classes of additive -- 12.6 Future developments -- References -- 13 Lubricants and their environmental impact -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Collection of waste lubricant -- 13.3 Treatment of collected lubricant -- 13.4 Re-refined base oil quality -- 13.5 Health and safety aspects of re-refined oil -- 13.6 Environmental considerations of waste lubricant -- 13.7 Environmental impact of ‘consumed’ lubricant -- 13.8 Biodegradation tests for oils -- 13.9 Future trends -- References -- Further reading.
    Abstract: The use oflubricants began in ancient times and has developed into a major international business through the need to lubricate machines of increasing complexity. The impetus for lubricant development has arisen from need, so lubricatingpractice has preceded an understanding ofthe scientific principles. This is not surprising as the scientific basis of the technology is, by nature, highly complex and interdisciplinary. However, we believe that the under­ standing of lubricant phenomena will continue to be developed at a mol­ ecular level to meet future challenges. These challenges will include the control of emissions from internal combustion engines, the reduction of friction and wear in machinery, and continuing improvements to lubricant performanceand life-time. More recently, there has been an increased understanding of the chemical aspects of lubrication, which has complemented the knowledge and under­ standing gained through studies dealing with physics and engineering. This book aims to bring together this chemical information and present it in a practical way. It is written by chemists who are authorities in the various specialisations within the lubricating industry, and is intended to be of interest to chemists who may already be working in the lubricating industry or in academia, and who are seeking a chemist's view of lubrication. It will also be of benefit to engineers and technologists familiar with the industry who require a more fundamental understanding oflubricants.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Base oils from petroleum1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Base oil composition -- 1.3 Products and specifications -- 1.4 Conventional base oil manufacturing methods -- 1.5 Modern catalytic processes -- 1.6 Future developments -- References -- 2 Synthetic base fluids -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Polyalphaolefins -- 2.3 Alkylated aromatics -- 2.4 Polybutenes -- 2.5 Synthetic esters -- 2.6 Polyalkylene glycols -- 2.7 Phosphate esters -- References -- 3 Detergents/dispersants -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Detergents -- 3.3 Dispersants -- 3.4 Other lubricants -- 3.5 Performance evaluation -- References -- Further reading -- 4 Oxidative degradation and stabilisation of mineral oil based lubricants -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Autoxidation of hydrocarbons -- 4.3 Oxidation stability of base oils -- 4.4 Inhibition of oxidative degradation of lubricants -- 4.5 Application of antioxidants -- 4.6 Future antioxidant technology -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 5 Viscosity index improvers and thickeners -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Overview of VI improver chemistry -- 5.3 Chemistry and manufacture of commercial VI improvers -- 5.4 Function and properties -- 5.5 Performance -- 5.6 Prognosis for future developments -- References -- 6 Miscellaneous additives -- 6.1 Friction modifiers -- 6.2 Pour point depressants -- 6.3 Demulsifiers and antifoams -- 6.4 Corrosion inhibitors -- Reference -- 7 The formulation of automotive lubricants -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 What type of lubricant is wanted? -- 7.3 Why there are so many types of lubricant -- 7.4 Multifunctional lubricants -- 7.5 Definition of lubricant performance -- 7.6 Lubricant formulation-the physical phase -- 8 Industrial lubricants -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Bearing lubricants -- 8.3 Compressor lubricants -- 8.4 Hydraulic lubricants (fluids) -- 8.5 Industrial gear lubricants -- 8.6 Turbine lubricants -- 8.7 Metalworking lubricants -- 8.8 Specialities -- References -- 9 Aviation lubricants -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Lubrication of rotary engines -- 9.3 Lubrication of conventional aircraft piston engines -- 9.4 Lubrication of aircraft turbine engines -- 9.5 Aircraft hydraulic fluids -- 9.6 Helicopter gearboxes -- 9.7 Undercarriage lubrication -- 9.8 Airframe lubrication -- 9.9 Safety aspects of aircraft lubrication -- 9.10 Space lubrication -- References -- 10 Marine lubricants -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Marine diesel engines -- 10.3 Fuel oil -- 10.4 Base oils -- 10.5 Additives -- 10.6 Properties and formulation of marine lubricants -- 10.7 System oils -- 10.8 Cylinder oils -- 10.9 Trunk piston engine oils -- 10.10 Used oil analysis -- References -- 11 Lubricating grease -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Structure and properties -- 11.3 Chemistry -- 11.4 Applications -- 11.5 Future developments -- 11.6 Conclusions -- References -- 12 Extreme-pressure and anti-wear additives -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Anti-wear additives -- 12.3 Extreme-pressure additives -- 12.4 Mechanisms of action of anti-wear and EP additives -- 12.5 Application of different classes of additive -- 12.6 Future developments -- References -- 13 Lubricants and their environmental impact -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Collection of waste lubricant -- 13.3 Treatment of collected lubricant -- 13.4 Re-refined base oil quality -- 13.5 Health and safety aspects of re-refined oil -- 13.6 Environmental considerations of waste lubricant -- 13.7 Environmental impact of ‘consumed’ lubricant -- 13.8 Biodegradation tests for oils -- 13.9 Future trends -- References -- Further reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 31
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468485479
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The Mechanisms of Hot Carrier Degradation -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Injection of Channel Hot Carriers in MOSFETs -- 1.3 Characterization Techniques -- 1.4 Charge Trapping and Dit-Generation Under Uniform Hot-Carrier Injection in MOSFETs -- 1.5 Charge Trapping and Dit-Generation Under Nonuniform Hot-Carrier Injection in MOSFETs -- 1.6 Conclusions -- 1.7 Acknowledgments -- References -- 2 Hot-Carrier Degradation Effects for DRAM Circuits -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Hot-Carrier Degradation in MOSFETs -- 2.3 Hot Carrier Impact on Circuit Operation -- 2.4 Circuit Hot-Electron Effect Simulation -- 2.5 ESD Latent Damage and Hot-Electron Reliability -- 2.6 Future Issues -- 2.7 Conclusions -- 2.8 Acknowledgments -- References -- 3 Hot Carrier Design Considerations in MOS Nonvolatile Memories -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Hot Carriers and EPROM -- 3.3 Hot Carriers and Flash Memory -- 3.4 Hot Carriers and Floating-Gate-Type EEPROMs -- 3.5 Hot Carriers and MNOS-Type EEPROMs -- 3.6 Conclusions -- 3.7 Acknowledgments -- References -- 4 Hot-Carrier Degradation During Dynamic Stress -- 4.1 The Problem of AC Hot-Carrier Degradation -- 4.2 Discussion of Transient Effects -- 4.3 Dynamic Degradation in Circuits -- 4.4 Conclusions -- References -- Appendices -- Appendix I On the Mathematical Formalism of the Hot-Carrier Currents in Semiconductor DevicesCheng T. Wang -- A1.1 Introduction -- A1.2 Mathematical Formalism -- A1.3 Conclusion -- References -- Appendix II Non-Local Field Effects on Carrier Transport in Ultra-Small-Size Devices Cheng T. Wang -- A2.1 Introduction -- A2.3 Drift Velocity as a Function of Distance -- A2.4 A Comparative Study of Field Effect on Drift Velocity -- A2.5 Conclusion -- A2.6 Acknowledgments -- References.
    Abstract: As device dimensions decrease, hot-carrier effects, which are due mainly to the presence of a high electric field inside the device, are becoming a major design concern. On the one hand, the detrimental effects-such as transconductance degradation and threshold shift-need to be minimized or, if possible, avoided altogether. On the other hand, performance­ such as the programming efficiency of nonvolatile memories or the carrier velocity inside the devices-need to be maintained or improved through the use of submicron technologies, even in the presence of a reduced power supply. As a result, one of the major challenges facing MOS design engineers today is to harness the hot-carrier effects so that, without sacrificing product performance, degradation can be kept to a minimum and a reli­ able design obtained. To accomplish this, the physical mechanisms re­ sponsible for the degradations should first be experimentally identified and characterized. With adequate models thus obtained, steps can be taken to optimize the design, so that an adequate level of quality assur­ ance in device or circuit performance can be achieved. This book ad­ dresses these hot-carrier design issues for MOS devices and circuits, and is used primarily as a professional guide for process development engi­ neers, device engineers, and circuit designers who are interested in the latest developments in hot-carrier degradation modeling and hot-carrier reliability design techniques. It may also be considered as a reference book for graduate students who have some research interests in this excit­ ing, yet sometime controversial, field.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The Mechanisms of Hot Carrier Degradation1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Injection of Channel Hot Carriers in MOSFETs -- 1.3 Characterization Techniques -- 1.4 Charge Trapping and Dit-Generation Under Uniform Hot-Carrier Injection in MOSFETs -- 1.5 Charge Trapping and Dit-Generation Under Nonuniform Hot-Carrier Injection in MOSFETs -- 1.6 Conclusions -- 1.7 Acknowledgments -- References -- 2 Hot-Carrier Degradation Effects for DRAM Circuits -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Hot-Carrier Degradation in MOSFETs -- 2.3 Hot Carrier Impact on Circuit Operation -- 2.4 Circuit Hot-Electron Effect Simulation -- 2.5 ESD Latent Damage and Hot-Electron Reliability -- 2.6 Future Issues -- 2.7 Conclusions -- 2.8 Acknowledgments -- References -- 3 Hot Carrier Design Considerations in MOS Nonvolatile Memories -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Hot Carriers and EPROM -- 3.3 Hot Carriers and Flash Memory -- 3.4 Hot Carriers and Floating-Gate-Type EEPROMs -- 3.5 Hot Carriers and MNOS-Type EEPROMs -- 3.6 Conclusions -- 3.7 Acknowledgments -- References -- 4 Hot-Carrier Degradation During Dynamic Stress -- 4.1 The Problem of AC Hot-Carrier Degradation -- 4.2 Discussion of Transient Effects -- 4.3 Dynamic Degradation in Circuits -- 4.4 Conclusions -- References -- Appendices -- Appendix I On the Mathematical Formalism of the Hot-Carrier Currents in Semiconductor DevicesCheng T. Wang -- A1.1 Introduction -- A1.2 Mathematical Formalism -- A1.3 Conclusion -- References -- Appendix II Non-Local Field Effects on Carrier Transport in Ultra-Small-Size Devices Cheng T. Wang -- A2.1 Introduction -- A2.3 Drift Velocity as a Function of Distance -- A2.4 A Comparative Study of Field Effect on Drift Velocity -- A2.5 Conclusion -- A2.6 Acknowledgments -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 32
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401122863
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Índice -- Parte I: El Estado de Medio Ambiente -- Capítulo 1: Contaminación atmosférica -- Capítulo 2: Agotamiento del ozono -- Capítulo 3: Cambios climáticos -- Capítulo 4: Contaminación marina -- Capítulo 5: Recursos de agua dulce y calidad del agua -- Capítulo 6: Degradación de la tierra y desertificación -- Capítulo 7: Deforestación y degradación de los bosques -- Capítulo 8: Pérdida de diversidad biológica -- Capítulo 9: Peligros ambientales -- Capítulo 10: Productos químicos tóxicos y desechos peligrosos -- Parte II: Actividades de Desarrollo y Medio Ambiente -- Capítulo 11: Agricultura y producción alimentaria -- Capítulo 12: Industria -- Capítulo 13: Producción y uso de energia -- Capítulo 14: Transporte -- Capítulo 15: Turismo -- Parte III: Condiciones de Vida y Bienestar Humano -- Capítulo 16: Crecimiento demográfico y desarrollo humano -- Capítulo 17: Asentamientos humanos -- Capítulo 18: Salud humana -- Capítulo 19: Paz, seguridad y medio ambiente -- Parte IV: Percepciones, Actitudes y Medidas Adoptadas -- Capítulo 20: Percepciones y actitudes -- Capítulo 21: Medidas adoptadas -- Parte V: Problemas Planteados y Medidas Prioritarias -- Capítulo 22: Problemas planteados y medidas prioritarias -- Referencias.
    Description / Table of Contents: ÍndiceParte I: El Estado de Medio Ambiente -- Capítulo 1: Contaminación atmosférica -- Capítulo 2: Agotamiento del ozono -- Capítulo 3: Cambios climáticos -- Capítulo 4: Contaminación marina -- Capítulo 5: Recursos de agua dulce y calidad del agua -- Capítulo 6: Degradación de la tierra y desertificación -- Capítulo 7: Deforestación y degradación de los bosques -- Capítulo 8: Pérdida de diversidad biológica -- Capítulo 9: Peligros ambientales -- Capítulo 10: Productos químicos tóxicos y desechos peligrosos -- Parte II: Actividades de Desarrollo y Medio Ambiente -- Capítulo 11: Agricultura y producción alimentaria -- Capítulo 12: Industria -- Capítulo 13: Producción y uso de energia -- Capítulo 14: Transporte -- Capítulo 15: Turismo -- Parte III: Condiciones de Vida y Bienestar Humano -- Capítulo 16: Crecimiento demográfico y desarrollo humano -- Capítulo 17: Asentamientos humanos -- Capítulo 18: Salud humana -- Capítulo 19: Paz, seguridad y medio ambiente -- Parte IV: Percepciones, Actitudes y Medidas Adoptadas -- Capítulo 20: Percepciones y actitudes -- Capítulo 21: Medidas adoptadas -- Parte V: Problemas Planteados y Medidas Prioritarias -- Capítulo 22: Problemas planteados y medidas prioritarias -- Referencias.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 33
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401123648
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 398 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 History and development of probiotics -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 History -- 1.3 Composition of probiotic preparations -- References -- 2 Bacterial interactions in the gut -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Methods for studying bacterial interactions -- 2.3 Main types of bacterial interactions in the gut -- 2.3 Conclusions -- References -- 3 Metabolic interactions in the gut -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Mammalian intestinal metabolism -- 3.3 Gut bacterial metabolism -- 3.4 Conclusions -- References -- 4 Translocation and the indigenous gut flora -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Defence against bacterial translocation -- 4.3 Bacterial translocation in animal models with multiple deficiencies in host defences -- 4.4 Conclusion -- References -- 5 Gut flora and disease resistance -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Colonization resistance -- 5.3 Suppression of the multiplication of pathogens by the intestinal microflora -- 5.4 Mechanisms responsible for suppression of pathogens -- 5.5 Conclusions -- 5.6 The probiotic concept -- References -- 6 Factors affecting the microecology of the gut -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Definitions -- 6.3 Use of one or a limited number of bacterial strains in probiotic preparations -- 6.4 Ecological considerations -- 6.5 Recommendations for future developments -- References -- 7 Probiotics and the immune state -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Effect of orally administered lactic acid bacteria on immunity: non-specific and specific immune response -- 7.3 Effect of oral administration on the secretory immune system -- 7.4 Effect on the protection against enteric infections -- References -- 8 Genetit manipulation of gut microorganisms -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Microbes of potential interest -- 8.3 Molecular genetical studies -- 8.4 Stability of genetic determinants -- 8.5 Possible developments -- 8.6 Release of genetically modified microbes -- 8.7 Conclusions -- References -- 9 Selection of strains for probiotic use -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Aim of this chapter -- 9.3 First steps in the choice of microbial strains -- 9.4 Species and viability of probiotic microorganisms -- 9.5 Processing of viable microorganisms to end-products -- 9.6 Resistance to in vivo conditions -- 9.7 Adherence and colonization -- 9.8 Antimicrobial activity -- 9.9 Gene technology -- 9.10 Conclusion -- References -- 10 Probiotics for chickens -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 The normal intestinal flora of poultry -- 10.3 Host—microbial flora interactions -- 10.4 The application of probiosis to poultry -- 10.5 Lactic acid bacteria as probiotics -- 10.6 Competitive exclusion -- 10.7 Immunity -- 10.8 Bacteriophages -- 10.9 Summary -- References -- 11 Probiotics for pigs -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Special features of pigs relevant to the use of probiotics -- 11.3 Current use of probiotics -- 11.4 Efficacy -- 11.5 Functional characteristics of potential probiotic strains -- 11.6 General discussion -- References -- 12 Probiotics for ruminants -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Probiotics for young ruminants -- 12.3 Fungal feed additives for adult ruminants -- 12.4 Bacterial probiotics for adult ruminants -- 12.5 Future developments -- References -- 13 Probiotics for humans -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Colonization of the gastrointestinal tract -- 13.3 Current use of probiotics -- 13.4 Nutritional benefits of probiotics -- 13.5 Therapeutic benefits of probiotics -- 13.6 More recent developments in the area of probiotics and health -- 13.7 Properties required for probiotics to be effective in nutritional and therapeutic settings -- 13.8 Future development of probiotics for human use -- 13.9 Future applications of probiotics -- 13.10 Techniques for probiotic modification -- References -- 14 Problems and prospects -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Factors affecting the probiotic response -- 14.3 Future developments -- 14.4 Summary -- References.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 History and development of probiotics1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 History -- 1.3 Composition of probiotic preparations -- References -- 2 Bacterial interactions in the gut -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Methods for studying bacterial interactions -- 2.3 Main types of bacterial interactions in the gut -- 2.3 Conclusions -- References -- 3 Metabolic interactions in the gut -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Mammalian intestinal metabolism -- 3.3 Gut bacterial metabolism -- 3.4 Conclusions -- References -- 4 Translocation and the indigenous gut flora -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Defence against bacterial translocation -- 4.3 Bacterial translocation in animal models with multiple deficiencies in host defences -- 4.4 Conclusion -- References -- 5 Gut flora and disease resistance -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Colonization resistance -- 5.3 Suppression of the multiplication of pathogens by the intestinal microflora -- 5.4 Mechanisms responsible for suppression of pathogens -- 5.5 Conclusions -- 5.6 The probiotic concept -- References -- 6 Factors affecting the microecology of the gut -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Definitions -- 6.3 Use of one or a limited number of bacterial strains in probiotic preparations -- 6.4 Ecological considerations -- 6.5 Recommendations for future developments -- References -- 7 Probiotics and the immune state -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Effect of orally administered lactic acid bacteria on immunity: non-specific and specific immune response -- 7.3 Effect of oral administration on the secretory immune system -- 7.4 Effect on the protection against enteric infections -- References -- 8 Genetit manipulation of gut microorganisms -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Microbes of potential interest -- 8.3 Molecular genetical studies -- 8.4 Stability of genetic determinants -- 8.5 Possible developments -- 8.6 Release of genetically modified microbes -- 8.7 Conclusions -- References -- 9 Selection of strains for probiotic use -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Aim of this chapter -- 9.3 First steps in the choice of microbial strains -- 9.4 Species and viability of probiotic microorganisms -- 9.5 Processing of viable microorganisms to end-products -- 9.6 Resistance to in vivo conditions -- 9.7 Adherence and colonization -- 9.8 Antimicrobial activity -- 9.9 Gene technology -- 9.10 Conclusion -- References -- 10 Probiotics for chickens -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 The normal intestinal flora of poultry -- 10.3 Host-microbial flora interactions -- 10.4 The application of probiosis to poultry -- 10.5 Lactic acid bacteria as probiotics -- 10.6 Competitive exclusion -- 10.7 Immunity -- 10.8 Bacteriophages -- 10.9 Summary -- References -- 11 Probiotics for pigs -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Special features of pigs relevant to the use of probiotics -- 11.3 Current use of probiotics -- 11.4 Efficacy -- 11.5 Functional characteristics of potential probiotic strains -- 11.6 General discussion -- References -- 12 Probiotics for ruminants -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Probiotics for young ruminants -- 12.3 Fungal feed additives for adult ruminants -- 12.4 Bacterial probiotics for adult ruminants -- 12.5 Future developments -- References -- 13 Probiotics for humans -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Colonization of the gastrointestinal tract -- 13.3 Current use of probiotics -- 13.4 Nutritional benefits of probiotics -- 13.5 Therapeutic benefits of probiotics -- 13.6 More recent developments in the area of probiotics and health -- 13.7 Properties required for probiotics to be effective in nutritional and therapeutic settings -- 13.8 Future development of probiotics for human use -- 13.9 Future applications of probiotics -- 13.10 Techniques for probiotic modification -- References -- 14 Problems and prospects -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Factors affecting the probiotic response -- 14.3 Future developments -- 14.4 Summary -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 34
    ISBN: 9781461535225
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I: Lactic Microflora -- 1 The Lactic Microflora of Fowl -- 2 The Lactic Microflora of Pigs, Mice and Rats -- 3 Lactic Acid Bacteria in the Rumen -- 4 The Human Gastrointestinal Tract -- 5 The Lactic Microflora of the Oral Cavity -- II: Lactic Acid Bacteria and Health -- 6 Probiotics: A General View -- 7 The Effect of Probiotics on the Gut Micro-ecology of Farm Animals -- 8 Lactic Acid Bacteria in the Control of Plant Pathogens -- 9 The Antimicrobial Action of Lactic Acid Bacteria: Natural Food Preservation Systems -- 10 Lactic Acid Bacteria and the Control of Tumours -- 11 Lactic Acid Bacteria in the Support of Immunocompromised Hosts -- 12 Fermented Dairy Products and Health -- III: Agriculture and Ecology -- 13 Spoilage in the Sugar Industry -- 14 Lactic Acid Bacteria in Plant Silage -- 15 Storage of Waste Products for Animal Feed -- 16 Lactic Acid Bacteria in Coffee and Cocoa Fermentation -- 17 Sporolactobacilli -- 18 Critical Factors Governing the Competitive Behaviour of Lactic Acid Bacteria in Mixed Cultures.
    Abstract: Historical Background lowe my interest in the lactic acid bacteria (LAB) to the late Dr Cyril Rainbow, who introduced me to their fascinating world when he offered me a place with him to work for a PhD on the carbohydrate meta­ bolism of some lactic rods isolated from English beer breweries by himself and others, notably Dr Dora Kulka. He was particularly interested in their preference for maltose over glucose as a source of carbohydrate for growth, expressed in most cases as a more rapid growth on the disaccharide, but one isolate would grow only on maltose. Eventually, we showed that maltose was being utilised by 'direct fermen­ tation' as the older texts called it, specifically by the phosphorolysis which had first been demonstrated for maltose by Doudoroff and his associates in their work on maltose metabolism by a strain of Neisseria meningitidis. I began work on food fermentations when I came to Strathclyde University, and I soon found myself involved again with the bacteria which I had not touched since completing my doctoral thesis. In 1973 lG. Carr, C. V. Cutting and G. c. Whiting organised the 4th Long Ashton Symposium Lactic Acid Bacteria in Beverages and Food and from my participation in that excellent conference arose a friendship with Geoff Carr. The growing importance of these bacteria was subsequently confirmed by the holding, a decade later, of the first of the Wageningen Conferences on the LAB.
    Description / Table of Contents: I: Lactic Microflora1 The Lactic Microflora of Fowl -- 2 The Lactic Microflora of Pigs, Mice and Rats -- 3 Lactic Acid Bacteria in the Rumen -- 4 The Human Gastrointestinal Tract -- 5 The Lactic Microflora of the Oral Cavity -- II: Lactic Acid Bacteria and Health -- 6 Probiotics: A General View -- 7 The Effect of Probiotics on the Gut Micro-ecology of Farm Animals -- 8 Lactic Acid Bacteria in the Control of Plant Pathogens -- 9 The Antimicrobial Action of Lactic Acid Bacteria: Natural Food Preservation Systems -- 10 Lactic Acid Bacteria and the Control of Tumours -- 11 Lactic Acid Bacteria in the Support of Immunocompromised Hosts -- 12 Fermented Dairy Products and Health -- III: Agriculture and Ecology -- 13 Spoilage in the Sugar Industry -- 14 Lactic Acid Bacteria in Plant Silage -- 15 Storage of Waste Products for Animal Feed -- 16 Lactic Acid Bacteria in Coffee and Cocoa Fermentation -- 17 Sporolactobacilli -- 18 Critical Factors Governing the Competitive Behaviour of Lactic Acid Bacteria in Mixed Cultures.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 35
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401127226
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (ix, 320 p)
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Additional Information: Rezensiert in Klaits, Joseph [Rezension von: Harline, Craig E., The Rhyme and Reason of Politics in Early Modern Europe: Collected Essays of Herbert H. Rowen] 1994
    Series Statement: International Archives of the History of Ideas / Archives Internationales d’Histoire des Idées 132
    Keywords: Humanities ; History ; Social sciences ; History. ; Social sciences. ; Political science.
    Abstract: This volume brings together the best essays and reviews of Herbert H. Rowen, professor emeritus of Rutgers University, foreign member of the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences, and one of the first important English-speaking historians of the Dutch Republic since John Lothrop Motley. Many of the essays, though published previously, have not been readily available, while several appear here for the first time. They include close analysis of the Dutch Republic, French absolutism, the eighteenth-century Republic and the Atlantic Revolutions, and direct and indirect commentary on the task of the historian more generally. Also included are three essays and several reviews about the work of Herbert Rowen, which assess his particular contribution to historical studies. The leading characteristics of that work are reflected in the title of this collection: clarity and ease of expression, rigor of thought, and a focus on the intersection of political thought and practice in the early modern period
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 36
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401128940
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Sources and Composition of Whey and Permeate -- 2. Whey Processing -- 3. Demineralization -- 4. Whey Utilization -- 5. Whey Cheeses and Beverages -- 6. Ultrafiltration and Manufacture of Whey Protein Concentrates -- 7. Properties of Whey Protein Concentrates -- 8. Whey Protein Recovery and Whey Protein Fractionation.. -- 9. Lactose and Lactose Derivatives -- 10. Lactose Hydrolysis -- 11. Whey and Lactose Fermentation -- 12. Nutritional Aspects.
    Abstract: It would be difficult to imagine a more appropriate means of marking the Jubilee of the Dairy Research Laboratory, Division of Food Processing, CSIRO, than a publication on whey and lactose processing. The genesis of the Laboratory in 1939 was when the Australian dairy industry was very largely based on the supply of cream from farms to numerous butter factories, the skim milk being fed to pigs. By the mid-1940s, when Geof­ frey Loftus-Hills was appointed in charge ofthe fledgling Dairy Research Section, the main objective of the Section-the full utilization of the con­ stituents of milk for human food-had been firmly established. Over the next two decades progress towards this objective was exemplified by the scientific and technological contributions made in specialized milk powders for use in recombining and in the manufacture of casein and cheese. Meanwhile farming practices changed from cream production to the supply of refrigerated whole milk to the factories. By the late 1960s the increasing production of cheese and casein had re­ sulted in almost 2 million tonnes of whey per annum. This represented not only a waste disposal problem, but also under-utilization of over 100000 t of milk solids. The Laboratory had now grown to a staff of around 70, so it was possible to allocate some resources to this extra challenge.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Sources and Composition of Whey and Permeate2. Whey Processing -- 3. Demineralization -- 4. Whey Utilization -- 5. Whey Cheeses and Beverages -- 6. Ultrafiltration and Manufacture of Whey Protein Concentrates -- 7. Properties of Whey Protein Concentrates -- 8. Whey Protein Recovery and Whey Protein Fractionation. -- 9. Lactose and Lactose Derivatives -- 10. Lactose Hydrolysis -- 11. Whey and Lactose Fermentation -- 12. Nutritional Aspects.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 37
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401129206
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 309 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Series Statement: Environmental Management Series
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Descriptive Statistical Techniques -- 2 Environmetric Methods of Nonstationary Time-Series Analysis: Univaraute Methods -- 3 Regression and Correlation -- 4 Factor and Correlation Analysis of Multivariate Environmental Data -- 5 Errors and Detection Limits -- 6 Visual Representation of Data Including Graphical Exploratory Data Analysis -- 7 Quality Assurance for Environmental Assessment Activities.
    Abstract: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SERIES The current expansion of both public and scientific interest in environ­ mental issues has not been accompanied by a commensurate production of adequate books, and those which are available are widely variable in approach and depth. The Environmental Management Series has been established with a view to co-ordinating a series of volumes dealing with each topic within the field in some depth. It is hoped that this Series will provide a uniform and quality coverage and that, over a period of years, it will build up to form a library of reference books covering most of the major topics within this diverse field. It is envisaged that the books will be of single, or dual authorship, or edited volumes as appropriate for respective topics. The level of presentation will be advanced, the books being aimed primarily at a research/consultancy readership. The coverage will include all aspects of environmental science and engineering pertinent to manage­ ment and monitoring of the natural and man-modified environment, as well as topics dealing with the political. t:conomic, legal and social con­ siderations pertaining to environmental management.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Descriptive Statistical Techniques2 Environmetric Methods of Nonstationary Time-Series Analysis: Univaraute Methods -- 3 Regression and Correlation -- 4 Factor and Correlation Analysis of Multivariate Environmental Data -- 5 Errors and Detection Limits -- 6 Visual Representation of Data Including Graphical Exploratory Data Analysis -- 7 Quality Assurance for Environmental Assessment Activities.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 38
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401130820
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 327 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. What is eutrophication? -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Definition and origin of the term eutrophication -- 1.3 Links between eutrophication, biological changes and productivity in lakes -- 1.4 Eutrophication as a natural part of lake succession -- 1.5 Extent of artificial eutrophication -- 1.6 Eutrophication in rivers, estuaries and coastal waters -- 1.7 Measurement of eutrophication -- 2. The nutrients causing eutrophication, and their sources -- 2.1 The requirements of living cells for survival and growth -- 2.2 The important limiting nutrients -- 2.3 The supply of nitrogen and phosphorus to lakes -- 2.4 Relative importance of diffuse and point sources in catchments -- 2.5 Global aspects of nutrient runoff -- 2.6 Methods for estimating the magnitude of nutrient losses from catchments -- 3. The biochemical manifestations of eutrophication -- 3.1 The components of nutrient cycles in aquatic systems -- 3.2 The ultimate sinks of inflowing nitrogen and phosphorus -- 3.3 Changes in the cycles which occur as a consequence of enhanced nutrient inputs -- 3.4 The importance of the littoral zone in nutrient cycles -- 3.5 Seasonal patterns of nitrogen and phosphorus cycles in lakes -- 3.6 Important features of nutrient transformations in rivers and estuaries -- 4. The biological effects of eutrophication -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Production and species changes of algae and rnacrophytes -- 4.3 Effects of eutrophication upon rnacrophytes and attached algae -- 4.4 Production and species changes in zooplankton -- 4.5 Production and species changes of zoobenthos -- 4.6 Effects of eutrophication on fish and other vertebrates -- 4.7 Aquatic food-web considerations -- 4.8 Wider implications for wildlife and conservation -- 5. The engineering, economic and social effects of eutrophication -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Water supply -- 5.3 Fisheries management -- 5.4 Land drainage and weed control in rivers -- 5.5 Wildlife conservation -- 5.6 Public health hazards and nuisances -- 5.7 Other recreational aspects -- 6. Prediction and modelling of the causes and effects of eutrophication -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Experimental approaches to measures of eutrophication effects -- 6.3 The application of models in eutrophication assessment and prediction -- 6.4 Caution in the use of regression equations -- 6.5 Lake classification based on correlations and large data sets -- 6.6 Other lake classification indices -- 6.7 Dynamic models of lake ecosystems -- 6.8 Prediction without models -- 7. The reduction of causes and the management of effects of eutrophication -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Reduction of nutrient inputs to lakes -- 7.3 Evaluation of nutrient control measures -- 7.4 Control of nutrient concentrations within lakes -- 7.5 Management of lakes without nutrient reduction -- 8. A case study in restoration: shallow eutrophic lakes in the Norfolk Broads -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Historical perspective -- 8.3 Eutrophication of the Broads -- 8.4 Mechanisms of change -- 8.5 Effects of change -- 8.6 Restoration of Broadland -- 8.7 Lake sediment as a source of phosphorus -- 8.8 Changes in the storage of phosphorus in lake sediment following phosphorus control -- 8.9 Biological response to reduced nutrient loading -- 8.10 Nutrient reduction by isolation -- 8.11 Sediment removal and lake isolation -- 8.12 Biomanipulation as a restoration technique -- 8.13 The restoration of Broadland in the context of two stable communities -- References.
    Abstract: Eutrophication is a problem which became widely recognised by the scientific community in the 1940s and 1950s. It raised public concern, resulting in increased research effort and expenditure on management techniques through the 1960s and 1970s, recognised as a distinct problem of water pollution, though linked with the more gross effects of organic pollution. In the 1980s it became less fashionable - replaced in the public's eye and the politician's purse by newer problems such as acid rain. It remains however, one of the biggest and most widespread problems of fresh waters, particularly of lakes and an increasing problem for estuaries and coastal waters. It is one with which almost all water scientists and engineers in urbanised areas of the world have to cope. Technical methods for the reversal of eutrophication, such as nutrient removal, have been developed and applied successfully in some instances. They are not widespread however, and where they are feasible, they are often expensive and may be politically difficult to implement. In the last decade, attention has focussed upon less expensive lake manipula­ tion techniques, such as destratification and biomanipulation, which aim to minimise rather than elimininate the detrimental effects of eutrophication. These are becoming more widely applied. Prediction of the potential problems in lakes and catchments which have not yet suffered the full effects of eutrophication is now accurate enough to be of direct benefit to river basin management.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. What is eutrophication?1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Definition and origin of the term eutrophication -- 1.3 Links between eutrophication, biological changes and productivity in lakes -- 1.4 Eutrophication as a natural part of lake succession -- 1.5 Extent of artificial eutrophication -- 1.6 Eutrophication in rivers, estuaries and coastal waters -- 1.7 Measurement of eutrophication -- 2. The nutrients causing eutrophication, and their sources -- 2.1 The requirements of living cells for survival and growth -- 2.2 The important limiting nutrients -- 2.3 The supply of nitrogen and phosphorus to lakes -- 2.4 Relative importance of diffuse and point sources in catchments -- 2.5 Global aspects of nutrient runoff -- 2.6 Methods for estimating the magnitude of nutrient losses from catchments -- 3. The biochemical manifestations of eutrophication -- 3.1 The components of nutrient cycles in aquatic systems -- 3.2 The ultimate sinks of inflowing nitrogen and phosphorus -- 3.3 Changes in the cycles which occur as a consequence of enhanced nutrient inputs -- 3.4 The importance of the littoral zone in nutrient cycles -- 3.5 Seasonal patterns of nitrogen and phosphorus cycles in lakes -- 3.6 Important features of nutrient transformations in rivers and estuaries -- 4. The biological effects of eutrophication -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Production and species changes of algae and rnacrophytes -- 4.3 Effects of eutrophication upon rnacrophytes and attached algae -- 4.4 Production and species changes in zooplankton -- 4.5 Production and species changes of zoobenthos -- 4.6 Effects of eutrophication on fish and other vertebrates -- 4.7 Aquatic food-web considerations -- 4.8 Wider implications for wildlife and conservation -- 5. The engineering, economic and social effects of eutrophication -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Water supply -- 5.3 Fisheries management -- 5.4 Land drainage and weed control in rivers -- 5.5 Wildlife conservation -- 5.6 Public health hazards and nuisances -- 5.7 Other recreational aspects -- 6. Prediction and modelling of the causes and effects of eutrophication -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Experimental approaches to measures of eutrophication effects -- 6.3 The application of models in eutrophication assessment and prediction -- 6.4 Caution in the use of regression equations -- 6.5 Lake classification based on correlations and large data sets -- 6.6 Other lake classification indices -- 6.7 Dynamic models of lake ecosystems -- 6.8 Prediction without models -- 7. The reduction of causes and the management of effects of eutrophication -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Reduction of nutrient inputs to lakes -- 7.3 Evaluation of nutrient control measures -- 7.4 Control of nutrient concentrations within lakes -- 7.5 Management of lakes without nutrient reduction -- 8. A case study in restoration: shallow eutrophic lakes in the Norfolk Broads -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Historical perspective -- 8.3 Eutrophication of the Broads -- 8.4 Mechanisms of change -- 8.5 Effects of change -- 8.6 Restoration of Broadland -- 8.7 Lake sediment as a source of phosphorus -- 8.8 Changes in the storage of phosphorus in lake sediment following phosphorus control -- 8.9 Biological response to reduced nutrient loading -- 8.10 Nutrient reduction by isolation -- 8.11 Sediment removal and lake isolation -- 8.12 Biomanipulation as a restoration technique -- 8.13 The restoration of Broadland in the context of two stable communities -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 39
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461534549
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: A Partnership (Program Status) -- SSC Education Initiatives -- Superconductors I -- Environment, Safety, and Health -- Magnets I -- Detectors I -- Cryogenics I -- Technical Poster Session I -- Quality Assurance I -- Magnets II SSC Dipoles -- Detectors II -- Cryogenics II -- Technology Transfer -- Superconductors II -- Quality Assurance II -- Magnets III Superconducting Magnet Technology -- Detectors III -- Accelerators -- Technical Poster Session II -- Parallel Technical Sessions IV -- Systems Engineering -- Magnets IV Magnet Fabrication and R&D Facilities, Tooling, and Component Analysis -- Detectors IV -- Attendees -- Author Index.
    Abstract: The fourth annual International Industrial Symposium on the Super Collider, rrssc held March 4-6, 1992, in New Orleans was a great success. Present at this year's conference were 839 attendees representing 24 universities and colleges, 34 states, 13 countries, 17 national laboratories, 11 research centers, many government entities at the local, state and federal levels, and 235 businesses and companies. This year's symposium also included 101 exhibits by 78 organizations. In all categories, this year's participation exceeded the totals of previous years and is an example of the growing support for the Superconducting Super Collider Program. This year's program had many highlights. One of the best was a message from President George Bush, read by Linda Stuntz, Acting Deputy Secretary, Department of Energy. President Bush said that each of us "can be proud of the role that you are playing in building the Collider and in setting the stage for a new era of research and discovery in high energy physics. " The 1992 IISSC's theme was "SSC-Discovering the Future. " This theme was chosen in commemoration of the SOOth anniversary of Columbus's voyage of discovery and the relationship of the SSC with discovery. This theme was articulated by all the speakers in the opening plenary session. Progress on the program was also very evident at this year's symposium. In the pictorial session, 66 photographs from all over the world were displayed to highlight progress in making the SSC a reality.
    Description / Table of Contents: A Partnership (Program Status)SSC Education Initiatives -- Superconductors I -- Environment, Safety, and Health -- Magnets I -- Detectors I -- Cryogenics I -- Technical Poster Session I -- Quality Assurance I -- Magnets II SSC Dipoles -- Detectors II -- Cryogenics II -- Technology Transfer -- Superconductors II -- Quality Assurance II -- Magnets III Superconducting Magnet Technology -- Detectors III -- Accelerators -- Technical Poster Session II -- Parallel Technical Sessions IV -- Systems Engineering -- Magnets IV Magnet Fabrication and R&D Facilities, Tooling, and Component Analysis -- Detectors IV -- Attendees -- Author Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 40
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461535300
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 345 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 1.1 About Physical Optics -- 1.2 The Electromagnetic Spectrum -- 1.3 Overview of the Following Chapters -- References -- Problems -- 2 Maxwell’s Equations and Plane Wave Propagation -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Some Preliminaries -- 2.3 Monochromatic Plane Waves -- 2.4 Polychromatic Plane Waves -- 2.5 Propagation in Polarizing Optical Systems -- 2.6 Striated Media -- References -- Problems -- 3 Material Polarization and Dispersion -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Complexity in the Microscopic World -- 3.3 A Derivation of the Lorentz-Lorenz Relation -- 3.4 The Spring Model of Matter -- 3.5 Wave Propagation in Dispersive Media -- 3.6 Macroscopic Models of More Exotic Effects -- References -- Problems -- 4 Wave Propagation in Anisotropic Media -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Microscopic Basis for the Existence of an Index Tensor -- 4.3 Fresnel’s and the Index Ellipsoids -- 4.4 The Normal Surface and the Ray Surface -- 4.5 Some Propagation Effects in Crystals -- 4.6 Some Polarization Devices -- References -- Problems -- 5 Geometrical Optics -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The WKB Approximation as it Relates to Geometrical Optics -- 5.3 The Eikonal Equation -- 5.4 Energy Flow and Radiometry -- 5.5 Paraxial Ray Optics -- 5.6 About Optical Instruments -- 5.7 Phase Space and Liouville’s Theorem -- References -- Problems -- 6 Interferenee -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 The Michelson Interferometer -- 6.3 Other Interferometers -- 6.4 The Fabry-Perot Interferometer -- 6.5 Young’s Interferometer and Spatial Coherence -- 6.6 Hanbury-Brown and Twiss Interferometer -- References -- Problems -- 7 Diffraetion -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Green’s Theorem and Scalar Diffraction -- 7.3 Rayleigh-Sommerfeld Theory -- 7.4 Van Cittert-Zemicke Theorem -- 7.5 Diffraction Gratings and Spectrometers -- References -- Problems.
    Abstract: This present text has emerged from the lecture notes for a one semester, first year, graduate level course which has been offered yearly since fall 1985 here in the Electrical and Computer Engineering Department at the University of Colorado at Boulder. Enrollment in the course, however, has not been limited to first year graduate electrical engineering students, but has included seniors, as well as more advanced students, from a variety of disciplines including other areas of engineering and physics. Although other Physical Optics texts exist, the most up-to-date ones are written primarily for undergraduate courses. As is discussed in slightly more depth in the introduction in the beginning of Chap­ ter 1, up-to-dateness is important in a Physical Optics text, as even classical optics has been greatly rejuvenated by the events of the last 30 years, since the demonstration of the laser. The perception of this author is that the needs of a graduate level text are quite different from that of an undergraduate text. At the undergraduate level, one is generally pleased if the student can qualitatively grasp a portion of the concepts presented and have some recollection of where to look them up if need be later in his/her career. A deeper insight is necessary at the graduate level and is generally developed through qualitative analysis of the problems within the subject area.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction1.1 About Physical Optics -- 1.2 The Electromagnetic Spectrum -- 1.3 Overview of the Following Chapters -- References -- Problems -- 2 Maxwell’s Equations and Plane Wave Propagation -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Some Preliminaries -- 2.3 Monochromatic Plane Waves -- 2.4 Polychromatic Plane Waves -- 2.5 Propagation in Polarizing Optical Systems -- 2.6 Striated Media -- References -- Problems -- 3 Material Polarization and Dispersion -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Complexity in the Microscopic World -- 3.3 A Derivation of the Lorentz-Lorenz Relation -- 3.4 The Spring Model of Matter -- 3.5 Wave Propagation in Dispersive Media -- 3.6 Macroscopic Models of More Exotic Effects -- References -- Problems -- 4 Wave Propagation in Anisotropic Media -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Microscopic Basis for the Existence of an Index Tensor -- 4.3 Fresnel’s and the Index Ellipsoids -- 4.4 The Normal Surface and the Ray Surface -- 4.5 Some Propagation Effects in Crystals -- 4.6 Some Polarization Devices -- References -- Problems -- 5 Geometrical Optics -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The WKB Approximation as it Relates to Geometrical Optics -- 5.3 The Eikonal Equation -- 5.4 Energy Flow and Radiometry -- 5.5 Paraxial Ray Optics -- 5.6 About Optical Instruments -- 5.7 Phase Space and Liouville’s Theorem -- References -- Problems -- 6 Interferenee -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 The Michelson Interferometer -- 6.3 Other Interferometers -- 6.4 The Fabry-Perot Interferometer -- 6.5 Young’s Interferometer and Spatial Coherence -- 6.6 Hanbury-Brown and Twiss Interferometer -- References -- Problems -- 7 Diffraetion -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Green’s Theorem and Scalar Diffraction -- 7.3 Rayleigh-Sommerfeld Theory -- 7.4 Van Cittert-Zemicke Theorem -- 7.5 Diffraction Gratings and Spectrometers -- References -- Problems.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 41
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401122948
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (IX, 255 p) , online resource
    Edition: Sixth Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Systems of units -- The Dictionary A-Z -- Appendices -- A. Fundamental physical constants -- B. Standardization committees and conferences -- C. Tables of weights and measures -- D. Conversion tables -- E. Conversion factors for SI and CGS units -- References.
    Abstract: units have been included. References, which now number approximately 650, have been brought up to date. The most recently accepted values of the physical constants have been provided. Our thanks go to all those who, since the fifth edition, have helped in this revision by suggestions. In particular the authors express their gratitude to Jane M. Jerrard who, with enthusiasm, put the text into a computer and eliminated the editorial scissors and paste and simplified the onerous and long task of producing a text from the fragmented material of the revision. In the preface to the fifth edition it was suggested that the book provided at that time the most complete and up-to-date information of its kind available. The authors again make the same claim for this sixth edition. H. G. JERRARD D. B. McNEILL Warsash Newtownards Southampton Northern Ireland England Preface to the first edition The intense specialization that occurs in science today has meant that scientists working in one field are often not familiar with the nomenclature used by their colleagues in other fields. This is particularly so in physics. This dictionary is designed to help overcome this difficulty by giving information about the units, dimensionless numbers and scales which have been used, or are still being used, throughout the world. Some four hundred entries are provided and these are supplemented by about five hundred references. The definition of each entry is given together with relevant historical facts.
    Description / Table of Contents: Systems of unitsThe Dictionary A-Z -- Appendices -- A. Fundamental physical constants -- B. Standardization committees and conferences -- C. Tables of weights and measures -- D. Conversion tables -- E. Conversion factors for SI and CGS units -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 42
    ISBN: 9781468414318
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Marketing. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The Design-Build Concept -- 2 The Art of Selling to the Construction Prospect -- 3 New Business Attitudes -- 4 Finding the Prospective Customer -- 5 Qualifying the Lead -- 6 Selling the Prospect -- 7 Design-Build Capability -- 8 Signing Up the Prospect -- 9 Working with the Owner During Construction -- 10 The Construction Sales Department.
    Abstract: With a jolt you pull your car to the side of the road, and read the job sign that can't be over one day old: New Home of ABC Inc.; General Contractor, XYZ Construction Co. You think out loud, "I knew the property had been sold," and your eyes roam over the real estate sign with the angled "sold" sticker pro­ claiming to all that the agent has been successful. "Thought the job would have come out on the bid list by now," you mutter as you move back onto the road and head for your office. Later in the day you get the agent on the phone: "Jim, how did XYZ get the ABC job? I saw nothing on the builders' exchange about it." "John, XYZ has been negotiating with ABC for the past six weeks. They did one fine job of selling on old McDuff. Understand they just called on him out of the blue asking for a chance. They put the whole package together, plans and all." "Didn't that tightwad McDuff get another price, Jim?" "Sure did; two, as a matter of fact. He asked me to get two other contractors capable of doing design-build projects. He liked XYZ better. I don't know the prices, but I really feel those boys impressed McDuff by going to him. Were you planning to bid the job?" "Thinking about it," you answer, trying to sound very casual.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The Design-Build Concept2 The Art of Selling to the Construction Prospect -- 3 New Business Attitudes -- 4 Finding the Prospective Customer -- 5 Qualifying the Lead -- 6 Selling the Prospect -- 7 Design-Build Capability -- 8 Signing Up the Prospect -- 9 Working with the Owner During Construction -- 10 The Construction Sales Department.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 43
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468464412
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Early Processes and Theories -- 2 Alchemy -- 3 From Alchemy to Chemistry -- 4 Phlogistic and Pneumatic Chemistry -- 5 Lavoisier and the Birth of Modern Chemistry -- 6 The Chemical Atom -- 7 Electrochemistry and the Dualistic Theory -- 8 The Foundation of Organic Chemistry -- 9 The Karlsruhe Congress and its Aftermath -- 10 Organic Chemistry since 1860 -- 11 Atomic Structure, Radiochemistry and Chemical Bonding -- 12 Inorganic Chemistry -- 13 Physical Chemistry -- 14 Analytical Chemistry -- 15 Chemistry and Society -- Appendix The Nobel Prize in Chemistry -- Name Index.
    Abstract: This book is written as a result of a personal conviction of the value of incorporating historical material into the teaching of chemistry, both at school and undergraduate level. Indeed, it is highly desirable that an undergraduate course in chemistry incorporates a separate module on the history of chemistry. This book is therefore aimed at teachers and students of chemistry, and it will also appeal to practising chemists. While the last 25 years has seen the appearance of a large number of specialist scholarly publications on the history of chemistry, there has been little written in the way of an introductory overview of the subject. This book fills that gap. It incorporates some of the results of recent research, and the text is illustrated throughout. Clearly, a book of this length has to be highly selective in its coverage, but it describes the themes and personalities which in the author's opinion have been of greatest importance in the development of the subject. The famous American historian of science, Henry Guerlac, wrote: 'It is the central business of the historian of science to reconstruct the story of the acquisition of this knowledge and the refinement of its method or methods, and-perhaps above all-to study science as a human activity and learn how it arose, how it developed and expanded, and how it has influenced or been influenced by man's material, intellectual, and even spiritual aspirations' (Guerlac, 1977). This book attempts to describe the development of chemistry in these terms.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Early Processes and Theories2 Alchemy -- 3 From Alchemy to Chemistry -- 4 Phlogistic and Pneumatic Chemistry -- 5 Lavoisier and the Birth of Modern Chemistry -- 6 The Chemical Atom -- 7 Electrochemistry and the Dualistic Theory -- 8 The Foundation of Organic Chemistry -- 9 The Karlsruhe Congress and its Aftermath -- 10 Organic Chemistry since 1860 -- 11 Atomic Structure, Radiochemistry and Chemical Bonding -- 12 Inorganic Chemistry -- 13 Physical Chemistry -- 14 Analytical Chemistry -- 15 Chemistry and Society -- Appendix The Nobel Prize in Chemistry -- Name Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 44
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401097604
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Telecommunication. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 1.1 Historical Development of Satellites -- 1.2 Communication Satellite Systems -- 1.3 Communication Satellites -- 1.4 Orbiting Satellites -- 1.5 Satellite Frequency Bands -- 1.6 Satellite Multiple-Access Formats -- References -- Problems -- 2 Modulation, Encoding, and Decoding -- 2.1 Analog Modulation -- 2.2 Analog FM Carriers -- 2.3 Digital Encoding -- 2.4 Spectral Shaping -- 2.5 Digital Decoding -- 2.6 Error-Correction Decoding -- 2.7 Block Waveform Encoding -- 2.8 Digital Throughput -- References -- Problems -- 3 The Satellite Channel -- 3.1 Electromagnetic Field Propagation -- 3.2 Antennas -- 3.3 Atmospheric Losses -- 3.4 Receiver Noise -- 3.5 Carrier-to-Noise Ratios -- 3.6 Satellite Link Analysis -- 3.7 Dual Polarization -- 3.8 Effect of Depolarization on Dual Polarized Communications -- 3.9 Spot Beams in Satellite Downlinks -- References -- Problems -- 4 Satellite Electronics -- 4.1 The Transponder Model -- 4.2 The Satellite Front End -- 4.3 RF Filtering of Digital Carriers -- 4.4 Satellite Signal Processing -- 4.5 Frequency Generators -- 4.6 Transponder Limiting -- 4.7 Nonlinear Satellite Amplifiers -- References -- Problems -- 5 Frequency—Division Multiple Access -- 5.1 The FDMA System -- 5.2 Nonlinear Amplification with Multiple FDMA Carriers -- 5.3 FDMA Nonlinear Analysis -- 5.4 FDMA Channelization -- 5.5 AM/PM Conversion with FDMA -- 5.6 Satellite-Switched FDMA -- References -- Problems -- 6 Time-Division Multiple Access -- 6.1 The TDMA System -- 6.2 Preamble Design -- 6.3 Satellite Effects on TDMA Performance -- 6.4 Network Synchronization -- 6.5 SS-TDMA -- References -- Problems -- 7 Code-Division Multiple Access -- 7.1 Direct-Sequence CDMA Systems -- 7.2 Code Generation for DS-CDMA Systems -- 7.3 Performance of DS-CDMA Systems -- 7.4 Combined Error Correction and Code Addressing in DS-CDMA -- 7.5 Antijam Advantages of Direct Code Addressing -- 7.6 Satellite Jamming with DS-CDMA -- 7.7 DS-CDMA Code Acquisition and Tracking -- References -- Problems -- 8 Frequency-Hopped Communications -- 8.1 The Frequency-Hopped System -- 8.2 Frequency-Hopping Synthesizers -- 8.3 Performance of Frequency-Hopped Systems -- 8.4 Frequency-Hopped CDMA Systems -- 8.5 Jamming in Frequency-Hopped Systems -- 8.6 Code Acquisition and Tracking in FH Systems -- References -- Problems -- 9 On-Board Processing -- 9.1 On-Board Processing Subsystems -- 9.2 Baseband Digital Decoding -- 9.3 Data Reclocking, Routing, and Multiplexing -- 9.4 TDM-FDM Conversion -- 9.5 On-Board Remodulation -- 9.6 On-Board Baseband Processing with Beam Hopping -- 9.7 Multiple Spot Beaming -- 9.8 Photonic On-Board Processing -- References -- Problems -- 10 Satellite Crosslinks -- 10.1 The Crosslink System -- 10.2 Crossline Power Budget -- 10.3 Coherent and Noncoherent Communications at EHF -- 10.4 Autotracking -- 10.5 Autotrack Loop Analysis -- 10.6 Effect of Autotract Pointing Errors on PE -- 10.7 Optical Crosslinks -- References -- Problems -- 11 VSAT and Mobile-Satellite Systems -- 11.1 VSAT-Satellite-System Concept -- 11.2 Small-Terminal-Satellite Link Analysis -- 11.3 VSAT and Hub Networks -- 11.4 Direct Home TV Broadcasting -- 11.5 The Mobile-Satellite Channel -- 11.6 Communicating over the Mobile-Satellite Channel -- 11.7 Interleaving to Combat Deep Fading -- 11.8 Combined Coding and Modulation for the Mobile Channel -- References -- Problems -- Appendices -- A Review of Digital Communications -- A.1 Baseband Digital Waveforms -- A.2 BPSK Systems -- A.3 QPSK Carrier Waveform -- A.4 FSK -- A.5 DPSK -- A.6 MPSP -- A.7 Correlation Detection of Orthogonal BPSK -- A.8 MFSK -- A.9 Effect of Phase Noise on Noncoherent FSK and DPSK Systems -- A.10 MASK -- References -- B Carrier Recovery and bit Timing -- B.1 Carrier Recovery -- B.2 BPSK Carrier Recovery -- B.3 QPSK Carrier Referencing -- B.4 MPSK Carrier Referencing Systems -- B.5 Bit Timing -- References -- C Satellite Ranging and Position Location Systems -- C.1 Ranging Systems -- C.2 Component Range Codes -- C.3 Tone-Ranging Systems -- C.4 Position Locating and Navigation -- D Nonlinear Amplification of Carrier Waveforms.
    Abstract: This second edition of Satellite Communications is a revised, updated, and improved version of the first edition (Van Nostrand, 1984) and has been extended to include many newer topics that are rapidly becoming important in modem and next-generation satellite systems. The first half of the book again covers the basics of satellite links, but has been updated to include additional areas such as Global Positioning and deep space satellites, dual polarization, multiple beaming, advanced satellite electronics, frequency synthesizers, and digital frequency generators. The second half of the book is all new, covering frequency and beam hopping, on-board processing, EHF and optical cross­ links, and mobile satellites and VSAT systems. All of these latter topics figure to be important aspects of satellite systems and space platforms of the twenty-first century. As in the first edition, the objective of the new edition is to present a unified approach to satellite communications, helping the reader to become familiar with the terminology, models, analysis procedures, and evolving design directions for modem and future satellites. The presentation stresses overall system analysis and block diagram design, as opposed to complicated mathematical or physics descriptions. (Backup mathematics is relegated to the appendices where a reader can digest the detail at his own pace. ) The discussion begins with the simplest satellite systems and builds to the more complex payloads presently being used.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction1.1 Historical Development of Satellites -- 1.2 Communication Satellite Systems -- 1.3 Communication Satellites -- 1.4 Orbiting Satellites -- 1.5 Satellite Frequency Bands -- 1.6 Satellite Multiple-Access Formats -- References -- Problems -- 2 Modulation, Encoding, and Decoding -- 2.1 Analog Modulation -- 2.2 Analog FM Carriers -- 2.3 Digital Encoding -- 2.4 Spectral Shaping -- 2.5 Digital Decoding -- 2.6 Error-Correction Decoding -- 2.7 Block Waveform Encoding -- 2.8 Digital Throughput -- References -- Problems -- 3 The Satellite Channel -- 3.1 Electromagnetic Field Propagation -- 3.2 Antennas -- 3.3 Atmospheric Losses -- 3.4 Receiver Noise -- 3.5 Carrier-to-Noise Ratios -- 3.6 Satellite Link Analysis -- 3.7 Dual Polarization -- 3.8 Effect of Depolarization on Dual Polarized Communications -- 3.9 Spot Beams in Satellite Downlinks -- References -- Problems -- 4 Satellite Electronics -- 4.1 The Transponder Model -- 4.2 The Satellite Front End -- 4.3 RF Filtering of Digital Carriers -- 4.4 Satellite Signal Processing -- 4.5 Frequency Generators -- 4.6 Transponder Limiting -- 4.7 Nonlinear Satellite Amplifiers -- References -- Problems -- 5 Frequency-Division Multiple Access -- 5.1 The FDMA System -- 5.2 Nonlinear Amplification with Multiple FDMA Carriers -- 5.3 FDMA Nonlinear Analysis -- 5.4 FDMA Channelization -- 5.5 AM/PM Conversion with FDMA -- 5.6 Satellite-Switched FDMA -- References -- Problems -- 6 Time-Division Multiple Access -- 6.1 The TDMA System -- 6.2 Preamble Design -- 6.3 Satellite Effects on TDMA Performance -- 6.4 Network Synchronization -- 6.5 SS-TDMA -- References -- Problems -- 7 Code-Division Multiple Access -- 7.1 Direct-Sequence CDMA Systems -- 7.2 Code Generation for DS-CDMA Systems -- 7.3 Performance of DS-CDMA Systems -- 7.4 Combined Error Correction and Code Addressing in DS-CDMA -- 7.5 Antijam Advantages of Direct Code Addressing -- 7.6 Satellite Jamming with DS-CDMA -- 7.7 DS-CDMA Code Acquisition and Tracking -- References -- Problems -- 8 Frequency-Hopped Communications -- 8.1 The Frequency-Hopped System -- 8.2 Frequency-Hopping Synthesizers -- 8.3 Performance of Frequency-Hopped Systems -- 8.4 Frequency-Hopped CDMA Systems -- 8.5 Jamming in Frequency-Hopped Systems -- 8.6 Code Acquisition and Tracking in FH Systems -- References -- Problems -- 9 On-Board Processing -- 9.1 On-Board Processing Subsystems -- 9.2 Baseband Digital Decoding -- 9.3 Data Reclocking, Routing, and Multiplexing -- 9.4 TDM-FDM Conversion -- 9.5 On-Board Remodulation -- 9.6 On-Board Baseband Processing with Beam Hopping -- 9.7 Multiple Spot Beaming -- 9.8 Photonic On-Board Processing -- References -- Problems -- 10 Satellite Crosslinks -- 10.1 The Crosslink System -- 10.2 Crossline Power Budget -- 10.3 Coherent and Noncoherent Communications at EHF -- 10.4 Autotracking -- 10.5 Autotrack Loop Analysis -- 10.6 Effect of Autotract Pointing Errors on PE -- 10.7 Optical Crosslinks -- References -- Problems -- 11 VSAT and Mobile-Satellite Systems -- 11.1 VSAT-Satellite-System Concept -- 11.2 Small-Terminal-Satellite Link Analysis -- 11.3 VSAT and Hub Networks -- 11.4 Direct Home TV Broadcasting -- 11.5 The Mobile-Satellite Channel -- 11.6 Communicating over the Mobile-Satellite Channel -- 11.7 Interleaving to Combat Deep Fading -- 11.8 Combined Coding and Modulation for the Mobile Channel -- References -- Problems -- Appendices -- A Review of Digital Communications -- A.1 Baseband Digital Waveforms -- A.2 BPSK Systems -- A.3 QPSK Carrier Waveform -- A.4 FSK -- A.5 DPSK -- A.6 MPSP -- A.7 Correlation Detection of Orthogonal BPSK -- A.8 MFSK -- A.9 Effect of Phase Noise on Noncoherent FSK and DPSK Systems -- A.10 MASK -- References -- B Carrier Recovery and bit Timing -- B.1 Carrier Recovery -- B.2 BPSK Carrier Recovery -- B.3 QPSK Carrier Referencing -- B.4 MPSK Carrier Referencing Systems -- B.5 Bit Timing -- References -- C Satellite Ranging and Position Location Systems -- C.1 Ranging Systems -- C.2 Component Range Codes -- C.3 Tone-Ranging Systems -- C.4 Position Locating and Navigation -- D Nonlinear Amplification of Carrier Waveforms.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 45
    ISBN: 9789401136549
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Opening Session -- Welcome Address -- Opening Address -- Areas Where Advanced Separation Techniques are Desirable -- Review of New Extractants Potentially Applicable to the Processing of Radioactive Liquid Wastes (Summary) -- The Truex Process: A Vital Tool for Disposal of U.S. Defense Nuclear Waste -- Session I Amines/Amides Based Extractants -- Highly Selective and Micellar Extraction of Uranyl and Alkaline-Earth Cations (Summary) -- Extraction of Metal Ions by Neutral ?-Diphosphoramides -- Treatment of Nuclear Waste Solutions Using A New Class of Extractants: Pentaalkyl Propane Diamides -- Research for Actinides Extractants from Various Wastes -- N,N Dialkylaliphatic Amides as Extractant of Platinum Group Metals -- Session II Bidentate Organophosphorus Extractants -- Application of the Teseo Process for Actinide Removal from Liquid Alpha Wastes Generated During UO2-PuO2 Fuel Fabrication Campaigns -- Separation of AM, EU and CE from Liquid Wastes with CMPO by Extraction Chromatography -- The Extraction of Actinides and Other Constituents from Highly Active Waste (HAW) by Trialkyl Phosphine Oxide (TRPO) -- Actinides Removal by Means of Octyl(Phenyl)-N,N-Diisobutyl Carbamoyl Methyl Phosphine Oxide (CMPO) Sorbed on Silica -- Application of the CMPO Extractant (Supported Liquid Membrane) for the Alpha Decontamination of Marcoule Reprocessing Concentrate -- Comparison Between CMPO and DHDECMP for Alpha Decontamination of Radioactive Liquid Waste -- Application of CMPO Containing Gels to Metal Extraction -- Session III The Calixarenes -- Potential Industrial Applications of Calixarenes -- Special Calixarenes, Synthesis and Properties -- Calixspherands as Ligands for the Complexation of Radioactive Rubidium-81 -- Research Activities on Calixarenes (Summary) -- Session IV The Crown-Ethers -- General Properties of Crown-Ethers and Their Potential for Applications in Analytical and Preparative Chemistry -- Possible Applications of Crown-Ethers to Metal Extraction Using Liquid Membrane Technology a Literature Survey -- Application of Crown-Ethers to Caesium and Strontium Removal from Marcoule Reprocessing Concentrate -- Session V Other Types of Extractants -- Synthesis of Macrocyclic Ligands and Their Application in the Separation of Rare Earths -- Separation of Actinides with Alkylpyridinium Nitrates -- Phosphonomethyl Substituted Phenols A New Class of Absorbers and Extractants for Metals -- Actinide Separations by High Pressure Cation Exchange — The Neptunium Case -- Separation of Metal Ions by Complexation-Ultrafiltration -- Session VI Inorganic Ion Exchangers/Absorbers -- Preparation and Properties of Hexacyanoferrates for the Removal of Caesium from Radioactive Waste Streams: A Review -- The Combination of Finely Divided Inorganic Ion Exchangers and Ultrafiltration for the Treatment of Low- and Medium-Level Waste -- Use of Hydrated Antimony Pentoxide (HAP) for Fission Product Removal from Irradiated U Solutions: Application to A Homogeneous Reactor Fuel Reprocessing -- Caesium Decontamination from MTR Waste Solution -- Selective ion Exchange for Chromium Recovery from Tannery Wastes -- Novel Organic, Inorganic and Modified Inorganic Materials for Waste Treatment -- The Eix Process for Radioactive Waste Treatment -- Conclusions -- Main Achievements of the Seminar -- List of Participants -- Index of Authors.
    Abstract: The purpose of this technical seminar was to evaluate the present state of the art in matter of advanced separation techniques like solvent extraction, ion-exchange, chemical precipitation, membrane and electrical processes for the treatment of radioactive liquid waste and a selection of some specific industrial non-radioactive effluents. Through this initiative, the organisers aimed at promoting the exchange of information between scientists from various origins (universities, research centres and industries) while contributing to the necessary overcoming of the artificial barriers which too often limit the "technology transfer" between the nuclear and non-nuclear sectors. Vll CONTENTS PREFACE ........................................ V ABBREVIATIONS ...................................... xiv OPENING SESSION WELCOME ADDRESS C. MANCINI (ENEA) .................................... 3 OPENING ADDRESS S. FINZI (CEC) ....................................... 7 AREAS WHERE ADVANCED SEPARATION TECHNIQUES ARE DESIRABLE G. GROSSI (ENEA), L. CECILLE (CEC) ....................... 11 REVIEW OF NEW EXTRACT ANTS POTENTIALLY APPLICABLE TO THE PROCESSING OF RADIOACTIVE LIQUID WASTES (Summary) P.R. DANESI, International Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna, Austria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . .
    Description / Table of Contents: Opening SessionWelcome Address -- Opening Address -- Areas Where Advanced Separation Techniques are Desirable -- Review of New Extractants Potentially Applicable to the Processing of Radioactive Liquid Wastes (Summary) -- The Truex Process: A Vital Tool for Disposal of U.S. Defense Nuclear Waste -- Session I Amines/Amides Based Extractants -- Highly Selective and Micellar Extraction of Uranyl and Alkaline-Earth Cations (Summary) -- Extraction of Metal Ions by Neutral ?-Diphosphoramides -- Treatment of Nuclear Waste Solutions Using A New Class of Extractants: Pentaalkyl Propane Diamides -- Research for Actinides Extractants from Various Wastes -- N,N Dialkylaliphatic Amides as Extractant of Platinum Group Metals -- Session II Bidentate Organophosphorus Extractants -- Application of the Teseo Process for Actinide Removal from Liquid Alpha Wastes Generated During UO2-PuO2 Fuel Fabrication Campaigns -- Separation of AM, EU and CE from Liquid Wastes with CMPO by Extraction Chromatography -- The Extraction of Actinides and Other Constituents from Highly Active Waste (HAW) by Trialkyl Phosphine Oxide (TRPO) -- Actinides Removal by Means of Octyl(Phenyl)-N,N-Diisobutyl Carbamoyl Methyl Phosphine Oxide (CMPO) Sorbed on Silica -- Application of the CMPO Extractant (Supported Liquid Membrane) for the Alpha Decontamination of Marcoule Reprocessing Concentrate -- Comparison Between CMPO and DHDECMP for Alpha Decontamination of Radioactive Liquid Waste -- Application of CMPO Containing Gels to Metal Extraction -- Session III The Calixarenes -- Potential Industrial Applications of Calixarenes -- Special Calixarenes, Synthesis and Properties -- Calixspherands as Ligands for the Complexation of Radioactive Rubidium-81 -- Research Activities on Calixarenes (Summary) -- Session IV The Crown-Ethers -- General Properties of Crown-Ethers and Their Potential for Applications in Analytical and Preparative Chemistry -- Possible Applications of Crown-Ethers to Metal Extraction Using Liquid Membrane Technology a Literature Survey -- Application of Crown-Ethers to Caesium and Strontium Removal from Marcoule Reprocessing Concentrate -- Session V Other Types of Extractants -- Synthesis of Macrocyclic Ligands and Their Application in the Separation of Rare Earths -- Separation of Actinides with Alkylpyridinium Nitrates -- Phosphonomethyl Substituted Phenols A New Class of Absorbers and Extractants for Metals -- Actinide Separations by High Pressure Cation Exchange - The Neptunium Case -- Separation of Metal Ions by Complexation-Ultrafiltration -- Session VI Inorganic Ion Exchangers/Absorbers -- Preparation and Properties of Hexacyanoferrates for the Removal of Caesium from Radioactive Waste Streams: A Review -- The Combination of Finely Divided Inorganic Ion Exchangers and Ultrafiltration for the Treatment of Low- and Medium-Level Waste -- Use of Hydrated Antimony Pentoxide (HAP) for Fission Product Removal from Irradiated U Solutions: Application to A Homogeneous Reactor Fuel Reprocessing -- Caesium Decontamination from MTR Waste Solution -- Selective ion Exchange for Chromium Recovery from Tannery Wastes -- Novel Organic, Inorganic and Modified Inorganic Materials for Waste Treatment -- The Eix Process for Radioactive Waste Treatment -- Conclusions -- Main Achievements of the Seminar -- List of Participants -- Index of Authors.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 46
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461304975
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Distribution of gold in the Earth’s crust -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Gold in rock-forming minerals -- 1.3 Gold in igneous rocks -- 1.4 Gold in sediments and sedimentary rocks -- 1.5 Gold in metamorphic rocks -- 1.6 Concluding summary -- 1.7 Mineral data -- References -- The hydrothermal geochemistry of gold -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 The inorganic chemistry of gold -- 2.3 Gold complexing in hydrothermal solutions -- 2.4 Gold deposition -- 2.5 Summary -- References -- 3 Archaean lode gold deposits -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Nature of deposits -- 3.3 Regional distribution -- 3.4 Constraints on genetic models -- 3.5 Genetic models -- 3.6 Tectonic setting of gold mineralization -- 3.7 Potential exploration significance -- 3.8 Brief summary -- References -- 4 Phanerozoic gold deposits in tectonically active continental margins -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Distribution of Phanerozoic lode gold deposits in space and time -- 4.3 Geological and geochemical characteristics -- 4.4 Genetic models -- 4.5 Comparisons of Phanerozoic mesothermal deposits to other types of gold Mineralization -- 4.6 Conclusions -- References -- 5 Epithermal gold deposits in volcanic terranes -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Exploration case studies -- 5.4 Active geothermal systems -- 5.5 Metal transport in epithermal systems -- 5.6 Physico-chemical conditions in the depositional regime -- 5.7 Epithermal deposits through geologic time -- 5.8 Exploration -- 5.9 Summary -- References -- 6 Intrusion-related gold deposits -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Geotectonic settings -- 6.3 Intrusion-hosted stockwork/disseminated deposits -- 6.4 Deposits in carbonate rocks -- 6.5 Stockwork, disseminated and replacement deposits in non-carbonate rocks -- 6.6 Breccia-hosted deposits -- 6.7 Vein-type deposits -- 6.8 Deposit interrelationships and metal zoning -- 6.9 Genetic considerations -- 6.10 Possible relationships with other gold deposit types -- 6.11 Concluding remarks -- References -- 7 The geology and origin of Carlin-type gold deposits -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Classification of Carlin-type deposits -- 7.3 Regional geological and tectonic setting -- 7.4 Characteristics of the deposits -- 7.5 Ore deposit models -- 7.6 Exploration guidelines -- 7.7 Summary -- References -- 8 Auriferous hydrothermal precipitates on the modern seafloor -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Gold in seafloor polymetallic sulphide deposits -- 8.3 Mineralogy and geochemistry of gold in seafloor hydrothermal systems -- 8.4 Gold in sub-seafloor stockwork mineralization -- 8.5 Gold in hydrothermal plumes and associated metalliferous sediments -- 8.6 Transport and deposition of gold in seafloor hydrothermal systems -- 8.7 Secondary enrichment of gold in supergene sulphides and gossans -- 8.8 Gold in ancient seafloor hydrothermal systems -- References -- 9 Ancient placer gold deposits -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Geological setting -- 9.3 The palaeosurfaces -- 9.4 The placer sediments -- 9.5 Metamorphism -- 9.6 Structural control -- 9.7 Summary -- References -- 10 Geochemical exploration for gold in temperate, arid, semi-arid, and rain forest terrains -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Geochemical signatures of gold mineralization -- 10.3 Examples and case histories -- 10.4 Operating procedures -- 10.5 Alternative sampling techniques -- 10.6 Conclusions -- References -- 11 Geochemical exploration for gold in glaciated terrain -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Glacial dispersal -- 11.3 Glacial stratigraphy and ice-movement directions -- 11.4 Sampling and analytical methods -- 11.5 Occurrence of gold in till and soil and the effects of weathering -- 11.6 Drift prospecting for gold -- 11.7 Source of placer gold in glaciated terrains -- 11.8 Conclusions and future trends -- References -- 12 Geophysical exploration for gold -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Geological and geophysical models -- 12.3 Exploration strategy and methods -- 12.5 Conclusions -- 12.6 Glossary of geophysical terms -- References -- 13 Economics of gold deposits -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Market setting -- 13.3 Gold-mine production -- 13.4 Economic evaluation of gold deposits -- 13.5 Characteristics of economic gold deposits -- 13.6 Conclusion -- References.
    Abstract: Within the last decade, the high and continuing demand for gold has prompted a global gold rush on a scale never before seen, not even in the heady days of Ballarat, California and the Yukon. Gold is being sought on every continent and, with very few exceptions, in every country around the world. Such interest and fierce competition has demanded considerable innovation and improvement in exploration techniques paralleled by a rapid expansion of the geological database and consequent genetic modelling for the many different types of gold deposits now recognized. This proliferation of data has swamped the literature and left explorationist and academic alike unable to sift more than a small proportion of the accumulating information. This new book represents an attempt to address this major problem by providing succinct syntheses ofall major aspects ofgold metallogeny and exploration, ranging from the chemical distribution of gold in the Earth's crust, and the hydrothermal chemistry of gold, to Archaean and Phanerozoic lode deposits, epithermal environments, chemical sediments, and placer deposits, and culminates in chapters devoted to geochemical and geophysical exploration, and the economics of gold deposits. Each chapter is written by geoscientists who are acknowledged internationally in their respective fields, thus guaranteeing a broad yet up-to-date coverage. In addition, each chapter is accompanied by reference lists which provide readers with access to the most pertinent and useful publications.
    Description / Table of Contents: Distribution of gold in the Earth’s crust1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Gold in rock-forming minerals -- 1.3 Gold in igneous rocks -- 1.4 Gold in sediments and sedimentary rocks -- 1.5 Gold in metamorphic rocks -- 1.6 Concluding summary -- 1.7 Mineral data -- References -- The hydrothermal geochemistry of gold -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 The inorganic chemistry of gold -- 2.3 Gold complexing in hydrothermal solutions -- 2.4 Gold deposition -- 2.5 Summary -- References -- 3 Archaean lode gold deposits -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Nature of deposits -- 3.3 Regional distribution -- 3.4 Constraints on genetic models -- 3.5 Genetic models -- 3.6 Tectonic setting of gold mineralization -- 3.7 Potential exploration significance -- 3.8 Brief summary -- References -- 4 Phanerozoic gold deposits in tectonically active continental margins -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Distribution of Phanerozoic lode gold deposits in space and time -- 4.3 Geological and geochemical characteristics -- 4.4 Genetic models -- 4.5 Comparisons of Phanerozoic mesothermal deposits to other types of gold Mineralization -- 4.6 Conclusions -- References -- 5 Epithermal gold deposits in volcanic terranes -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Exploration case studies -- 5.4 Active geothermal systems -- 5.5 Metal transport in epithermal systems -- 5.6 Physico-chemical conditions in the depositional regime -- 5.7 Epithermal deposits through geologic time -- 5.8 Exploration -- 5.9 Summary -- References -- 6 Intrusion-related gold deposits -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Geotectonic settings -- 6.3 Intrusion-hosted stockwork/disseminated deposits -- 6.4 Deposits in carbonate rocks -- 6.5 Stockwork, disseminated and replacement deposits in non-carbonate rocks -- 6.6 Breccia-hosted deposits -- 6.7 Vein-type deposits -- 6.8 Deposit interrelationships and metal zoning -- 6.9 Genetic considerations -- 6.10 Possible relationships with other gold deposit types -- 6.11 Concluding remarks -- References -- 7 The geology and origin of Carlin-type gold deposits -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Classification of Carlin-type deposits -- 7.3 Regional geological and tectonic setting -- 7.4 Characteristics of the deposits -- 7.5 Ore deposit models -- 7.6 Exploration guidelines -- 7.7 Summary -- References -- 8 Auriferous hydrothermal precipitates on the modern seafloor -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Gold in seafloor polymetallic sulphide deposits -- 8.3 Mineralogy and geochemistry of gold in seafloor hydrothermal systems -- 8.4 Gold in sub-seafloor stockwork mineralization -- 8.5 Gold in hydrothermal plumes and associated metalliferous sediments -- 8.6 Transport and deposition of gold in seafloor hydrothermal systems -- 8.7 Secondary enrichment of gold in supergene sulphides and gossans -- 8.8 Gold in ancient seafloor hydrothermal systems -- References -- 9 Ancient placer gold deposits -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Geological setting -- 9.3 The palaeosurfaces -- 9.4 The placer sediments -- 9.5 Metamorphism -- 9.6 Structural control -- 9.7 Summary -- References -- 10 Geochemical exploration for gold in temperate, arid, semi-arid, and rain forest terrains -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Geochemical signatures of gold mineralization -- 10.3 Examples and case histories -- 10.4 Operating procedures -- 10.5 Alternative sampling techniques -- 10.6 Conclusions -- References -- 11 Geochemical exploration for gold in glaciated terrain -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Glacial dispersal -- 11.3 Glacial stratigraphy and ice-movement directions -- 11.4 Sampling and analytical methods -- 11.5 Occurrence of gold in till and soil and the effects of weathering -- 11.6 Drift prospecting for gold -- 11.7 Source of placer gold in glaciated terrains -- 11.8 Conclusions and future trends -- References -- 12 Geophysical exploration for gold -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Geological and geophysical models -- 12.3 Exploration strategy and methods -- 12.5 Conclusions -- 12.6 Glossary of geophysical terms -- References -- 13 Economics of gold deposits -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Market setting -- 13.3 Gold-mine production -- 13.4 Economic evaluation of gold deposits -- 13.5 Characteristics of economic gold deposits -- 13.6 Conclusion -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 47
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468415308
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Developments in polymerization -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Radical addition polymerization -- 1.3 Ionic and coordination addition polymerization -- 1.4 Stepwise polymerization -- References -- 2 Group transfer polymerizations -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Features of group transfer polymerization -- 2.3 Kinetics and mechanism -- 2.4 Aldol group transfer polymerization -- 2.5 Copolymers -- 2.6 Telechelics -- 2.7 Related and anionic polymerizations -- 2.8 Applications -- References -- 3 Ring-opening metathesis polymerization of cyclic alkenes -- 3.1 Scope of ring-opening metathesis polymerization -- 3.2 Monomers for ring-opening metathesis polymerization -- 3.3 Catalysts for the ring-opening polymerization of cycloalkenes -- 3.4 Mechanism of ring-opening metathesis polymerization -- 3.5 Molecular weight distribution in polyalkenylenes -- 3.6 Stereochemistry of ring-opening metathesis polymerization -- 3.7 Thermodynamics of ring-opening polymerization -- References -- 4 Transformation reactions -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Historical development of transformation reactions -- 4.3 Transformations between anionic and cationic polymerization -- 4.4 Transformations between ionic and free radical polymerization -- 4.5 Transformations involving other modes of polymerization -- 4.6 Conclusions -- References -- 5 Chemical modification of preformed polymers -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Chemical reactions of polymers: general aspects -- 5.3 Modification of polymers -- References -- 6 Terminally reactive oligomers: telechelic oligomers and macromers -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 The synthesis of terminally reactive oligomers -- 6.3 Reactions and reactivity of telechelic oligomers and macromers -- 6.4 Uses of terminally functionalized oligomers -- References.
    Abstract: Most practitioners and students of polymer chemistry are familiar, in general terms at least, with the established methods of polymer synthesis - radical, anionic, cationic and coordination addition polymerization, and stepwise con­ densation and rearrangement polymerization. These methods are used to synthesize the majority of polymers used in the manufacture of commercially important plastics, fibres, resins and rubbers, and are covered in most introduc­ tory polymer chemistry textbooks and in most undergraduate and graduate courses on polymer science. Fewer polymer chemists, however, have much familiarity with more recent developments in methods of polymer synthesis, unless they have been specifically involved for some time in the synthesis of speciality polymers. These developments include not only refinements to established methods but also new mechanisms of polymerization, such as group transfer and metathesis polymerization and novel non-polymerization routes to speciality polymers involving, for example, the chemical modification of preformed polymers or the linking together of short terminally functionalized blocks.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Developments in polymerization1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Radical addition polymerization -- 1.3 Ionic and coordination addition polymerization -- 1.4 Stepwise polymerization -- References -- 2 Group transfer polymerizations -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Features of group transfer polymerization -- 2.3 Kinetics and mechanism -- 2.4 Aldol group transfer polymerization -- 2.5 Copolymers -- 2.6 Telechelics -- 2.7 Related and anionic polymerizations -- 2.8 Applications -- References -- 3 Ring-opening metathesis polymerization of cyclic alkenes -- 3.1 Scope of ring-opening metathesis polymerization -- 3.2 Monomers for ring-opening metathesis polymerization -- 3.3 Catalysts for the ring-opening polymerization of cycloalkenes -- 3.4 Mechanism of ring-opening metathesis polymerization -- 3.5 Molecular weight distribution in polyalkenylenes -- 3.6 Stereochemistry of ring-opening metathesis polymerization -- 3.7 Thermodynamics of ring-opening polymerization -- References -- 4 Transformation reactions -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Historical development of transformation reactions -- 4.3 Transformations between anionic and cationic polymerization -- 4.4 Transformations between ionic and free radical polymerization -- 4.5 Transformations involving other modes of polymerization -- 4.6 Conclusions -- References -- 5 Chemical modification of preformed polymers -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Chemical reactions of polymers: general aspects -- 5.3 Modification of polymers -- References -- 6 Terminally reactive oligomers: telechelic oligomers and macromers -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 The synthesis of terminally reactive oligomers -- 6.3 Reactions and reactivity of telechelic oligomers and macromers -- 6.4 Uses of terminally functionalized oligomers -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 48
    ISBN: 9781461596868
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Introduction: The role of landscape boundaries in the management and restoration of changing environments -- 2. Fundamental ecological characteristics of landscape boundaries -- 3. Climatic constraints and issues of scale controlling regional biomes -- 4. Potential responses of landscape boundaries to global environmental change -- 5. Simulation of the scale-dependent effects of landscape boundaries on species persistence and dispersal -- 6. Human impact on the functioning of landscape boundaries -- 7. Restoration of human impacted land-water ecotones -- 8. Summary: Landscape boundaries in the management and restoration of changing environments.
    Abstract: We live in a changing world; one in which there is much concern and discussion about the topics of global change, loss of biodiversity, and increasing threats to the sustainability of ecosystems. The effects these changes may have on the environment have lead governments and sCientists to make predictions as to how soon changes might occur, where, and with what impact for large and small regions of the Earth. Along with this concern for change in various regions has come the need to understand the role of boundaries between these regions and between landscape elements. Much previous ecological research has dealt with processes within relatively homogeneous landscape units or even the collective characteristics of a composite landscape. Now, however, there is an appreciation that abiotic and biotic components move across heterogeneous landscapes and that the boundaries between these units take on important control functions in this dynamic spatial system. Furthermore, landscape boundaries (or ecotones) are important not only in satisfying life-cycle needs of many organisms, but generally are characterized by high biological diversity.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Introduction: The role of landscape boundaries in the management and restoration of changing environments2. Fundamental ecological characteristics of landscape boundaries -- 3. Climatic constraints and issues of scale controlling regional biomes -- 4. Potential responses of landscape boundaries to global environmental change -- 5. Simulation of the scale-dependent effects of landscape boundaries on species persistence and dispersal -- 6. Human impact on the functioning of landscape boundaries -- 7. Restoration of human impacted land-water ecotones -- 8. Summary: Landscape boundaries in the management and restoration of changing environments.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 49
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461538707
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Production management. ; Strategic planning. ; Leadership. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Quality costing: an introduction -- 2 Definitions of quality costs -- 3 Collection of quality costs -- 4 Reporting of quality costs -- 5 Uses of quality costs -- 6 Case study, company 1 -- 7 Case study, company 2 -- 8 Case study, company 3 -- 9 Case study, company 4 -- 10 Setting up a quality costing system.
    Abstract: This book is one of the few English language texts devoted to the subject of quality costing. The material is based on research work carried out by the authors at the Manchester School of Managememt, UMIST, over the last nine years or so. The research has been mainly in manufac­ turing organizations but work has also been conducted in non-manufac­ turing concerns (e. g. marketing and service operations, and commerce). The book will provide managers with sound practical advice on how to define, collect, analyse, report and use quality costs. The text covers all the main aspects of quality costing and an attempt has been made to structure the book in the sequence by which organizations should set about a quality costing exercise. The book opens by examining the background of quality costing. This is followed by chapters on definitions of quality costs, collection of quality costs, analysis and reporting of quality costs, and the uses of quality costs. Examples from manufacturing organizations and non­ manufacturing situations are used throughout the first five chapters to illustrate the key points discussed in the text. The next four chapters are case studies which provide considerable detail on quality costing in companies from the mechanical and electronics industries. To preserve anonymity the companies are not referred to by name.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Quality costing: an introduction2 Definitions of quality costs -- 3 Collection of quality costs -- 4 Reporting of quality costs -- 5 Uses of quality costs -- 6 Case study, company 1 -- 7 Case study, company 2 -- 8 Case study, company 3 -- 9 Case study, company 4 -- 10 Setting up a quality costing system.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 50
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401159654
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 In the Abyss of Time -- 1 In the beginning -- 2 The beginning of life -- 3 The Archaean planet -- 2 The Occupation of the Planet -- 4 The variety of life -- 5 Life in the Archaean -- 6 The surface of the Proterozoic Earth -- 7 The birth of the eukaryotes -- 3 The Spread of the Eukaryotes -- 8 The early Palaeozoic explosion and its aftermath -- 9 The changing land -- 10 The rule of the reptiles -- 4 The Modern World -- 11 The new world -- 12 Humanity -- 13 Inhabiting an island.
    Abstract: Life has shaped the Earth, and the Earth has moulded the history of life. That history, the co-evolution of our ancestors and their horne, has much to teach us about our place on the planet today. We are part of the fabric of the biosphere. As we change that fabric we would be wise to understand how our horne was built. Our planet is neither a hotel nor a colony. It is not a place which life briefly inhabits during a transient occupation. Instead, it is our horne, designed by the deeds of our ancestors and suited to our own needs. The history of life on Earth is held in the geological record, which is composed of the rocks, water and air that are available for study on the planet's surface. These rocks, the oceans and the atmosphere are not simply stores of information for the excitement of fossil hunters and geochemists, or resources to exploit without thought. Their cre­ ation and continued existence form an integral part of the development and management of the Earth as the horne of life.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 In the Abyss of Time1 In the beginning -- 2 The beginning of life -- 3 The Archaean planet -- 2 The Occupation of the Planet -- 4 The variety of life -- 5 Life in the Archaean -- 6 The surface of the Proterozoic Earth -- 7 The birth of the eukaryotes -- 3 The Spread of the Eukaryotes -- 8 The early Palaeozoic explosion and its aftermath -- 9 The changing land -- 10 The rule of the reptiles -- 4 The Modern World -- 11 The new world -- 12 Humanity -- 13 Inhabiting an island.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 51
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468487428
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: 9th edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: A -- B -- C -- D -- E -- F -- G -- H -- I -- J -- K -- L -- M -- N -- O -- P -- Q -- R -- S -- T -- U -- V -- W -- X -- Y -- Z.
    Abstract: This edition of well over 50,000 entries not only updates its predecessor but considerably increases the coverage of Latin America and Eastern Europe. I have been aided in this work by two colleagues at Glasgow University Library, Dr Lloyd Davies and Barbara MacMillan, and in general revision by Kate Richard. Close on 20% of the text has been altered. The equivalences, introduced into the last edition, linking acronyms in different languages for the same organization, have been extended. New to this edition is the cross-referencing between a defunct organization and its successor. Otherwise the policies adopted in previous editions have been retained: strictly local organizations are omitted, but the subject scope includes activities of all kinds; the country of origin of a national organization is given in brackets, unless it is the home country of the title language or can be readily deduced from the title itself. Acronyms of parent bodies of subsidiary organizations are also added in brackets. A select bibliography guides the reader to specialist works providing more detailed information. Particularly at a time of such widespread political change affecting organizational structures in so many countries, it is impossible to ensure complete up-to-date accuracy in a work of this kind. Readers are earnestly invited to inform me of any errors and omissions for attention in a later edition of this work. H. H. Bibliography Acronyms, Initialisms and Abbreviations Dictionary. 13th edn. Gale Research Co. , Detroit, 1989.
    Description / Table of Contents: AB -- C -- D -- E -- F -- G -- H -- I -- J -- K -- L -- M -- N -- O -- P -- Q -- R -- S -- T -- U -- V -- W -- X -- Y -- Z.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 52
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781475709292
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 285 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 What are Lamprophyres? — History, Definitions, Classification -- 2 When and Where? — Global Distribution, Igneous Associations -- 3 Field Geology and Petrography — Macroscopy and Microscopy -- 4 Cognate Mineralogy -- 5 Whole-rock Geochemistry -- 6 Inclusion Suites — Macrocrysts, Xenocrysts, Xenoliths, etc. -- 7 Plutonic and Volcanic Equivalents of Lamprophyres -- 8 Nature, Origin and Evolution of Lamprophyre Melts -- 9 Economic Geology -- 10 A Selective Lamprophyre Bibliography -- Appendix A Abbreviations and Symbols -- Appendix B Glossary of lamprophyres and ambiguous petrological terms -- Appendix C Global Compilation of Lamprophyre Occurrences -- Table Cl Confirmed occurrences of cale-alkaline lamprophyres -- Table C2 Confirmed occurrences of alkaline lamprophyres -- Table C3 Confirmed occurrences of ultramafic lamprophyres -- Table C4 Confirmed occurrences of lamproites -- Table C5 Additional documentation for the appinite suite and vaugnérite series -- Table C6 Confirmed mixed or transitional occurrences (covering two or more branches) -- Table C7 Unconfirmed occurrences of “lamprophyres” -- Table C8 Apocryphal occurrences of “lamprophyres” -- Appendix D The computerized lamprophyre database LAMPDA.
    Abstract: Following their recognition by GUmbel (1874), lamprophyres were treated for an entire century as little more than obscure curiosities. Although this situation has changed recently, with a flowering of publications and active workers, lamprophyres remain almost the only group of igneous rocks which have not yet received attention in a dedicated monograph. In five exploratory reviews (1977-1987), the writer aimed to set out what was known about these rocks. The lUGS Subcommission on igneous rock systematics had meanwhile presented its nomenclatural framework (Streckeisen 1979). All this has now been overtaken by a recent explosion of interest, epitomized not least by lamprophyres' greater prominence in the 4th International Kimberlite Conference Proceedings. More data have become available since 1985 than over the entire previous century, and it is obviously impossible for such an extraordinary outpouring to be fully reviewed in this first, preliminary book. At the risk of dissatisfying some readers, therefore, this book concentrates on factual matters, and on a broad overview rather than minutiae. Because not even a world map of known lamprophyres was previously available, almost half the book is deliberately taken up by the first global lamprophyre compilation, and its commensurately extensive Bibliography. Such a compendium of largely objective information is believed to be of more immediate interest and lasting value than a premature pottage of petrogenetic polemic. Chapters 1-7 bring previous studies up to date, and concentrate on factual information.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 53
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401169677
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 225 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Design and Process Considerations -- 1.1 Overview -- 1.2 Assembly Packaging -- 1.3 Component Packaging -- 1.4 The Printed Wiring Assembly -- 1.5 Assembly and Solder Process -- 1.6 Cleaning Operation -- 1.7 Summary -- References -- 2 Flux Considerations with Emphasis on Low Solids -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Specifications -- 2.3 Flux Materials -- 2.4 Application Methods -- 2.5 Monitoring Techniques -- 2.6 Process Issues -- 2.7 Nonliquid Fluxes -- 2.8 Importance of Soldering Parameters -- 2.9 Summary and Trends -- References -- 3 Solvent Defluxing of Printed Wiring Board Assemblies and Surface Mount Assemblies: Materials, Processes, and Equipment -- 3.1 The Need for Cleaning -- 3.2 The Cleaning Process -- 3.3 Testing for Cleanliness -- 3.4 Environmental Concerns of Solvents -- 3.5 Conclusion -- References -- 4 Aqueous Defluxing: Materials, Processes, and Equipment -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Design Considerations -- 4.3 Process Considerations -- 4.4 Process Qualification and Control -- 4.5 Environmental Concerns -- References -- 5 Alternative Defluxing: Materials, Processes, and Equipment -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Methods and Equipment -- 5.3 Materials -- References -- 6 Defluxing for High Reliability Applications and General Environmental Issues -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Background -- 6.3 Cleanliness Requirements -- 6.4 Cleaning Materials -- 6.5 Cleaning Equipment -- 6.6 Cleanliness Verification -- 6.7 Environmental Issues -- 6.8 The Future of Cleaning -- 6.9 Conclusions -- References.
    Abstract: The impetus to create this book originated from several concerns. One of these was the perceived value to the industry of a collection in one volume of a wide range of information pertinent to the reasons and techniques for de fluxing printed wiring assemblies (PWAs). This book is expected to be of use not only to those engaged in the electronics packaging industry but also to those in related fields seeking information concerning viable methods of dealing with one of the en­ vironmental issues of our time: the destruction of the ozone layer surrounding and protecting the planet with which we have been entrusted. The volume of information relative to providing PW As free of residues ad­ versely impacting operation, reliability, and life of electronic products is grow­ ing, and it will continue to expand at an accelerated rate as we seek to match our technology needs and desires with our environmental responsibilities. At the time ofthis writing, which has spanned the latter portion of 1989 and early 1990, the issue of choosing a new approach to producing PW As free of detrimental residues while using environmentally acceptable manufacturing techniques ap­ peared to be the major concern of the vast majority of those involved in the printed wiring assembly industry. To many this meant the use of different clean­ ing media and/or process or equipment enhancements; to others it meant the elimination of the need to clean through materials or process changes.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 54
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401131384
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 224 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Maintenance policies -- 2 Organization of maintenance operations -- 3 Behaviour of physical equipment in service -- 4 Management of maintenance operations -- 5 Mathematics for maintenance: basic concepts and tools -- 6 Applications: case studies -- Exercises -- Annexe -- Maintenance software suppliers.
    Abstract: As the developments in engineering production techniques have resulted in an increasing dependence on automation, the increasing complexity of these systems has made the reliability of the machines a matter of great importance. An unexpected breakdown can be a very expensive experience for the company. Further, in the aerospace industry, problems of reliability, maintainability and availability are critical. For a long time industrial research and training centres have been interested primarily in the problems of design, manufacture and production; recently, however, there has been a growing interest in the study of maintenance and reliability. The concept of maintainability, for example, first appeared in 1954 in the US army. Since then a variety of techniques and methodologies have been developed and implemented to meet the challenge of the new needs. The aim of this book is to present these methods and investigate their effectiveness, and in so doing to help practising engineers gain a better understanding of the problems. The many examples and applications given here should make it a valuable teaching aid to students taking courses in engineering maintenance. This second edition has been revised and enlarged to take account of the most recent developments and illustrate their application to the solution of problems. It should also help to orient the reader to the modern concept of computer-aided maintenance. Introduction A maintenance service exists to keep equipment in running order and also to reduce the number of breakdowns.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Maintenance policies2 Organization of maintenance operations -- 3 Behaviour of physical equipment in service -- 4 Management of maintenance operations -- 5 Mathematics for maintenance: basic concepts and tools -- 6 Applications: case studies -- Exercises -- Annexe -- Maintenance software suppliers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 55
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781475753806
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 302 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Sweetness and food selection -- 2 The carbohydrate—sucrose -- 3 Non-sucrose carbohydrates -- 4 Sugar alcohols -- 5 Intense sweeteners -- 6 Natural high potency sweeteners -- 7 Sweetener markets, marketing and product development -- 8 Sweeteners and dental health -- 9 Sweeteners and metabolic disorders -- 10 Sweeteners and body weight -- 11 Sweeteners: statutory aspects.
    Abstract: The study of sweetness and sweeteners has recently been an area well­ served by books at all levels, but this volume was planned to fill what we perceived as a gap in the coverage. There appeared to be no book which attempted to combine a study of sweetness with a thorough but concise coverage of all aspects of sweeteners. We set out to include all the important classes of sweeteners, including materials which do not yet have regulatory approval, so that clear comparisons could be made between them and their technological advantages and disadvantages. To achieve our first aim, of sufficient depth of coverage, the accounts within this volume are comprehensive enough to satisfy the requirements of a demanding readership, but cannot be exhaustive in a single volume of moderate proportions. The second aim, of breadth and conciseness, is satisfied by careful selection of the most pertinent material. For the purposes of this book, a sweetener is assumed to be any substance whose primary effect is to sweeten a food or beverage to be consumed, thus including both the nutritive and non-nutritive varieties, from the ubiquitous sucrose to the lesser known, newer developments in alternative sweeteners. The volume has its contents structured in a logical manner to enable it to be used in an ordered study of the complete subject area or as a convenient reference source.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 56
    ISBN: 9781468465396
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 383 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Series Statement: Housing production manual
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: The procedures in this manual distill six years of learning about the most efficient acquisition and construction methods in this country for high volume production of housing affordable to low-income people. The people in the Rehab Work Group at The Enterprise Foundation have gathered this information first-hand and conveyed it in training workshops on production management throughout the country. Over 2000 participants in the workshops have included rehab specialists from city housing departments, con­ struction managers of single and multifamily rehab projects, program managers from both nonprofit housing development organizations and city rehab depart­ ments, as well as students in colleges and universities. They are becoming the backbone of a new cadre of effective producers of affordable housing. In the 30 cities and several rural areas where we have both learned and applied these production management techniques, they have resulted in savings of 5, 10, even 25 percent of the cost of housing development. The Enterprise Foundation is a national, nonprofit organization that my wife Patty and I launched in 1982. The Foundation's mission is to see that all very low-income Americans have the opportunity for fit and affordable housing within a generation, and work their way up and out of poverty into the main­ stream of American life.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 57
    ISBN: 9781461576044
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Fifth Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Glossary -- 2 Polymer Chemistry -- 3 Plastic Materials/Properties and Applications -- 4 Extrusion Processes -- 5 Injection Molding of Plastics -- 6 Design Considerations for Injection Molds -- 7 Injection Mold Manufacturing -- 8 Injection Molding of Thermosets -- 9 Compression and Transfer Molding -- 10 Designing Molds for Thermoset Processing -- 11 Molded Part Design -- 12 Blow Molding of Thermoplastics -- 13 Thermoforming of Plastic Film and Sheet -- 14 Rotational Molding -- 15 Calendering -- 16 Vinyl Dispersions -- 17 Powder Coatings -- 18 Reinforced Plastics and Composites -- 19 Cellular Plastics -- 20 Radiation Processing -- 21 Material and Parts Handling -- 22 Compounding -- 23 Finishing and Machining Plastics -- 24 Joining and Assembling Plastics -- 25 Design Standards for Inserts -- 26 Decorating Plastics -- 27 Performance Testing of Plastics Products.
    Abstract: I am pleased to present the Fifth Edition of the Plastics Engineering Handbook. Last published in 1976, this version of the standard industry reference on plastics processing incorporates the numerous revisions and additions necessitated by 14 years of activity in a dynamic industry. At that last printing, then-SPI President Ralph L. Harding, Jr. anticipated that plastics pro­ duction would top 26 billion pounds in 1976 (up from 1.25 billion in 1947, when the First Edition of this book was issued). As I write, plastics production in the United States had reached almost 60 billion pounds annually. Indeed, the story of the U.S. plastics industry always has been one of phenomenal growth and unparalleled innovation. While these factors make compilation of a book such as this difficult, they also make it necessary. Thus I acknowledge all those who worked to gather and relate the information included in this 1991 edition and thank them for the effort it took to make the Plastics Engineering Handbook a definitive source and invaluable tool for our industry. Larry L. Thomas President The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Glossary2 Polymer Chemistry -- 3 Plastic Materials/Properties and Applications -- 4 Extrusion Processes -- 5 Injection Molding of Plastics -- 6 Design Considerations for Injection Molds -- 7 Injection Mold Manufacturing -- 8 Injection Molding of Thermosets -- 9 Compression and Transfer Molding -- 10 Designing Molds for Thermoset Processing -- 11 Molded Part Design -- 12 Blow Molding of Thermoplastics -- 13 Thermoforming of Plastic Film and Sheet -- 14 Rotational Molding -- 15 Calendering -- 16 Vinyl Dispersions -- 17 Powder Coatings -- 18 Reinforced Plastics and Composites -- 19 Cellular Plastics -- 20 Radiation Processing -- 21 Material and Parts Handling -- 22 Compounding -- 23 Finishing and Machining Plastics -- 24 Joining and Assembling Plastics -- 25 Design Standards for Inserts -- 26 Decorating Plastics -- 27 Performance Testing of Plastics Products.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 58
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401176149
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 1.1 Background -- 1.2 Structure and properties of plastics -- 1.3 Additives -- 1.4 Processing of plastics -- 1.5 Practical methods of processing -- 1.6 Interactions between shaping process and plastics materials -- Further reading -- 2 Fundamentals of design -- 2.1 Engineering design -- 2.2 Design limitations imposed by processing method -- 2.3 Product design -- 2.4 Importance of economics of processing in design -- Further reading -- 3 Styrene plastics -- 3.1 Polystyrene -- 3.2 High impact polystyrene -- 3.3 Styrene copolymers -- 3.4 ABS plastics -- 3.5 Polystyrene—poly(phenylene oxide) blends -- 4 Other amorphous thermoplastics -- 4.1 Poly(methyl methacrylate) -- 4.2 Cellulose plastics -- 4.3 Polycarbonates -- 5 Propylene plastics -- 5.1 Homopolymer and impact-modified grades -- 5.2 Filled polypropylene -- 5.3 Foamed polypropylene -- 5.4 Miscellaneous applications of propylene polymers -- 6 Other polyolefin plastics -- 6.1 Polyethylene -- 6.2 Ethylene copolymers -- 6.3 Polybut-1-ene -- 6.4 Poly-4-methylpent-1-ene -- 7 Other crystalline thermoplastics -- 7.1 Polyamides -- 7.2 Thermoplastic polyesters -- 7.3 Polyacetals -- 8 Vinyl chloride plastics -- 8.1 Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.2 Plasticized poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.3 Vinyl chloride copolymers -- 8.4 Blends of poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.5 Vinylidene chloride polymers and copolymers -- 9 Speciality thermoplastics -- 9.1 Fluoroplastics -- 9.2 Polysulphones -- 9.3 Poly(phenylene sulphide) -- 10 Cross-linked plastics -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Phenol-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.3 Urea-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.4 Melamine-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.5 Unsaturated polyester resins -- 10.6 Epoxide resins -- 11 Polyurethane plastics -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Molecular structure—property relationships -- 11.3 Properties and applications of polyurethanes -- Further reading.
    Abstract: Plastics are part of everyday life and contribute immensely to the benefit of humanity. When failures occur, they are due in part either to inferior properties (resulting from poor design or badly controlled processing), or to an incomplete understanding of the properties and applications of plastics materials. Since publication of the first edition, the plastics industry has increas­ ingly adopted advanced business procedures and automation (such as closed loop control and robotics), to combat the effects of recession, and has moved increasingly towards methods based on sound scientific and technological principles. Plastics have increasingly been used in appli­ cations once dominated by the use of metals and ceramics. For instance, in the automotive industry, the modern car now contains a much higher proportion of polymers, including commodity plastics and more spec­ ialized materials. In addition, compact discs are being made from new injection-moulding grades of polycarbonate, which meet the requirements of a demanding process. This second edition has been thoroughly revised and extended to include new materials, technologies and design concepts. Chapters on thermoplastics reflect the development of polymer blends and alloys, whilst the chapters devoted to thermosets have been reorganized to accommodate the renaissance in the applications of phenolics and to cover the growing importance of polyurethanes. The related two­ component process technologies are now included; having undergone major developments in the last decade, they have become important shaping processes.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction1.1 Background -- 1.2 Structure and properties of plastics -- 1.3 Additives -- 1.4 Processing of plastics -- 1.5 Practical methods of processing -- 1.6 Interactions between shaping process and plastics materials -- Further reading -- 2 Fundamentals of design -- 2.1 Engineering design -- 2.2 Design limitations imposed by processing method -- 2.3 Product design -- 2.4 Importance of economics of processing in design -- Further reading -- 3 Styrene plastics -- 3.1 Polystyrene -- 3.2 High impact polystyrene -- 3.3 Styrene copolymers -- 3.4 ABS plastics -- 3.5 Polystyrene-poly(phenylene oxide) blends -- 4 Other amorphous thermoplastics -- 4.1 Poly(methyl methacrylate) -- 4.2 Cellulose plastics -- 4.3 Polycarbonates -- 5 Propylene plastics -- 5.1 Homopolymer and impact-modified grades -- 5.2 Filled polypropylene -- 5.3 Foamed polypropylene -- 5.4 Miscellaneous applications of propylene polymers -- 6 Other polyolefin plastics -- 6.1 Polyethylene -- 6.2 Ethylene copolymers -- 6.3 Polybut-1-ene -- 6.4 Poly-4-methylpent-1-ene -- 7 Other crystalline thermoplastics -- 7.1 Polyamides -- 7.2 Thermoplastic polyesters -- 7.3 Polyacetals -- 8 Vinyl chloride plastics -- 8.1 Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.2 Plasticized poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.3 Vinyl chloride copolymers -- 8.4 Blends of poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.5 Vinylidene chloride polymers and copolymers -- 9 Speciality thermoplastics -- 9.1 Fluoroplastics -- 9.2 Polysulphones -- 9.3 Poly(phenylene sulphide) -- 10 Cross-linked plastics -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Phenol-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.3 Urea-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.4 Melamine-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.5 Unsaturated polyester resins -- 10.6 Epoxide resins -- 11 Polyurethane plastics -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Molecular structure-property relationships -- 11.3 Properties and applications of polyurethanes -- Further reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 59
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401179508
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Introduction to Cleanroom Technology -- The Need for Cleanrooms -- An Overview of Semiconductor Technology -- Other Cleanroom Applications -- The Impact of Cleanroom Technology -- 2. Microcontamination -- Types of Contamination -- Sources of Contamination -- Effects of Contamination -- Summary -- 3. Controlled Environment Concepts -- Performance Considerations -- Performance Standards -- Parameter Measurement -- Summary -- 4. Creating Clean Areas -- Construction Materials and Techniques -- Air Filtration -- Airflow -- Equipment and Material Decontamination -- Bringing Items into the Cleanroom -- Summary -- 5. Cleanroom Layout -- Mixed Flow Rooms -- Local Unidirectional Flow -- Modular Cleanrooms -- Tunnel Cleanrooms -- Total Vertical Laminar Flow -- Horizontal Laminar Flow -- Process Equipment -- Designing for Cleanroom Class -- Summary -- 6. Preconditioning, Control, and Static -- Air Handling Systems -- Fans and Air Control -- Static -- Summary -- 7. Site and Structural Considerations -- Vibration -- Site Selection -- Structure -- Internal Vibration Engineering -- Summary -- 8. Cleanrooms, Codes, and Legislation -- Principal Codes -- Fire Protection -- Legislation -- Summary -- 9. Ultrapure Water -- The Need for Ultrapure Water -- Constituents of Raw Water -- Purification Techniques -- RO/DI System Configurations -- Operational Considerations -- Summary -- 10. Production Materials -- Gases -- Wet Chemicals -- Handling Other Materials -- Summary -- 11. Personnel and Contamination -- Apparel -- Use of Apparel -- Work Practices -- Summary -- 12. Safety Issues -- Properties of Hazardous Production Materials -- Cleanroom Safety Practices -- Safety Equipment -- Handling Hazardous Production Materials -- Summary -- 13. The Future of Controlled Environments -- Advanced Cleanroom Concepts -- Enclosed Transfer Systems -- Robotics and Automation -- In-situ Processing -- Epilog—The Cleanroom as a System -- Appendix 1 Federal Standard 209D -- Appendix 2 Simplified Cleanroom Certification Procedure -- Appendix 3 Program and Sample Output.
    Abstract: In writing this book, our goal was to produce a much needed teaching and reference text with a fresh approach to c1eanroom technology. The most obvious technological reason for bringing this book into being is that c1ean­ rooms have become vital to the manufacture and development of high­ technology products in both the commercial and military sectors, and there­ fore people have to develop an understanding of them. Examples of c1ean­ room applications include the manufacture of integrated circuits and other electronic components, preciSion mechanical assemblies, computer disks and drives, compact disks, optical components, medical implants and prostheses, pharmaceuticals and biochemicals, and so on. The book is written for anyone who is currently involved, or intends to become involved, with c1eanrooms. We intend it to be used by a wide range of professional groups including process engineers, production engineers, plant mechanical and electrical engineers, research engineers and scientists, managers, and so on. In addition, we believe it will be beneficial to those who design, build, service, and supply c1eanrooms, and may be used as a training aid for students who intend to pursue a career involving controlled environments and others such as c1eanroom operators and maintenance staff. We have attempted to steer clear of complex theory, which may be pursued in many other specialist texts, and keep the book as understandable and applicable as possible.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Introduction to Cleanroom TechnologyThe Need for Cleanrooms -- An Overview of Semiconductor Technology -- Other Cleanroom Applications -- The Impact of Cleanroom Technology -- 2. Microcontamination -- Types of Contamination -- Sources of Contamination -- Effects of Contamination -- Summary -- 3. Controlled Environment Concepts -- Performance Considerations -- Performance Standards -- Parameter Measurement -- Summary -- 4. Creating Clean Areas -- Construction Materials and Techniques -- Air Filtration -- Airflow -- Equipment and Material Decontamination -- Bringing Items into the Cleanroom -- Summary -- 5. Cleanroom Layout -- Mixed Flow Rooms -- Local Unidirectional Flow -- Modular Cleanrooms -- Tunnel Cleanrooms -- Total Vertical Laminar Flow -- Horizontal Laminar Flow -- Process Equipment -- Designing for Cleanroom Class -- Summary -- 6. Preconditioning, Control, and Static -- Air Handling Systems -- Fans and Air Control -- Static -- Summary -- 7. Site and Structural Considerations -- Vibration -- Site Selection -- Structure -- Internal Vibration Engineering -- Summary -- 8. Cleanrooms, Codes, and Legislation -- Principal Codes -- Fire Protection -- Legislation -- Summary -- 9. Ultrapure Water -- The Need for Ultrapure Water -- Constituents of Raw Water -- Purification Techniques -- RO/DI System Configurations -- Operational Considerations -- Summary -- 10. Production Materials -- Gases -- Wet Chemicals -- Handling Other Materials -- Summary -- 11. Personnel and Contamination -- Apparel -- Use of Apparel -- Work Practices -- Summary -- 12. Safety Issues -- Properties of Hazardous Production Materials -- Cleanroom Safety Practices -- Safety Equipment -- Handling Hazardous Production Materials -- Summary -- 13. The Future of Controlled Environments -- Advanced Cleanroom Concepts -- Enclosed Transfer Systems -- Robotics and Automation -- In-situ Processing -- Epilog-The Cleanroom as a System -- Appendix 1 Federal Standard 209D -- Appendix 2 Simplified Cleanroom Certification Procedure -- Appendix 3 Program and Sample Output.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 60
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401197144
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Representation of Mine Data -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Mine nomenclature -- 1.3 Subdivision of orebodies -- 1.4 Mine sections -- 1.5 Mine plans -- 1.6 Vertical longitudinal projections -- 1.7 Structure contour plans -- 1.8 Connolly diagrams -- 1.9 Dip contour maps -- 1.10 Structural unrolling — Palinspastic maps -- 1.11 2D and 3D block models -- 1.12 3D orebody projections -- 1.13 Histograms and cumulative frequency plots -- 1.14 Rose diagrams -- 1.15 Stereographic projections -- 1.16 Computer software -- 2 Mine Sampling -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Characterization of mineral deposits for sampling purposes -- 2.3 Grade elevation -- 2.4 Possible locations for underground sampling -- 2.5 Channel sampling -- 2.6 Chip sampling -- 2.7 Grab sampling -- 2.8 Percussion/blast-hole sampling -- 2.9 Diamond drill sampling -- 2.10 Prospect sampling -- 2.11 Continuous sampling for open-pit operations -- 2.12 Sampling of unconsolidated surficial deposits -- 2.13 The application of copper-sensitive paints -- 2.14 Grade analysis by fluorescence and spectrometric techniques -- 2.15 Sampling theory -- 2.16 Bulk sampling of gold ores -- 3 Ore-Reserves by ‘Classical Methods’ -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Classification of reserves and resources -- 3.3 Determination of potentially economic intersections -- 3.4 Mine/deposit reserves -- 3.5 Statistical estimators of grade -- 3.6 Ore-reserves by panel/section methods (underground operations) -- 3.7 Ore reserves by triangulation -- 3.8 Ore reserves by polygons -- 3.9 Ore reserves by block matrices -- 3.10 Contour methods -- 3.11 Inverse distance weighting methods (IDW) -- 3.12 Orebody modelling using IDW methods -- Appendix 3.1 USBM/USGS Classification of Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.2 APEO Classification of Reserves -- Appendix 3.3 AIMM/AMIC Classification of Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.4 Coal Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.5 Ore reserve calculation — worked example -- Appendix 3.6 Program listing for SGORE -- 4 Geostatistical Ore-Reserve Estimation -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The application of geostatistics -- 4.3 The theory of regionalized variables -- 4.4 Regularization and orebody subdivision -- 4.5 Production of the semi-variogram -- 4.6 Semi-variogram models -- 4.7 Semi-variogram phenomena in the spherical scheme -- 4.8 Model fitting in the spherical scheme -- 4.9 1D regularization (spherical scheme) -- 4.10 Block reserve estimates by kriging -- 4.11 Global reserve evaluation by kriging -- 4.12 Grade—tonnage curve -- 4.13 Kriging variances and ore-reserve classification -- 4.14 Extension variances in the spherical scheme -- 4.15 Volume—variance relationship -- 4.16 Indicator kriging (IK) -- Appendix 4.1 Determination of confidence limits for log-transformed data -- Appendix 4.2 Worked example — de Wijsian scheme -- Appendix 4.3 Mathematical basis of point kriging -- Appendix 4.4 Mathematical basis of block kriging -- Appendix 4.5 Extension variance graphs and tables for the spherical scheme -- 5 Design and Evaluation of Open-Pit Operations -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Design of open-pit operations -- 5.3 Evaluation of open-pit operations -- 5.4 Economic optimization of pit designs -- 6 Financing and Financial Evaluation of Mining Projects -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Financial aspects unique to mining projects -- 6.3 Capitalization of mining projects -- 6.4 Financial model of a mining project -- 6.5 Financial evaluation techniques -- 7 Grade Control -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Open-pit operations -- 7.3 Underground operations -- 8 Ore-Evaluation Case Histories -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Case history — White Pine Copper Mine, Michigan, USA -- 8.3 Case history — Evaluation of the J-M Pt-Pd Reef, Stillwater, Montana -- 8.4 Case history — East Ore Zone, Teck-Corona Gold Mine, Hemlo Canada -- 8.5 Case history — opencast coal mining in South Wales (R. MacCallum — British Coal) -- 8.6 Case history — Boulby Potash Mine, Cleveland, UK -- 8.7 Case history — exploration and evaluation of a glacial sand and gravel deposit (P. Brewer and P. Morse — Tarmac Roadstone, Northwest Limited) -- 8.8 Case history — limestone aggregates — The Tytherington Limestone Quarries, ARC Ltd -- 8.9 Cement — Cement Quality Limestones at Los Cedros, Venezuela (Blue Circle Industries PLC) -- 8.10 Case history — Navan Zn-Pb Mine, Eire (Tara Mines Ltd).
    Abstract: Although aspects of mineral deposit evaluation advantages and disadvantages of each technique are covered in such texts as McKinstry (1948), so that a judgement can be made as to their Peters (1978), Reedman (1979) and Barnes applicability to a particular deposit and the min­ (1980), no widely available in-depth treatment of ing method proposed or used. Too often, a lack the subject has been presented. It is thus the of this expertise results in the ore-reserve calcula­ intention of the present book to produce a text tion being undertaken at head-office or, indeed, by the survey department on the mine, and being which is suitable for both undergraduate and treated as a 'number crunching' or geometric postgraduate students of mining geology and exercise divorced from geology. It is essential mining engineering and which, at the same time, that mine ore-reserves are calculated at the mine is of use to those already following a professional by those geologists who are most closely associ­ career in the mining industry. An attempt has ated with the local geology and who are thus best been made to present the material in such a way able to influence and/or constrain the calculation.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Representation of Mine Data1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Mine nomenclature -- 1.3 Subdivision of orebodies -- 1.4 Mine sections -- 1.5 Mine plans -- 1.6 Vertical longitudinal projections -- 1.7 Structure contour plans -- 1.8 Connolly diagrams -- 1.9 Dip contour maps -- 1.10 Structural unrolling - Palinspastic maps -- 1.11 2D and 3D block models -- 1.12 3D orebody projections -- 1.13 Histograms and cumulative frequency plots -- 1.14 Rose diagrams -- 1.15 Stereographic projections -- 1.16 Computer software -- 2 Mine Sampling -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Characterization of mineral deposits for sampling purposes -- 2.3 Grade elevation -- 2.4 Possible locations for underground sampling -- 2.5 Channel sampling -- 2.6 Chip sampling -- 2.7 Grab sampling -- 2.8 Percussion/blast-hole sampling -- 2.9 Diamond drill sampling -- 2.10 Prospect sampling -- 2.11 Continuous sampling for open-pit operations -- 2.12 Sampling of unconsolidated surficial deposits -- 2.13 The application of copper-sensitive paints -- 2.14 Grade analysis by fluorescence and spectrometric techniques -- 2.15 Sampling theory -- 2.16 Bulk sampling of gold ores -- 3 Ore-Reserves by ‘Classical Methods’ -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Classification of reserves and resources -- 3.3 Determination of potentially economic intersections -- 3.4 Mine/deposit reserves -- 3.5 Statistical estimators of grade -- 3.6 Ore-reserves by panel/section methods (underground operations) -- 3.7 Ore reserves by triangulation -- 3.8 Ore reserves by polygons -- 3.9 Ore reserves by block matrices -- 3.10 Contour methods -- 3.11 Inverse distance weighting methods (IDW) -- 3.12 Orebody modelling using IDW methods -- Appendix 3.1 USBM/USGS Classification of Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.2 APEO Classification of Reserves -- Appendix 3.3 AIMM/AMIC Classification of Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.4 Coal Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.5 Ore reserve calculation - worked example -- Appendix 3.6 Program listing for SGORE -- 4 Geostatistical Ore-Reserve Estimation -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The application of geostatistics -- 4.3 The theory of regionalized variables -- 4.4 Regularization and orebody subdivision -- 4.5 Production of the semi-variogram -- 4.6 Semi-variogram models -- 4.7 Semi-variogram phenomena in the spherical scheme -- 4.8 Model fitting in the spherical scheme -- 4.9 1D regularization (spherical scheme) -- 4.10 Block reserve estimates by kriging -- 4.11 Global reserve evaluation by kriging -- 4.12 Grade-tonnage curve -- 4.13 Kriging variances and ore-reserve classification -- 4.14 Extension variances in the spherical scheme -- 4.15 Volume-variance relationship -- 4.16 Indicator kriging (IK) -- Appendix 4.1 Determination of confidence limits for log-transformed data -- Appendix 4.2 Worked example - de Wijsian scheme -- Appendix 4.3 Mathematical basis of point kriging -- Appendix 4.4 Mathematical basis of block kriging -- Appendix 4.5 Extension variance graphs and tables for the spherical scheme -- 5 Design and Evaluation of Open-Pit Operations -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Design of open-pit operations -- 5.3 Evaluation of open-pit operations -- 5.4 Economic optimization of pit designs -- 6 Financing and Financial Evaluation of Mining Projects -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Financial aspects unique to mining projects -- 6.3 Capitalization of mining projects -- 6.4 Financial model of a mining project -- 6.5 Financial evaluation techniques -- 7 Grade Control -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Open-pit operations -- 7.3 Underground operations -- 8 Ore-Evaluation Case Histories -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Case history - White Pine Copper Mine, Michigan, USA -- 8.3 Case history - Evaluation of the J-M Pt-Pd Reef, Stillwater, Montana -- 8.4 Case history - East Ore Zone, Teck-Corona Gold Mine, Hemlo Canada -- 8.5 Case history - opencast coal mining in South Wales (R. MacCallum - British Coal) -- 8.6 Case history - Boulby Potash Mine, Cleveland, UK -- 8.7 Case history - exploration and evaluation of a glacial sand and gravel deposit (P. Brewer and P. Morse - Tarmac Roadstone, Northwest Limited) -- 8.8 Case history - limestone aggregates - The Tytherington Limestone Quarries, ARC Ltd -- 8.9 Cement - Cement Quality Limestones at Los Cedros, Venezuela (Blue Circle Industries PLC) -- 8.10 Case history - Navan Zn-Pb Mine, Eire (Tara Mines Ltd).
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 61
    ISBN: 9781461597261
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Stage:Program Planning -- Step 1: Evaluate Neighborhoods -- Step 2: Determine Appropriate Production Model(s) -- Step 3: Determine Potential Producers -- Step 4: Collect Data on Resources -- Step 5: Collect Detailed Neighborhood Data -- Step 6: Adopt Appropriate Production Model(s) -- Step 7: Set Program Construction Standards -- Step 8: Develop Financing Forms and Guidelines -- Step 9: Customize the Inspection Checklist -- Step 10: Customize the Specmaster Database -- Step 11: Develop a Contractor Qualification System -- Step 12: Set Up a Contractor Recruitment and Evaluation System -- Step 13: Select Contract Documents -- Step 14: Develop an Internal Record-Keeping and Tracking System -- Step 15: Develop Formal Program Procedures -- Stage: Design and Feasibility -- Step 16: Perform Specification Inspection -- Step 17: Prepare Work Write-up (With Prices) -- Step 18: Perform a Sources-and-Uses Analysis -- Step 19: Secure Preliminary Project Approval -- Stage: Bidding -- Step 20: Match Potential Bidders to the Job -- Step 21: Prepare Bid Documents -- Step 22: Conduct Bid Review and Clarification -- Step 23: Select and Notify Contractor -- Step 24: Perform Final Sources-and-Uses Analysis -- Step 25: Conduct Pre-Construction Walk-Through -- Step 26: Have Bidder Execute Contract -- Step 27: Have Owner Execute Contract and Financing Agreement -- Stage: Construction -- Step 28: Issue Notice to Proceed -- Step 29: Verify Job Start -- Step 30: Conduct Progress Inspections and Make Payments -- Step 31: Perform Change Order and Contingency Inspections -- Step 32: Conduct Substantial Completion Inspections -- Step 33: Perform Retainage Release Inspection -- Stage: Post-Construction -- Step 34: Fill Out Evaluations -- Step 35: Perform Warranty Inspections -- Addenda.
    Abstract: The procedures in this manual distill six years of learning about the most efficient acquisition and construction methods in this country for high volume production of housing affordable to low-income people. The people in the Rehab Work Group at The Enterprise Foundation have gathered this information first-hand and conveyed it in training workshops on produQtion management throughout the country. Over 2000 participants in the workshops have included rehab specialists from city housing departments, con­ struction managers of single and multifamily rehab projects, program managers from both nonprofit housing development organizations and city rehab depart­ ments, as well as students in colleges and universities. They are becoming the backbone of a new cadre of effective producers of affordable housing. In the 30 cities and several rural areas where we have both learned and applied these production management techniques, they have resulted in savings of 5, 10, even 25 percent of the cost of housing development. The Enterprise Foundation is a national, nonprofit organization that my wife Patty and I launched in 1982. The Foundation's mission is to see that all very low-income Americans have the opportunity for fit and affordable housing within a generation, and work their way up and out of poverty into the main­ stream of American life.
    Description / Table of Contents: Stage:Program PlanningStep 1: Evaluate Neighborhoods -- Step 2: Determine Appropriate Production Model(s) -- Step 3: Determine Potential Producers -- Step 4: Collect Data on Resources -- Step 5: Collect Detailed Neighborhood Data -- Step 6: Adopt Appropriate Production Model(s) -- Step 7: Set Program Construction Standards -- Step 8: Develop Financing Forms and Guidelines -- Step 9: Customize the Inspection Checklist -- Step 10: Customize the Specmaster Database -- Step 11: Develop a Contractor Qualification System -- Step 12: Set Up a Contractor Recruitment and Evaluation System -- Step 13: Select Contract Documents -- Step 14: Develop an Internal Record-Keeping and Tracking System -- Step 15: Develop Formal Program Procedures -- Stage: Design and Feasibility -- Step 16: Perform Specification Inspection -- Step 17: Prepare Work Write-up (With Prices) -- Step 18: Perform a Sources-and-Uses Analysis -- Step 19: Secure Preliminary Project Approval -- Stage: Bidding -- Step 20: Match Potential Bidders to the Job -- Step 21: Prepare Bid Documents -- Step 22: Conduct Bid Review and Clarification -- Step 23: Select and Notify Contractor -- Step 24: Perform Final Sources-and-Uses Analysis -- Step 25: Conduct Pre-Construction Walk-Through -- Step 26: Have Bidder Execute Contract -- Step 27: Have Owner Execute Contract and Financing Agreement -- Stage: Construction -- Step 28: Issue Notice to Proceed -- Step 29: Verify Job Start -- Step 30: Conduct Progress Inspections and Make Payments -- Step 31: Perform Change Order and Contingency Inspections -- Step 32: Conduct Substantial Completion Inspections -- Step 33: Perform Retainage Release Inspection -- Stage: Post-Construction -- Step 34: Fill Out Evaluations -- Step 35: Perform Warranty Inspections -- Addenda.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 62
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401170765
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I. Modeling Consumer Demand for Food Safety and Nutrition -- 1. Consumer Demand for Food and Food Safety: Models and Applications -- 2. Modeling the Effect of Risk on Food Demand and the Implications for Regulation -- 3. A Model of the Demand and Supply of the Health Effects of Food Substances -- II. Application of Risk Assessment Methodology to Food Safety -- 4. Modeling Chronic Versus Acute Human Health Risk from Contaminants in Food -- 5. Conservatism in Risk Assessment and Food Safety Policy -- 6. Risk Assessment for Estimating the Economic Costs of Foodborne Disease Caused by Microorganisms -- 7. An Economic Framework for Assessing Foodbome Disease Control Strategies with an Application to Salmonella Control in Poultry -- III. Measurement of Consumer Response to Safety and Health Information -- 8. The Impact of Health Risk Information on Food Demand: A Case Study of Alar and Apples -- 9. Consumers’ Perceptions of Risks from Pesticide Residues and Demand for Certification of Residue-Free Produce -- 10. Consumer Reaction to the Introduction of Bovine Somatotropin -- 11. Information, Advertising, and Health Choices: A Study of the Cereal Market -- 12. Assessing the Effects of Diet/Health Awareness on the Consumption and Composition of Fat Intake -- IV. Analysis of the Supply of Food Safety -- 13. Firm Strategic Response to Food Safety and Nutrition Regulation -- 14. A Model of Firm Costs of Compliance with Food Labeling Regulations -- 15. An Economic Model of FDA’s Imported Foods Enforcement Program.
    Abstract: Public concern about the safety and healthfulness of the food supply grew markedly during the 1980s. Numerous government, academic, interest group, and media reports questioning the adequacy of the food safety regulatory system formed the basis for this increase in concern. While public concern focused most directly on pesticide residues in food, scientists emphasized the risks of illness associated with microbiological contamination of food. Much additional attention was focused on the food supply as a result of the striking consensus on dietary recommendations that emerged in the late 1980s based on increased scientific knowledge of linkages between diet and health. Relatively little research on the economic aspects of food safety and nutrition issues had been conducted up to the mid-1980s. These aspects are complex. On the consumer demand side, they include consumers' perceptions of the risks associated with particular food products, how demographic characteristics influence consumers' processing of risk information and subsequent changes in food demand behavior, and the monetary value consumers might place on changes in the risk profiles of products. The economic benefits and costs associated with current food consumption patterns are a major determinant of demand for improved food safety and dietary change through government regulation. While a more complete picture of risks, benefits, and costs has been emerging recently, much is yet unknown.
    Description / Table of Contents: I. Modeling Consumer Demand for Food Safety and Nutrition1. Consumer Demand for Food and Food Safety: Models and Applications -- 2. Modeling the Effect of Risk on Food Demand and the Implications for Regulation -- 3. A Model of the Demand and Supply of the Health Effects of Food Substances -- II. Application of Risk Assessment Methodology to Food Safety -- 4. Modeling Chronic Versus Acute Human Health Risk from Contaminants in Food -- 5. Conservatism in Risk Assessment and Food Safety Policy -- 6. Risk Assessment for Estimating the Economic Costs of Foodborne Disease Caused by Microorganisms -- 7. An Economic Framework for Assessing Foodbome Disease Control Strategies with an Application to Salmonella Control in Poultry -- III. Measurement of Consumer Response to Safety and Health Information -- 8. The Impact of Health Risk Information on Food Demand: A Case Study of Alar and Apples -- 9. Consumers’ Perceptions of Risks from Pesticide Residues and Demand for Certification of Residue-Free Produce -- 10. Consumer Reaction to the Introduction of Bovine Somatotropin -- 11. Information, Advertising, and Health Choices: A Study of the Cereal Market -- 12. Assessing the Effects of Diet/Health Awareness on the Consumption and Composition of Fat Intake -- IV. Analysis of the Supply of Food Safety -- 13. Firm Strategic Response to Food Safety and Nutrition Regulation -- 14. A Model of Firm Costs of Compliance with Food Labeling Regulations -- 15. An Economic Model of FDA’s Imported Foods Enforcement Program.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 63
    ISBN: 9789401165358
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1.1 Research Models in Mechanical Problems for Microelectronics and Fiber Optics -- 1.2 Theoretical Modeling -- 1.3 Analytical versus Numerical Modeling -- 1.4 Interaction with Experiment -- 1.5 Theoretical Modeling in Structural Analysis -- 1.6 Historical Sketch -- 1. Basic Principles of Engineering Elasticity -- 1. General Properties of Elastic Bodies -- 2. Equations and Conceptions -- 3. A View of Solution Procedures -- 4. The Elementary Problems -- 5. Strength Theories -- 6. Two-Dimensional Problem in Rectangular Coordinates -- 7. Two-Dimensional Problem in Polar Coordinates -- 8. Torsion -- 9. Fracture Mechanics -- 10. Plasticity -- 11. Viscoelasticity -- Questions and Problems -- 2. Fundamentals of Structural Analysis -- 12. Bending of Beams -- 13. The Variational and Energy Methods, and Some General Principles of Structural Analysis -- 14. Bending of Frames -- 15. Bending of Plates -- 16. Buckling -- 17. Numerical Methods -- 18. Experimental Techniques -- Questions and Problems -- Appendix: Tables of Beam Deflections.
    Abstract: This book contains the fundamentals of a discipline, which could be called Structural Analysis in Microelectronics and Fiber Optics. It deals with mechanical behavior of microelectronic and fiber-optic systems and is written in response to the crucial need for a textbook for a first in-depth course on mechanical problems in microelectronics and fiber optics. The emphasis of this book is on electronic and optical packaging problems, and analytical modeling. This book is apparently the first attempt to select, advance, and present those methods of classical structural mechanics which have been or can be applied in various stress-strain problems encountered in "high technology" engineering and some related areas, such as materials science and solid-state physics. The following major objectives are pursued in Structural Analysis in Microelectronic and Fiber-Optic Systems: Identify structural elements typical for microelectronic and fiber-optic systems and devices, and introduce the student to the basic concepts of the mechanical behavior of microelectronic and fiber-optic struc­ tures, subjected to thermally induced or external loading. Select, advance, and present methods for analyzing stresses and deflections developed in microelectronic and fiber-optic structures; demonstrate the effectiveness of the methods and approaches of the classical struc­ tural analysis in the diverse mechanical problems of microelectronics and fiber optics; and give students of engineering, as well as practicing engineers and designers, a thorough understanding of the main princi­ ples involved in the analytical evaluation of the mechanical behavior of microelectronic and fiber-optic systems.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.1 Research Models in Mechanical Problems for Microelectronics and Fiber Optics1.2 Theoretical Modeling -- 1.3 Analytical versus Numerical Modeling -- 1.4 Interaction with Experiment -- 1.5 Theoretical Modeling in Structural Analysis -- 1.6 Historical Sketch -- 1. Basic Principles of Engineering Elasticity -- 1. General Properties of Elastic Bodies -- 2. Equations and Conceptions -- 3. A View of Solution Procedures -- 4. The Elementary Problems -- 5. Strength Theories -- 6. Two-Dimensional Problem in Rectangular Coordinates -- 7. Two-Dimensional Problem in Polar Coordinates -- 8. Torsion -- 9. Fracture Mechanics -- 10. Plasticity -- 11. Viscoelasticity -- Questions and Problems -- 2. Fundamentals of Structural Analysis -- 12. Bending of Beams -- 13. The Variational and Energy Methods, and Some General Principles of Structural Analysis -- 14. Bending of Frames -- 15. Bending of Plates -- 16. Buckling -- 17. Numerical Methods -- 18. Experimental Techniques -- Questions and Problems -- Appendix: Tables of Beam Deflections.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 64
    ISBN: 9781468464320
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVII, 869 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Overview Section -- Section A: Nitrogenase Biochemistry and Chemical Models -- Section B: Plant-Microbe Interactions -- Section C: Limiting Factors in Nitrogen Fixation -- Section D: Nitrogen Fixation and the Environment -- Section E: Bacterial Systems -- Section F: Nitrogen Fixation in Agriculture and Industry -- Section G: Plant Function -- Section H: Nitrogen Fixation and Evolution -- Section I: Summing up the Congress -- Author Index.
    Abstract: We are witnessing an increased awareness of the earth's environment. Examples are easily seen in the rise of 'Green Parties' across Europe, North America, Australasia, and lately Eastern Europe. The public outcry following industrial mishaps in Alaska, Chernobyl, Basel, and Bhopal, as well as the renewed legislative activity, such as the Clean Air Act in the USA and the European Community directive to member nation concerning the control of release of genetically engineered organisms are further examples of the general interest in the biosphere. The 'Ozone hole', 'Greenhouse gases', and 'Genetically engineered Microorganisms' have gained public profiles, and are discussed widely in newspapers, magazines and the electronic media. A recent educational survey of nations, belonging to the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) showed that school children are more literate with ecological terms (as listed above) than with 'pure' scientific terms, like 'phloem', 'mitosis', 'proton', or 'Jurasic period'. Perhaps the increase in awareness is cyclical, being fed by non-scientific, sociological and economic advances. The late 1960s/early 1970s saw a major increase in environmental consciousness. Anti-pollution groups were founded, healthfood shops and naturopathy became acceptable as did recycling, the use of lead-free gasoline, and the reduced usage of environmental toxins, like DDT and PCB. For example, Monsanto Chemical Company instigated a self-imposed halt to the manufacture of PCB in the mid-seventies. Chemical companies started to look at biodegradable herbicides, slow release fertilizers, and specifically targeted pesticides.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 65
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401131308
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction to the electronics industry -- 1.1 A history of the electronics industry -- 1.2 The electronics market -- 1.3 Electronics manufacturing company structure -- 1.4 Test engineering and quality assurance -- 2 Electronic components -- 2.1 Component interconnection methods -- 2.2 Electronic components -- 2.3 Component packaging -- 2.4 Cabling -- 2.5 Component quality assurance -- 3 Electronic design -- 3.1 Quality and reliability assessment -- 3.2 The product design process -- 3.3 Circuit design -- 3.4 Integrated circuit design -- 3.5 Circuit layout -- 4 Semiconductor device manufacture -- 4.1 Semiconductor materials -- 4.2 Clean room requirements -- 4.3 Silicon wafer manufacture -- 4.4 Photolithography -- 4.5 Layer fabrication processes -- 4.6 Bipolar junction transistor fabrication -- 4.7 Field effect transistor fabrication -- 4.8 Integrated circuit packaging and testing -- 5 Printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.1 Printed circuit board types -- 5.2 Printed circuit board substrate materials -- 5.3 Printed circuit board substrate manufacture -- 5.4 Printed circuit board fabrication procedures -- 5.5 Single-sided printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.6 Double-sided printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.7 Multilayer printed circuit board manufacture -- 6 Printed circuit board assembly -- 6.1 Hand assembly -- 6.2 Automatic component insertion -- 6.3 Assembly-related faults -- 6.4 Soldering techniques -- 6.5 Solder joint inspection and common soldering faults -- 6.6 Cleaning -- 6.7 Testing and reworking -- 7 Surface mount component assembly -- 7.1 Advantages of surface mount components -- 7.2 Surface mount component assembly -- 7.3 Adhesive application -- 7.4 Solder paste application -- 7.5 Component onsertion -- 7.6 Soldering techniques -- 7.7 Mixing surface mount with leaded components -- 7.8 Soldering quality -- 7.9 Testing -- 7.10 Reworking -- 8 Alternative technologies -- 8.1 Hybrid technology -- 8.2 Tape automated bonding -- 8.3 Silicon on silicon wafer-scale integration -- 8.4 Application-specific integrated circuits -- 8.5 Flexible circuits -- References -- Further reading.
    Abstract: The sequence of events which led to the writing of this book started at a seminar on Manufacturing Technology in the Electronics Industry given by the Institution of Production Engineers in 1987. The seminar identified that the field of manufacturing engineering for the electronics industry was effectively missing from the vast majority of production engineering degree courses. The reason for this was that production engineering departments typically spring from mechanical engineering departments. This leads to a mechanical bias in the practical aspects of such courses. The consequence of this was that electronics companies could not recruit graduates with both relevant production engineering and electronic engineering backgrounds. This necessitated either recruiting production engineering graduates and giving them the necessary electronic engineering training, or giving production engineering training to electronic engineering graduates. A consequence of the lack of courses in a subject is that there is also a lack of relevant textbooks in the area, as most textbooks are intended to tie into courses. In the field of manufacturing technology for the electronics industry, existing textbooks tend to be highly specialized and mainly concerned with the fabrication of semiconductor devices.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction to the electronics industry1.1 A history of the electronics industry -- 1.2 The electronics market -- 1.3 Electronics manufacturing company structure -- 1.4 Test engineering and quality assurance -- 2 Electronic components -- 2.1 Component interconnection methods -- 2.2 Electronic components -- 2.3 Component packaging -- 2.4 Cabling -- 2.5 Component quality assurance -- 3 Electronic design -- 3.1 Quality and reliability assessment -- 3.2 The product design process -- 3.3 Circuit design -- 3.4 Integrated circuit design -- 3.5 Circuit layout -- 4 Semiconductor device manufacture -- 4.1 Semiconductor materials -- 4.2 Clean room requirements -- 4.3 Silicon wafer manufacture -- 4.4 Photolithography -- 4.5 Layer fabrication processes -- 4.6 Bipolar junction transistor fabrication -- 4.7 Field effect transistor fabrication -- 4.8 Integrated circuit packaging and testing -- 5 Printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.1 Printed circuit board types -- 5.2 Printed circuit board substrate materials -- 5.3 Printed circuit board substrate manufacture -- 5.4 Printed circuit board fabrication procedures -- 5.5 Single-sided printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.6 Double-sided printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.7 Multilayer printed circuit board manufacture -- 6 Printed circuit board assembly -- 6.1 Hand assembly -- 6.2 Automatic component insertion -- 6.3 Assembly-related faults -- 6.4 Soldering techniques -- 6.5 Solder joint inspection and common soldering faults -- 6.6 Cleaning -- 6.7 Testing and reworking -- 7 Surface mount component assembly -- 7.1 Advantages of surface mount components -- 7.2 Surface mount component assembly -- 7.3 Adhesive application -- 7.4 Solder paste application -- 7.5 Component onsertion -- 7.6 Soldering techniques -- 7.7 Mixing surface mount with leaded components -- 7.8 Soldering quality -- 7.9 Testing -- 7.10 Reworking -- 8 Alternative technologies -- 8.1 Hybrid technology -- 8.2 Tape automated bonding -- 8.3 Silicon on silicon wafer-scale integration -- 8.4 Application-specific integrated circuits -- 8.5 Flexible circuits -- References -- Further reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 66
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401137003
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VI, 473 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- Unit 1 Citrus Juice Characteristics -- 2 Brix and Soluble Solids -- 3 Acids in Citrus Juices -- 4 The Brix/Acid Ratio -- 5 Testing of Fruit Samples -- 6 Citrus Oils, Aromas, and Essences -- 7 Citrus Juice Pulp -- 8 Juice Cloud -- 9 Color of Citrus Juices -- 10 Bitterness in Citrus Juices -- 11 Nutritional Content of Citrus Juices -- 12 Citrus Rheology -- 13 Citrus Processing Varieties -- Unit 2 Citrus Juice Sanitation -- 14 Inspections -- 15 Citrus Microbiology -- 16 Insects, Rodents, and Birds -- 17 Physical and Chemical Contamination -- 18 Processing Contamination -- 19 Juice Adulteration -- Unit 3 Citrus Juice By-Products -- 20 Food-Grade Nonjuice Products -- 21 Animal Feed and Fuel By-Products -- 22 Wastes from Citrus Plants -- Unit 4 Citrus Juice Management -- 23 Quality Control Statistics -- 24 Quality Control Management -- 25 Inventory Management -- Appendix A Acid Corrections to the Brix -- Appendix B GWBASIC and RPG Programs -- Appendix C HP-41C Programmable Calculator Programs -- Appendix D Answers to Select Questions and Problems.
    Abstract: Citrus juices constitute the majority of the fruit juices consumed in the United States and around the world. Along with the rest of the fruit juice industry, they playa major role in the entire food industry as well. In spite of this prominence, few texts have been written on quality control technology; and most of the texts have been written by researchers who may possess great technical skill but generally are less familiar with daily routine quality control problems and con­ cerns than quality control technologists are. On the other hand, quality control technologists and managers generally do not have the time and/or the talent to write books or communicate through scientific literature. The author recognized the need for an updated, comprehensive, and easily understood text on citrus quality control. This text has been designed to be used not only by processors, bottlers, canners, and others involved in the citrus in­ dustry, but it can be of value to instructors and students of citrus technology. Researchers also can find value in the foundations laid down by the text, es­ pecially in regard to the needs and concerns of the processing industry. Also, consultants and marketing personnel will be greatly helped by understanding the concepts of this volume. Persons in related industries also will find many applications that can be easily adapted to their needs.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 IntroductionUnit 1 Citrus Juice Characteristics -- 2 Brix and Soluble Solids -- 3 Acids in Citrus Juices -- 4 The Brix/Acid Ratio -- 5 Testing of Fruit Samples -- 6 Citrus Oils, Aromas, and Essences -- 7 Citrus Juice Pulp -- 8 Juice Cloud -- 9 Color of Citrus Juices -- 10 Bitterness in Citrus Juices -- 11 Nutritional Content of Citrus Juices -- 12 Citrus Rheology -- 13 Citrus Processing Varieties -- Unit 2 Citrus Juice Sanitation -- 14 Inspections -- 15 Citrus Microbiology -- 16 Insects, Rodents, and Birds -- 17 Physical and Chemical Contamination -- 18 Processing Contamination -- 19 Juice Adulteration -- Unit 3 Citrus Juice By-Products -- 20 Food-Grade Nonjuice Products -- 21 Animal Feed and Fuel By-Products -- 22 Wastes from Citrus Plants -- Unit 4 Citrus Juice Management -- 23 Quality Control Statistics -- 24 Quality Control Management -- 25 Inventory Management -- Appendix A Acid Corrections to the Brix -- Appendix B GWBASIC and RPG Programs -- Appendix C HP-41C Programmable Calculator Programs -- Appendix D Answers to Select Questions and Problems.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 67
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401138581
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Reliability -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 What is Reliability? Why Want Reliability? Principles of Achieving Reliability -- 1.3 Quantifying Reliability -- 1.4 The Methods of Systems Reliability Synthesis -- 1.5 Need for Reliability Data -- 2 Principles of Reliability Data Bases -- 2.1 Purposes -- 2.2 Construction -- 2.3 Data Acquisition -- 2.4 Physical Implementation -- 2.5 Development and Operation -- 3 Analysis Methodologies -- 3.1 Restrictions Owing to Data Base Assumptions -- 3.2 Constant Fault-Rate or Failure-Rate Methods -- 3.3 Non-Constant Fault-Rate Methods; The Weibull Distribution -- 3.4 More General Data Structures -- 4 Some Achievements Due to the Development of Data Banks -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The Nuclear Industry -- 4.3 Aircraft Industry -- 4.4 Electronics Industry -- 4.5 Chemical Industry -- 4.6 Data -- 4.7 Computational Considerations -- 4.8 Data Needs or Requirements -- 4.9 Other Factors Worthy of Consideration -- 4.10 Staffing -- 5 Facts: Most Comprehensive Information System For Industrial Safety -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The TNO Organization -- 5.3 Looking Back on the Start of FACTS -- 5.4 Information Handling -- 5.5 Cause Classification -- 5.6 Data Base Structure -- 5.7 Storage of Original Documents -- 5.8 Applications and the Use of FACTS -- 5.9 New Advances in FACTS -- 5.10 Latest Developments -- 5.11 PC-FACTS -- 6 Reliability Data Collection In Process Plants -- 6.1 General Remarks -- 6.2 Data Collection -- 6.3 Data Treatment and Examples -- 6.4 Uncertainty, Applicability and Caution -- 7 The Centralized Reliability Data Organization (Credo); an Advanced Nuclear Reactor Reliability, Availability, and Maintainability Data Bank and Data Analysis Center -- 7.1 The Basis for CREDO -- 7.2 CREDO—An Historical Perspective -- 7.3 Data Initially Identified for Inclusion -- 7.4 CREDO Component Description and Classification -- 7.5 Design of Data Input -- 7.6 CREDO’S Data Base Management System -- 7.7 Statistical Data Analysis and Processing -- 7.8 CREDO Development Experience -- 7.9 Achievements and Future Directions of CREDO -- 8 The Fabrication Reliability Data Analysis System Dante-QC1 -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Concept of the DANTE Code System -- 8.3 Data Base Configuration -- 8.4 Processing Function -- 8.5 Application of DANTE for PIE Data Analysis -- 8.6 Future Directions -- 9 Reliability Data Banks at Electricite De France (EDF) -- 9.1 The Origins -- 9.2 History and Objectives of the EDF Data Banks -- 9.3 SRDF -- 9.4 Conclusion -- 10 IAEA’s Experience In Compiling A Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 IAEA’s Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 10.3 Problem Areas Connected with Generic Data Bases -- 10.4 Conclusion -- Appendix: Data Sources Included in the Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 11 The European Reliability Data System—Erds: Status And Future Developments -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 General Description of ERDS -- 11.3 The Component Event Data Bank (CEDB) -- 12 Development of A Large Data Bank -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The Data Bank System -- 12.3 Student Collection Scheme -- 12.4 The Item Inventory -- 12.5 Coded Storage -- 12.6 Output Data -- 12.7 Generic Reliability Data Output Enquiry and Reply Service -- 12.8 Reliability Improvements -- 13 Reliability Data Banks—Friend, Foe or A Waste of Time? -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 The Personalities -- 13.3 The DataBase Design -- 13.4 The Component Inventory Data -- 13.5 The Component History Data -- 13.6 Dependent Failures -- 13.7 Data Analysis -- 13.8 Pooled Reliability Data -- 13.9 The Successes -- 13.10 Conclusions -- 14 Developments -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Changes in Data Handling -- 14.3 Data Base Software -- 14.4 Methodology and Technology Led Changes -- 14.5 New Data Bases -- 14.6 R & M 2000 -- 14.7 Changes in Attitude -- 15 Overview; Into the Future -- 15.1 Forty Years of Always Being Wrong and Always Being Right -- 15.2 The Next Forty Years -- 15.3 Using External Data Sources and Making Up Data -- 15.4 Justifying a Reliability Data Base.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Reliability1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 What is Reliability? Why Want Reliability? Principles of Achieving Reliability -- 1.3 Quantifying Reliability -- 1.4 The Methods of Systems Reliability Synthesis -- 1.5 Need for Reliability Data -- 2 Principles of Reliability Data Bases -- 2.1 Purposes -- 2.2 Construction -- 2.3 Data Acquisition -- 2.4 Physical Implementation -- 2.5 Development and Operation -- 3 Analysis Methodologies -- 3.1 Restrictions Owing to Data Base Assumptions -- 3.2 Constant Fault-Rate or Failure-Rate Methods -- 3.3 Non-Constant Fault-Rate Methods; The Weibull Distribution -- 3.4 More General Data Structures -- 4 Some Achievements Due to the Development of Data Banks -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The Nuclear Industry -- 4.3 Aircraft Industry -- 4.4 Electronics Industry -- 4.5 Chemical Industry -- 4.6 Data -- 4.7 Computational Considerations -- 4.8 Data Needs or Requirements -- 4.9 Other Factors Worthy of Consideration -- 4.10 Staffing -- 5 Facts: Most Comprehensive Information System For Industrial Safety -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The TNO Organization -- 5.3 Looking Back on the Start of FACTS -- 5.4 Information Handling -- 5.5 Cause Classification -- 5.6 Data Base Structure -- 5.7 Storage of Original Documents -- 5.8 Applications and the Use of FACTS -- 5.9 New Advances in FACTS -- 5.10 Latest Developments -- 5.11 PC-FACTS -- 6 Reliability Data Collection In Process Plants -- 6.1 General Remarks -- 6.2 Data Collection -- 6.3 Data Treatment and Examples -- 6.4 Uncertainty, Applicability and Caution -- 7 The Centralized Reliability Data Organization (Credo); an Advanced Nuclear Reactor Reliability, Availability, and Maintainability Data Bank and Data Analysis Center -- 7.1 The Basis for CREDO -- 7.2 CREDO-An Historical Perspective -- 7.3 Data Initially Identified for Inclusion -- 7.4 CREDO Component Description and Classification -- 7.5 Design of Data Input -- 7.6 CREDO’S Data Base Management System -- 7.7 Statistical Data Analysis and Processing -- 7.8 CREDO Development Experience -- 7.9 Achievements and Future Directions of CREDO -- 8 The Fabrication Reliability Data Analysis System Dante-QC1 -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Concept of the DANTE Code System -- 8.3 Data Base Configuration -- 8.4 Processing Function -- 8.5 Application of DANTE for PIE Data Analysis -- 8.6 Future Directions -- 9 Reliability Data Banks at Electricite De France (EDF) -- 9.1 The Origins -- 9.2 History and Objectives of the EDF Data Banks -- 9.3 SRDF -- 9.4 Conclusion -- 10 IAEA’s Experience In Compiling A Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 IAEA’s Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 10.3 Problem Areas Connected with Generic Data Bases -- 10.4 Conclusion -- Appendix: Data Sources Included in the Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 11 The European Reliability Data System-Erds: Status And Future Developments -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 General Description of ERDS -- 11.3 The Component Event Data Bank (CEDB) -- 12 Development of A Large Data Bank -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The Data Bank System -- 12.3 Student Collection Scheme -- 12.4 The Item Inventory -- 12.5 Coded Storage -- 12.6 Output Data -- 12.7 Generic Reliability Data Output Enquiry and Reply Service -- 12.8 Reliability Improvements -- 13 Reliability Data Banks-Friend, Foe or A Waste of Time? -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 The Personalities -- 13.3 The DataBase Design -- 13.4 The Component Inventory Data -- 13.5 The Component History Data -- 13.6 Dependent Failures -- 13.7 Data Analysis -- 13.8 Pooled Reliability Data -- 13.9 The Successes -- 13.10 Conclusions -- 14 Developments -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Changes in Data Handling -- 14.3 Data Base Software -- 14.4 Methodology and Technology Led Changes -- 14.5 New Data Bases -- 14.6 R & M 2000 -- 14.7 Changes in Attitude -- 15 Overview; Into the Future -- 15.1 Forty Years of Always Being Wrong and Always Being Right -- 15.2 The Next Forty Years -- 15.3 Using External Data Sources and Making Up Data -- 15.4 Justifying a Reliability Data Base.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 68
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131063
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (x, 266 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Botany -- 2 The cultivated hop -- 3 Production methods -- 4 Harvesting -- 5 Pests and diseases: historical review -- 6 Pests -- 7 Fungal diseases -- 8 Virus diseases -- 9 Varieties and breeding -- 10 The hop trade -- References.
    Abstract: It is 25 years since Dr Burgess wrote his invaluable book on hops and in the intervening period there have been very many advances in hop research and hop production techniques. When invited to produce a replacement for that book, therefore, the problem was not finding enough new material but deciding on what to include. People interested in reading about the hop are likely to fall into very diverse categories. Hop growers will be looking for practical advice on production methods while research workers with specialist knowledge in one field may want detailed information about research in other disciplines. In addition, there are many people for whom hops are of much more general interest and for them a source of basic information about the crop will be required. The aim has not been to produce a detailed growers' handbook, since techniques vary considerably from district to district and I believe that it is better to obtain advice from neighbouring growers or from specialist advisers than from any book. What I have attempted is to outline the basic principles upon which production methods should be based. At the same time, I have tried to include material that will be of general interest both to those who work with hops and to those to whom they might otherwise remain a complete mystery. In doing this my own personal interests have inevitably played an important part.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Botany2 The cultivated hop -- 3 Production methods -- 4 Harvesting -- 5 Pests and diseases: historical review -- 6 Pests -- 7 Fungal diseases -- 8 Virus diseases -- 9 Varieties and breeding -- 10 The hop trade -- References.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 69
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131223
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xi, 197 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Getting started -- 2 Passive circuits -- 3 Introducing active devices -- 4 File and analysis features -- 5 Output options -- 6 Multivalued resistors -- 7 Circuit waveforms and frequency response: Nyquist plot -- 8 Linear circuits: square waves and step functions -- 9 Non-linear circuits and waveform shaping -- Appendix A Control codes -- Appendix B HSpice Discrete Components library -- Appendix C Answers.
    Abstract: After many years of teaching circuit theory and analogue electronic circuits the author believes that for most students the main path to obtaining a good understanding of the principles involved, as measured by their ability to apply them in a correct and intelligent manner, is through problem solving and design exercises. In an ideal world the student would be able to construct the circuit being analysed or designed, and so directly test the calculated or pre­ dicted results. Indeed, experience leads to the conclusion that typical students like to see their own circuits perform as intended, with a con­ sequent increase in motivation. At present, however, time and facility constraints mean that most of this work is of the pencil and paper variety, students having few opportunities to see the consequences of their efforts in a practical situation. At best they have to accept sample solutions or simply num­ erical answers. This path can seem tedious to all but the most motivated of students, so an alternative which can provide many of the benefits of direct circuit testing within the time and resources available is of im­ mediate interest. This is where the MINNIE and HSpice simulation package can assist the undergraduate teaching activity.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Getting started2 Passive circuits -- 3 Introducing active devices -- 4 File and analysis features -- 5 Output options -- 6 Multivalued resistors -- 7 Circuit waveforms and frequency response: Nyquist plot -- 8 Linear circuits: square waves and step functions -- 9 Non-linear circuits and waveform shaping -- Appendix A Control codes -- Appendix B HSpice Discrete Components library -- Appendix C Answers.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 70
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131025
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xxiii, 554 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Life-history Strategies -- 1 The life strategies of mites -- 2 Life-history evolution of spider mites -- 3 Life-cycle strategies in unpredictably varying environments: genetic adaptations in a colonizing mite -- 4 The evolutionary transformation of osmotic regulation in the life cycle of freshwater mites (Hydrachnidia) -- 5 Development and life-history strategies in mussel mites (Hydrachnellae: Unionicolidae) -- Two Reproduction -- 6 Spermatology in the Acari: systematic and functional implications -- 7 The distribution, mechanisms and evolutionary significance of parthenogenesis in oribatid mites -- 8 Indirect sperm transfer in prostigmatic mites from a phylogenetic viewpoint -- 9 Spermatophore deposition in relation to atmospheric humidity among terrestrial Parasitengonae (Prostigmata) -- 10 The role of Adlerocystis sp. in the reproduction of argasid ticks -- 11 A scanning electron-microscopy study of spermatogenesis in Pergamasus barbarus Berl. (Gamasida -- 12 Precise sex-ratio control in the pseudo-arrhenotokous phytoseiid mite, Typhlodromus occidentalis Nesbitt -- 13 Sex ratio, fitness and capacity for population increase in Pyemotes tritici (L.-F. and M.) (Pyemotidae) -- 14 Preliminary observations of ovoviviparity in the gallforming mite, Aceria caulobius (Nal.) (Eriophyidea: Eriophyidae) -- 15 Laboratory observations on duration of copulation and egg production of three phytoseiid species fed on pollen -- 16 Precopulatory mate guarding in the spider mite, Tetranychus cinnabarinus (Boisd.) (Tetranychidae) -- Three Diapause, Development and Trophic Relations -- 17 Physiological aspects of diapause in plant-inhabiting mites -- 18 Repeated induction and termination of diapause in the predacious mite, Amblyseius potentillae (Garman) (Phytoseiidae) -- 19 Inheritance of photoperiodic responses controlling diapause in the two-spotted spider mite, Tetranychus urticae Koch -- 20 Some observations on diapause in winter eggs of Panonychus ulmi (Koch) (Tetranychidae) -- 21 Reproduction, embryonic and postembryonic development of Trichouropoda obscurasimilis Hirschmann and Zirngiebl-Nicol 1961 (Anactinotrichida: Uropodina) -- 22 Resource allocation and utilization contrasts in Hypoaspis aculeifer (Can.) and Alliphis halleri (G. and R. Can.) (Mesostigmata) with emphasis on food source -- 23 The influence of different host plants on the reproductive potential of Tyrophagus putrescentiae (Schrank) and Tyrophagus neiswanderi Johnston and Bruce (Acaridae) -- 24 The relationship between house-dust mites and fungi -- 25 How plants maintain body-guards: plant exudate as a food source for phytoseiid mites -- Four Systematic, Morphology, Physiology and Behaviour -- 26 Distribution of characters and phylogenetic age — systematic problems in the higher taxa of the Oribatida -- 27 A new approach to the systematics of the genus Steganacarus (Oribatida) -- 28 The morphology of the immature stages of Phthiracaroidea (Oribatida) -- 29 A new interpretation of the epimeral theory of Grandjean -- 30 A comparison of the sclerotized parts of the reproductive organs of house-dust mites of the genus Dermatophagoides using scanning electron microscopy -- 31 Reproductive systems in Acaridida — some peculiar features -- 32 A respiratory apparatus in eggs of certain mites -- 33 Fine structure and functions of the mouthparts involved in the feeding mechanisms in Cenopalpus pulcher (Canestrini and Fanzago) (Tetranychoidea: Tenuipalpidae) -- 34 The alveolar salivary glands of the active phases of trombiculid mites (Trombiculidae) -- 35 Pigmentation in water mites of the genera Limnochares Latr. and Hydrodroma Koch (Hydrachnidia) -- 36 Biomass studies of water mites of the genera Limnochares Latr. and Hydrodroma Koch (Hydrachnidia) -- 37 The saltatory capacity of an oribatid mite -- 38 Thanatosis or feigning death in mites of the family Scutacaridae -- Five Field Studies and Applied Aspects -- 39 The effects of spider-mite feeding on plant performance in relation to biological control -- 40 Dispersion indices and constant precision sampling programmes for Panonychus ulmi (Koch) and Amblyseius andersoni (Chant) in Spanish apple orchards -- 41 Herbicides and the reproduction of Tetranychus urticae Koch -- 42 Phytoseiid mites associated with vines in Sicilian vineyards -- 43 Studies on mites associated with lucerne in Greece -- 44 Vertical distribution and life stages of oribatid communities on beech trees -- 45 Histiostoma murchiei Hughes and Jackson (Anoetidae) as a parasite in the cocoons of some Danish earthworms -- 46 Rearing deutonymphs of Iphidosoma fimetarium (J. Müller), a mesostigmatic mite associated with carabid beetles -- 47 Mites of the House mouse, Mus musculus L., in the north-eastern part of the Iberian Peninsula in Spain -- 48 Records of Ixodoidea from the Trentino-Alto Adige region in northern Italy -- 49 Seasonal and spatial variation in food intake by the oribatid mites of beech woodland soil -- 50 The effects of ploughing and rotary cultivation on soil mites with particular reference to the Mesostigmata -- 51 The influence of soil cultivation methods on the edaphic fauna, and especially the Gamasina (Mesostigmata), in two southern German vineyards with different cultural treatments -- 52 The density of Tarsonemida in cropped arable soil in relation to fertilizer and crop-protection treatments -- 53 Soil mites and acidification: a comparative study of four forest stands near Heidelberg -- 54 Reactions of mite populations to the influence of environmental chemicals in a beech-wood floor -- 55 Population studies on the house-dust mite. Euroglyphus maynei (Cooreman 1950) (Pyroglyphidae) -- 56 Management of mite development in the home -- 57 An indirect effect of cleaning on house-dust mites. (Dermatophagoides spp.) in carpets -- 58 Astigmatic and prostigmatic mites of grain stores, mills and sawmills in Finland -- Index to plant genera and species -- Index to animal genera and species -- Author index.
    Abstract: During the Inaugural Meeting of the European Association of Acarol­ ogists (EURAAC), held in Amsterdam in 1987, it was decided that the holding of a Symposium at regular intervals should be a major objective. With this in view, it was agreed that Professor Reinhart Schuster, the senior editor, be invited to accept the Presidency of the Association and, arising from that Office, to organize the first Symposium in Austria in 1988. There was strong support for a main theme focused on a particular aspect of acarology. From these discussions there emerged the proposal that emphasis be placed on aspects of reproduction, development and life-history strategies of the Acari. These were topics in the forefront of the discipline with exciting developments of interest not only to acarologists but to a wider audience because of the light they cast on fundamental processes in physiology, ecology and evolutionary biology. The object then was to invite a small number of key workers to present extended papers related to the main theme. There were seven of these all of which appear in the book. The remaining 51 contributions were offered papers a number of which fit within the framework of the Symposium theme.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Life-history Strategies1 The life strategies of mites -- 2 Life-history evolution of spider mites -- 3 Life-cycle strategies in unpredictably varying environments: genetic adaptations in a colonizing mite -- 4 The evolutionary transformation of osmotic regulation in the life cycle of freshwater mites (Hydrachnidia) -- 5 Development and life-history strategies in mussel mites (Hydrachnellae: Unionicolidae) -- Two Reproduction -- 6 Spermatology in the Acari: systematic and functional implications -- 7 The distribution, mechanisms and evolutionary significance of parthenogenesis in oribatid mites -- 8 Indirect sperm transfer in prostigmatic mites from a phylogenetic viewpoint -- 9 Spermatophore deposition in relation to atmospheric humidity among terrestrial Parasitengonae (Prostigmata) -- 10 The role of Adlerocystis sp. in the reproduction of argasid ticks -- 11 A scanning electron-microscopy study of spermatogenesis in Pergamasus barbarus Berl. (Gamasida -- 12 Precise sex-ratio control in the pseudo-arrhenotokous phytoseiid mite, Typhlodromus occidentalis Nesbitt -- 13 Sex ratio, fitness and capacity for population increase in Pyemotes tritici (L.-F. and M.) (Pyemotidae) -- 14 Preliminary observations of ovoviviparity in the gallforming mite, Aceria caulobius (Nal.) (Eriophyidea: Eriophyidae) -- 15 Laboratory observations on duration of copulation and egg production of three phytoseiid species fed on pollen -- 16 Precopulatory mate guarding in the spider mite, Tetranychus cinnabarinus (Boisd.) (Tetranychidae) -- Three Diapause, Development and Trophic Relations -- 17 Physiological aspects of diapause in plant-inhabiting mites -- 18 Repeated induction and termination of diapause in the predacious mite, Amblyseius potentillae (Garman) (Phytoseiidae) -- 19 Inheritance of photoperiodic responses controlling diapause in the two-spotted spider mite, Tetranychus urticae Koch -- 20 Some observations on diapause in winter eggs of Panonychus ulmi (Koch) (Tetranychidae) -- 21 Reproduction, embryonic and postembryonic development of Trichouropoda obscurasimilis Hirschmann and Zirngiebl-Nicol 1961 (Anactinotrichida: Uropodina) -- 22 Resource allocation and utilization contrasts in Hypoaspis aculeifer (Can.) and Alliphis halleri (G. and R. Can.) (Mesostigmata) with emphasis on food source -- 23 The influence of different host plants on the reproductive potential of Tyrophagus putrescentiae (Schrank) and Tyrophagus neiswanderi Johnston and Bruce (Acaridae) -- 24 The relationship between house-dust mites and fungi -- 25 How plants maintain body-guards: plant exudate as a food source for phytoseiid mites -- Four Systematic, Morphology, Physiology and Behaviour -- 26 Distribution of characters and phylogenetic age - systematic problems in the higher taxa of the Oribatida -- 27 A new approach to the systematics of the genus Steganacarus (Oribatida) -- 28 The morphology of the immature stages of Phthiracaroidea (Oribatida) -- 29 A new interpretation of the epimeral theory of Grandjean -- 30 A comparison of the sclerotized parts of the reproductive organs of house-dust mites of the genus Dermatophagoides using scanning electron microscopy -- 31 Reproductive systems in Acaridida - some peculiar features -- 32 A respiratory apparatus in eggs of certain mites -- 33 Fine structure and functions of the mouthparts involved in the feeding mechanisms in Cenopalpus pulcher (Canestrini and Fanzago) (Tetranychoidea: Tenuipalpidae) -- 34 The alveolar salivary glands of the active phases of trombiculid mites (Trombiculidae) -- 35 Pigmentation in water mites of the genera Limnochares Latr. and Hydrodroma Koch (Hydrachnidia) -- 36 Biomass studies of water mites of the genera Limnochares Latr. and Hydrodroma Koch (Hydrachnidia) -- 37 The saltatory capacity of an oribatid mite -- 38 Thanatosis or feigning death in mites of the family Scutacaridae -- Five Field Studies and Applied Aspects -- 39 The effects of spider-mite feeding on plant performance in relation to biological control -- 40 Dispersion indices and constant precision sampling programmes for Panonychus ulmi (Koch) and Amblyseius andersoni (Chant) in Spanish apple orchards -- 41 Herbicides and the reproduction of Tetranychus urticae Koch -- 42 Phytoseiid mites associated with vines in Sicilian vineyards -- 43 Studies on mites associated with lucerne in Greece -- 44 Vertical distribution and life stages of oribatid communities on beech trees -- 45 Histiostoma murchiei Hughes and Jackson (Anoetidae) as a parasite in the cocoons of some Danish earthworms -- 46 Rearing deutonymphs of Iphidosoma fimetarium (J. Müller), a mesostigmatic mite associated with carabid beetles -- 47 Mites of the House mouse, Mus musculus L., in the north-eastern part of the Iberian Peninsula in Spain -- 48 Records of Ixodoidea from the Trentino-Alto Adige region in northern Italy -- 49 Seasonal and spatial variation in food intake by the oribatid mites of beech woodland soil -- 50 The effects of ploughing and rotary cultivation on soil mites with particular reference to the Mesostigmata -- 51 The influence of soil cultivation methods on the edaphic fauna, and especially the Gamasina (Mesostigmata), in two southern German vineyards with different cultural treatments -- 52 The density of Tarsonemida in cropped arable soil in relation to fertilizer and crop-protection treatments -- 53 Soil mites and acidification: a comparative study of four forest stands near Heidelberg -- 54 Reactions of mite populations to the influence of environmental chemicals in a beech-wood floor -- 55 Population studies on the house-dust mite. Euroglyphus maynei (Cooreman 1950) (Pyroglyphidae) -- 56 Management of mite development in the home -- 57 An indirect effect of cleaning on house-dust mites. (Dermatophagoides spp.) in carpets -- 58 Astigmatic and prostigmatic mites of grain stores, mills and sawmills in Finland -- Index to plant genera and species -- Index to animal genera and species -- Author index.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 71
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401179539
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The importance of blood-sucking insects -- 1.1 The importance of blood-sucking insects -- 2 The evolution of the blood-sucking habit -- 2.1 Prolonged close association with vertebrates -- 2.2 Morphological pre-adaptation for piercing -- 3 Feeding preferences of blood-sucking insects -- 3.1 Host choice -- 3.2 Host choice and species complexes -- 4 Location of the host -- 4.1 The behavioural framework of host location -- 4.2 Appetitive searching -- 4.3 Activation and orientation -- 4.4 Attraction -- 4.5 Movement between hosts -- 5 Ingestion of the blood meal -- 5.1 Vertebrate haemostasis -- 5.2 Insect anti-haemostatic factors -- 5.3 Probing stimulants -- 5.4 Phagostimulants -- 5.5 Mouthparts -- 5.6 Blood intake -- 6 Managing the blood meal -- 6.1 Midgut anatomy -- 6.2 The blood meal -- 6.3 Gonotrophic concordance -- 6.4 Nutrition -- 6.5 Host hormones in the blood meal -- 6.6 Partitioning of resources from the blood meal -- 6.7 Autogeny -- 7 Host—insect interactions -- 7.1 Insect distribution on the surface of the host -- 7.2 Morphological specializations for life on the host -- 7.3 Host immune responses to insect salivary secretions -- 7.4 Behavioural defences of the host -- 7.5 Density-dependent effects on feeding success -- 8 Transmission of parasites by blood-sucking insects -- 8.1 Transmission routes -- 8.2 Specificity in vector—parasite relationships -- 8.3 Origin of vector—parasite relationships -- 8.4 Parasite strategies for contacting a vector -- 8.5 Parasite strategies for contacting a host -- 8.6 Vector pathology caused by parasites -- 8.7 Insect defence mechanisms -- 9 The blood-sucking insect groups -- 9.1 Insect classification -- 9.2 Phthiraptera -- 9.3 Hemiptera -- 9.4 Siphonaptera -- 9.5 Diptera -- 9.6 Other groups -- References.
    Abstract: Blood-sucking insects are the vectors of many of the most debilitating parasites of man and his domesticated animals. In addition they are of considerable direct cost to the agricultural industry through losses in milk and meat yields, and through damage to hides and wool, etc. So, not surprisingly, many books of medical and veterinary entomology have been written. Most of these texts are organized taxonomically giving the details of the life-cycles, bionomics, relationship to disease and economic importance of each of the insect groups in turn. I have taken a different approach. This book is topic led and aims to discuss the biological themes which are common in the lives of blood-sucking insects. To do this I have concentrated on those aspects of the biology of these fascinating insects which have been clearly modified in some way to suit the blood-sucking habit. For example, I have discussed feeding and digestion in some detail because feeding on blood presents insects with special problems, but I have not discussed respiration because it is not affected in any particular way by haematophagy. Naturally there is a subjective element in the choice of topics for discussion and the weight given to each. I hope that I have not let my enthusiasm for particular subjects get the better of me on too many occasions and that the subject material achieves an overall balance.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The importance of blood-sucking insects1.1 The importance of blood-sucking insects -- 2 The evolution of the blood-sucking habit -- 2.1 Prolonged close association with vertebrates -- 2.2 Morphological pre-adaptation for piercing -- 3 Feeding preferences of blood-sucking insects -- 3.1 Host choice -- 3.2 Host choice and species complexes -- 4 Location of the host -- 4.1 The behavioural framework of host location -- 4.2 Appetitive searching -- 4.3 Activation and orientation -- 4.4 Attraction -- 4.5 Movement between hosts -- 5 Ingestion of the blood meal -- 5.1 Vertebrate haemostasis -- 5.2 Insect anti-haemostatic factors -- 5.3 Probing stimulants -- 5.4 Phagostimulants -- 5.5 Mouthparts -- 5.6 Blood intake -- 6 Managing the blood meal -- 6.1 Midgut anatomy -- 6.2 The blood meal -- 6.3 Gonotrophic concordance -- 6.4 Nutrition -- 6.5 Host hormones in the blood meal -- 6.6 Partitioning of resources from the blood meal -- 6.7 Autogeny -- 7 Host-insect interactions -- 7.1 Insect distribution on the surface of the host -- 7.2 Morphological specializations for life on the host -- 7.3 Host immune responses to insect salivary secretions -- 7.4 Behavioural defences of the host -- 7.5 Density-dependent effects on feeding success -- 8 Transmission of parasites by blood-sucking insects -- 8.1 Transmission routes -- 8.2 Specificity in vector-parasite relationships -- 8.3 Origin of vector-parasite relationships -- 8.4 Parasite strategies for contacting a vector -- 8.5 Parasite strategies for contacting a host -- 8.6 Vector pathology caused by parasites -- 8.7 Insect defence mechanisms -- 9 The blood-sucking insect groups -- 9.1 Insect classification -- 9.2 Phthiraptera -- 9.3 Hemiptera -- 9.4 Siphonaptera -- 9.5 Diptera -- 9.6 Other groups -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 72
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468465969
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Within the past decade there has been a veritable explosion of interest in the relationship between food and human behavior. It seems that there is an insatiable desire to find connections between what we eat and what we do. A clear example of this is the proliferation of books, magazine and newspaper articles, and television and radio programs devoted to the topic. More important, however, is the increased attention the scientific community is giving to the study of nutrition and behavior as evidenced by the growth of research, the development of undergraduate and graduate programs, and the number of scientific conferences addressing the prob­ lems in this area. The burgeoning scientific interest in this field makes it a very appropriate time for this book. The principal goal of Nutrition and Behavior: New Perspectives is to provide a comprehensive examination of the scientific evidence dealing with relationships between nutritional variables and behavior. Although findings in research using experimental animals will be introduced, the primary emphasis will be on investigating the nutrition-behavior relation­ ship in our own species. The first chapter provides a historical introduction to the area and examines the techniques used in the scientific assessment of nutrition and behavior. This material gives the reader the necessary background to place recent research on nutrition and behavior within a wider perspective and to evaluate its reliability and validity
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. IntroductionHistorical Perspective -- Food Faddism -- Research Strategies -- 2. Protein-Calorie Malnutrition, the Central Nervous System, and Behavior -- Structure and Development of the Central Nervous System -- Definition and Prevalence of Protein-Calorie Malnutrition -- Consequences of Malnutrition on Brain Development -- Behavioral Consequences of Malnutrition -- 3. Vitamins, the Central Nervous System, and Behavior -- Thiamin (Vitamin B1) -- Niacin (Vitamin B3) -- Pyridoxine (Vitamin B6) -- Cobalamin (Vitamin B12) -- Folic Acid -- 4. Trace Minerals, the Central Nervous System, and Behavior -- Iron -- Zinc -- Iodine -- 5. Too Much of a Good Thing? Excess Intake of Vitamins and Minerals -- Megavitamin Therapy -- Treatment of Schizophrenia -- Down’s Syndrome and Other Forms of Mental Retardation -- Effects of Vitamin and Mineral Supplements on Intelligence in Normal Children -- Treatment of Autism -- Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder -- Vitamin B6 (Pyroxidine) in the Treatment of Premenstrual Syndrome -- Vitamin and Mineral Toxicity -- 6. Heavy Metals, Nutrition, and Behavior -- Lead -- Mercury -- Aluminum -- Cadmium -- 7. Food Additives: Are There Behavioral Risks? -- Government Regulations and Food Additives -- Testing of New Food Additives -- Classification of Food Additives -- Food Additives and Behavior -- Monosodium Glutamate -- Sulfites -- 8. Caffeine and the Methylxanthines -- Origins of the Use of Methylxanthines -- Sources and Levels of Intake -- Metabolism of the Methylxanthines -- Physiological Effects -- Neurophysiological and Behavioral Effects -- Therapeutic Uses 160 Caffeine and Disease -- 9. Sugar and Behavior -- Sugar: What is it? -- Sugar Consumption -- Sugar and Hyperactivity -- Sugar, Hypoglycemia, and Behavior -- Sugar and Antisocial Behavior -- 10. Artificial Sweeteners: Do They Live Up to Expectations? -- History and Use of Artificial Sweeteners -- Role in the Control of Food Intake and Body Weight -- 11. Alcohol: Consequences on the Central Nervous System and Behavior -- Metabolism of Alcohol -- Interaction of Alcohol and Nutrition -- Consequences of Alcohol Intake in Adults -- Fetal Alcohol Syndrome -- 12. Diet, Neurotransmitters, and Behavior -- Precursor Control of Neurotransmitter Synthesis -- Acetylcholine -- Serotonin -- 13. Obesity -- Definition -- Prevalence -- Physiological Aspects -- Psychological Consequences -- Etiology -- Treatment -- 14. Eating Disorders -- Anorexia Nervosa -- Bulimia.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 73
    ISBN: 9781468478297
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 Basic Distinctions Between Patents, Copyrights, Trade Secrets, and Trademarks -- Constitutional Basis and Underlying Philosophy for Patents and Copyrights -- Patents -- Design Patents -- Plant Patents -- Plant Variety Protection Act -- Copyrights -- Trade Secrets -- Trademarks and Service Marks -- 3 Jurisdiction for Administering and Enforcing Laws Concerning Intellectual Property -- The United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) and Appeals Therefrom -- United States District Courts and Appeals Therefrom -- US Claims Court and Appeals Therefrom -- International Trade Commission (ITC) and Appeals Therefrom -- Copyright Office -- State Courts -- Laws Related to Patents, Trademarks, and Copyrights -- Resolution of Disputes by Nonlitigation Methods -- 4 Patentability and Inventorship -- Patentability -- What Can Be Patented -- Utility -- Double Patenting -- Novelty and 35 USC § 102 -- Nonobviousness Requirement for Patentability USC § 103 -- Case Law Application of 35 USC § 103 -- Inventorship -- 5 The Patent Application -- Abstract of the Disclosure -- Description Portion of the Specification -- Written Description of the Invention -- Enablement -- Best Mode -- Drawings -- Models -- Claims -- Preamble of the Claim -- Transitional Phrase of the Claim -- Body of the Claim -- Types of Claims -- Doctrine of Equivalents -- Oath or Declaration -- Statutory Invention Registration (SIR) -- 6 Prosecution of Patent Application -- Requirements for Obtaining a Filing Date -- Classification of Application for Examination Purposes -- Initial Substantive Review of Application by Examiner -- Response by Applicant -- Examination of Claims on Their Merits -- Response to Office Action -- Final Rejection of Claims and Response -- Appeal to Board of Patent Appeals and Interferences -- Interferences -- Review by Quality Control -- Notice of Allowance -- Certificates of Correction -- Reissues -- Reexamination -- Intervening Rights -- Protests -- Patent marking -- Types of Related Patent Applications -- 7 Reexamination -- Citation of Prior Art -- Request for Reexamination -- Substantial New Question of Patentability -- The Order to Reexamine -- Reexamination Proceeding -- Some Factors of Concern When Deciding to Reexamine or Whether to Take Some Other Action -- License Agreements and Reexamination -- 8 International Patent Treaties -- Paris Convention of 1883 -- Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) -- European Patents and the European Patent Convention (EPC) -- Organisation Africaine de la Propriété Intellectuelle (OAPI) -- African Regional Industrial Property Organization (ARIPO) -- Inventor’s Certificate -- 9 Trade Secrets and Commercial Considerations -- Trade Secrets -- Maintaining Secrecy -- Protection Afforded by Trade Secrets -- Patent or Keep Secret -- Commercial Considerations -- Restrictions on Exploitation of Patents -- Record Keeping -- Invention Disclosures -- Ownership of Invention -- Invention Incentive Programs -- 10 Searching -- Search Facilities at the United States Patent and Trademark Office -- Searching Organizations -- Reasons for Searching -- 11 Government Patent Policy -- General Considerations -- Small Business and Nonprofit Organizations -- March-In Rights -- Federal Technology Transfer Act -- 12 Trademarks and Service Marks -- Federal Trademark Registrations -- Categories of Terms and Secondary Meaning -- Benefits From Federal Registration -- Likelihood of Confusion -- Trade Names -- Trade Dress -- Searching -- 13 Copyrights and Semiconductor Chip Protection -- Copyrights -- Protection for Semiconductor Chips -- Important Addresses -- Acronyms -- Appendices A-S.
    Abstract: The primary purpose of the first edition of this book was to provide inventors and those who manage technology with sufficient understanding of the patent system to permit them to make use of it with the greatest possible degree of comfort. From the comments that I have received from readers of the first edition, it seems that this purpose was achieved to an appreciable extent. In fact, the audience for the book went beyond this and has been of use to those entering the patent profession and general attorneys who have technology-based clientele. This second edition discusses important changes in the law since the first, including the enactment of new laws as well as new insights into or inter­ pretations of already existing statutes. Along with updating material, I have expanded certain discussions including more examples to illustrate some of the more complex issues covered. In writing this book, I have tried not to lose sight of the underlying philosophy of the patent laws as expressed in ARTICLE 1, SECTION 8 of the United States Constitution: The Congress shall have the power to promote the sciences and useful arts, by securing for limited time to authors and inventors the exclusive right to their respective writings and discoveries. Encouragement of communication between an inventor and the general public is, therefore, the primary purpose and objective of the patent laws.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 Basic Distinctions Between Patents, Copyrights, Trade Secrets, and Trademarks -- Constitutional Basis and Underlying Philosophy for Patents and Copyrights -- Patents -- Design Patents -- Plant Patents -- Plant Variety Protection Act -- Copyrights -- Trade Secrets -- Trademarks and Service Marks -- 3 Jurisdiction for Administering and Enforcing Laws Concerning Intellectual Property -- The United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) and Appeals Therefrom -- United States District Courts and Appeals Therefrom -- US Claims Court and Appeals Therefrom -- International Trade Commission (ITC) and Appeals Therefrom -- Copyright Office -- State Courts -- Laws Related to Patents, Trademarks, and Copyrights -- Resolution of Disputes by Nonlitigation Methods -- 4 Patentability and Inventorship -- Patentability -- What Can Be Patented -- Utility -- Double Patenting -- Novelty and 35 USC § 102 -- Nonobviousness Requirement for Patentability USC § 103 -- Case Law Application of 35 USC § 103 -- Inventorship -- 5 The Patent Application -- Abstract of the Disclosure -- Description Portion of the Specification -- Written Description of the Invention -- Enablement -- Best Mode -- Drawings -- Models -- Claims -- Preamble of the Claim -- Transitional Phrase of the Claim -- Body of the Claim -- Types of Claims -- Doctrine of Equivalents -- Oath or Declaration -- Statutory Invention Registration (SIR) -- 6 Prosecution of Patent Application -- Requirements for Obtaining a Filing Date -- Classification of Application for Examination Purposes -- Initial Substantive Review of Application by Examiner -- Response by Applicant -- Examination of Claims on Their Merits -- Response to Office Action -- Final Rejection of Claims and Response -- Appeal to Board of Patent Appeals and Interferences -- Interferences -- Review by Quality Control -- Notice of Allowance -- Certificates of Correction -- Reissues -- Reexamination -- Intervening Rights -- Protests -- Patent marking -- Types of Related Patent Applications -- 7 Reexamination -- Citation of Prior Art -- Request for Reexamination -- Substantial New Question of Patentability -- The Order to Reexamine -- Reexamination Proceeding -- Some Factors of Concern When Deciding to Reexamine or Whether to Take Some Other Action -- License Agreements and Reexamination -- 8 International Patent Treaties -- Paris Convention of 1883 -- Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) -- European Patents and the European Patent Convention (EPC) -- Organisation Africaine de la Propriété Intellectuelle (OAPI) -- African Regional Industrial Property Organization (ARIPO) -- Inventor’s Certificate -- 9 Trade Secrets and Commercial Considerations -- Trade Secrets -- Maintaining Secrecy -- Protection Afforded by Trade Secrets -- Patent or Keep Secret -- Commercial Considerations -- Restrictions on Exploitation of Patents -- Record Keeping -- Invention Disclosures -- Ownership of Invention -- Invention Incentive Programs -- 10 Searching -- Search Facilities at the United States Patent and Trademark Office -- Searching Organizations -- Reasons for Searching -- 11 Government Patent Policy -- General Considerations -- Small Business and Nonprofit Organizations -- March-In Rights -- Federal Technology Transfer Act -- 12 Trademarks and Service Marks -- Federal Trademark Registrations -- Categories of Terms and Secondary Meaning -- Benefits From Federal Registration -- Likelihood of Confusion -- Trade Names -- Trade Dress -- Searching -- 13 Copyrights and Semiconductor Chip Protection -- Copyrights -- Protection for Semiconductor Chips -- Important Addresses -- Acronyms -- Appendices A-S.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 74
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781475701906
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Physiology of Insect Cold Hardiness -- 1. A Tribute to R. W. Salt -- 2. Principles of Insect Low Temperature Tolerance -- 3. The Water Relations of Overwintering Insects -- 4. Biochemistry of Cryoprotectants -- 5. Hemolymph Proteins Involved in Insect Subzero-Temperature Tolerance: Ice Nucleators and Antifreeze Proteins -- Impact on Development and Survival -- 6. Cold Shock and Heat Shock -- 7. Effects of Cold on Morphogenesis -- 8. Relationship between Cold Hardiness and Diapause -- 9. Thermoperiodism -- Species Adaptations -- 10. Winter Habitats and Ecological Adaptations for Winter Survival -- 11. Freezing Tolerance in the Goldenrod Gall Fly (Eurosta solidaginis) -- 12. Behavioral and Physiological Adaptations to Cold in a Freeze-Tolerant Arctic Insect -- 13. Comparative Invertebrate Cold Hardiness -- 14. Adaptations to Alpine and Polar Environments in Insects and Other Terrestrial Arthropods -- 15. Overwintering of Freshwater Benthic Macroinvertebrates -- Practical Applications -- 16. Cryopreservation of Insect Germplasm: Cells, Tissues, and Organisms -- 17. Cryobiology of Drosophila melanogaster Embryos -- 18. Silkworm Eggs at Low Temperatures: Implications for Sericulture -- 19. Overwintering in Honey Bees: Implications for Apiculture -- 20. Implications of Cold Hardiness for Pest Management -- Taxonomic Index -- Contributors.
    Abstract: The study of insects at low temperature is a comparatively new field. Only recently has insect cryobiology begun to mature, as research moves from a descriptive approach to a search for underlying mechanisms at diverse levels of organization ranging from the gene and cell to ecological and evolutionary relationships. Knowledge of insect responses to low temperature is crucial for understanding the biology of insects living in seasonally varying habitats as well as in polar regions. It is not possible to precisely define low temperature. In the tropics exposure to 10-15°C may induce chill coma or death, whereas some insects in temperate and polar regions remain active and indeed even able to fly at O°C or below. In contrast, for persons interested in cryopreservation, low temperature may mean storage in liquid nitrogen at - 196°C. In the last decade, interest in adaptations of invertebrates to low temperature has risen steadily. In part, this book had its origins in a symposium on this subject that was held at the annual meeting of the Entomological Society of America in Louisville, Kentucky, USA in December, 1988. However, the emergence and growth of this area has also been strongly influenced by an informal group of investigators who met in a series of symposia held in Oslo, Norway in 1982, in Victoria, British Columbia, Canada in 1985 and in Cambridge, England in 1988. Another is scheduled for Binghamton, New York, USA (1990).
    Description / Table of Contents: Physiology of Insect Cold Hardiness1. A Tribute to R. W. Salt -- 2. Principles of Insect Low Temperature Tolerance -- 3. The Water Relations of Overwintering Insects -- 4. Biochemistry of Cryoprotectants -- 5. Hemolymph Proteins Involved in Insect Subzero-Temperature Tolerance: Ice Nucleators and Antifreeze Proteins -- Impact on Development and Survival -- 6. Cold Shock and Heat Shock -- 7. Effects of Cold on Morphogenesis -- 8. Relationship between Cold Hardiness and Diapause -- 9. Thermoperiodism -- Species Adaptations -- 10. Winter Habitats and Ecological Adaptations for Winter Survival -- 11. Freezing Tolerance in the Goldenrod Gall Fly (Eurosta solidaginis) -- 12. Behavioral and Physiological Adaptations to Cold in a Freeze-Tolerant Arctic Insect -- 13. Comparative Invertebrate Cold Hardiness -- 14. Adaptations to Alpine and Polar Environments in Insects and Other Terrestrial Arthropods -- 15. Overwintering of Freshwater Benthic Macroinvertebrates -- Practical Applications -- 16. Cryopreservation of Insect Germplasm: Cells, Tissues, and Organisms -- 17. Cryobiology of Drosophila melanogaster Embryos -- 18. Silkworm Eggs at Low Temperatures: Implications for Sericulture -- 19. Overwintering in Honey Bees: Implications for Apiculture -- 20. Implications of Cold Hardiness for Pest Management -- Taxonomic Index -- Contributors.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 75
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781489927743
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 305 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Mathematics ; Life sciences. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities. ; Science. ; Engineering.
    Abstract: 1. The Number System -- 2. Irrational Numbers, Imaginary Numbers, and Other Curiosities -- 3. From Arithmetic to Algebra -- 4. Graphic Algebra -- 5. The Geometry of Straight Line Figures -- 6. The Geometry of the Circle and Trigonometry -- 7. Analytic Geometry -- 8. The Calculus and Mathematics in Science -- Epilogue.
    Abstract: We have designed and written this book. not as a text nor for the professional mathematician. but for the general reader who is naturally attracted to mathematics as a great intellec­ tual challenge. and for the special reader whose work requires him to have a deeper understanding of mathematics than he acquired in school. Readers in the first group are drawn to mental recreational activities such as chess. bridge. and various types of puzzles. but they generally do not respond enthusiastically to mathematics because of their unhappy learning experiences with it during their school days. The readers in the secondgrouptum to mathematics as a necessity. but with painful resignation and considerable apprehension regarding their abilities to master the branch ofmathematics they need in their work. In either case. the fear of and revulsion to mathematics felt by these readers usually stem from their earlier frustrating encounters with it. vii viii PREFACE This book will show these readers that these fears, frustrations, and general antipathy are unwarranted, for, as stated, it is not a textbook full of long, boring proofs and hundreds of problems, rather it is an intellectual adventure, to be read with pleasure. It was written to be easily accessible and with concern for the mental tranquilityofthe reader who willexperience considerable fulfillment when he/she sees the simplicity of basic mathematics. The emphasis throughout this book is on the clear explanation of mathematical con­ cepts.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 76
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401178495
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Survey of the Existing Analysis Methods -- 1. Introduction to the Injected-Absorbed-Current Method of Analysis -- 2. Elementary Converters Operating at Constant Frequency with Duty Ratio as Controlled Quantity -- 3. General Small-Signal, Low-Frequency Analysis of Switching Regulators -- 4. State-Variables-Averaging Method -- 2. Multiple-Loop Switching Power Cells -- 5. Elementary Switching Power Cells with Inductor Current as Controlled Quantity -- 6. Multiple-Loop Switching Cells Using Inductor Voltage in a Minor Feedback Loop -- 3. Special Configurations -- 7. ?uk and SEPIC Switching Cells -- 8. Analysis of Power Cells with Duty-Ratio Control at Variable Frequency -- 9. Free-Running Hysteretic Regulator -- 4. Applications of Linear Analysis Method -- 10. Interconnection of a Power Source and a Switching Regulator -- 11. Feedforward in Switching Regulators -- 12. Parallel Operation of Switching Regulators -- 5. Selected Analytic Approaches and Applications and Future Advances in Analysis Methods -- 13. Selected Analysis Examples -- 14. High-Frequency Extension of the Linear Cell Model -- Appendixes -- Appendix 1. Additional Information for Chapter 5 -- A1-1 Derivation of Time Delay Between Control and Injected Current for Constant Off Time Current-Mode Control -- A1-2 Control-to-Output Voltage Functions of CurrentMode-Controlled Buck Converter with Three Different Control Methods -- Appendix 2. Graphical-Analytical Representation of Transfer Functions -- A2-1 Introduction -- A2-2 Transfer Functions of Passive Networks -- References -- Appendix 3. Examples and Problems -- A3-1 Introduction -- A3-2 Appendix to Chapter 2—Regulators Employing Elementary Cells, Operating at Constant Switching Frequency, and with Duty Ratio as the Controlled Quantity -- A3-3 Appendix to Chapter 14—Successive Approximations of the Cell Controlled-Quantity-to-Output-Voltage Transfer Function -- Appendix 4. Sources of Technical Information -- A4-1 Conferences -- A4-2 Periodicals -- A4-3 Compendia -- A4-4 Textbooks.
    Abstract: The most critical part of the modern switching-mode power supply is the regulated dc/dc converter. Its dynamic behavior directly determines or influences four of the important characteristics of the power supply: • Stability of the feedback loop • Rejection of input-voltage ripple and the closely-related transient re­ sponse to input-voltage perturbation • Output impedance and the closely-related transient response to load perturbation • Compatibility with the input EMI filter Due to the complexity of the operation of the converter, predicting its dynamic behavior has not been easy. Without accurate prediction, and depending only on building the circuit and tinkering with it until the operation is satisfactory, the engineering cost can easily escalate and schedules can be missed. The situation is not much better when the circuit is built in the computer, using a general-purpose circuit-simulation program such as SPICE. (At the end of this book is a form for obtaining information on a computer program especially well suited for dynamic analysis of switching-mode power converters: DYANA, an acronym for "DYnamic ANAlysis. " DYANA is based on the method given in this book. ) The main goal of this book is to help the power-supply designer in the prediction of the dynamic behavior by providing user-friendly analytical tools, concrete results of already-made analyses, tabulated for easy application by the reader, and examples of how to apply the tools provided in the book.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Survey of the Existing Analysis Methods1. Introduction to the Injected-Absorbed-Current Method of Analysis -- 2. Elementary Converters Operating at Constant Frequency with Duty Ratio as Controlled Quantity -- 3. General Small-Signal, Low-Frequency Analysis of Switching Regulators -- 4. State-Variables-Averaging Method -- 2. Multiple-Loop Switching Power Cells -- 5. Elementary Switching Power Cells with Inductor Current as Controlled Quantity -- 6. Multiple-Loop Switching Cells Using Inductor Voltage in a Minor Feedback Loop -- 3. Special Configurations -- 7. ?uk and SEPIC Switching Cells -- 8. Analysis of Power Cells with Duty-Ratio Control at Variable Frequency -- 9. Free-Running Hysteretic Regulator -- 4. Applications of Linear Analysis Method -- 10. Interconnection of a Power Source and a Switching Regulator -- 11. Feedforward in Switching Regulators -- 12. Parallel Operation of Switching Regulators -- 5. Selected Analytic Approaches and Applications and Future Advances in Analysis Methods -- 13. Selected Analysis Examples -- 14. High-Frequency Extension of the Linear Cell Model -- Appendixes -- Appendix 1. Additional Information for Chapter 5 -- A1-1 Derivation of Time Delay Between Control and Injected Current for Constant Off Time Current-Mode Control -- A1-2 Control-to-Output Voltage Functions of CurrentMode-Controlled Buck Converter with Three Different Control Methods -- Appendix 2. Graphical-Analytical Representation of Transfer Functions -- A2-1 Introduction -- A2-2 Transfer Functions of Passive Networks -- References -- Appendix 3. Examples and Problems -- A3-1 Introduction -- A3-2 Appendix to Chapter 2-Regulators Employing Elementary Cells, Operating at Constant Switching Frequency, and with Duty Ratio as the Controlled Quantity -- A3-3 Appendix to Chapter 14-Successive Approximations of the Cell Controlled-Quantity-to-Output-Voltage Transfer Function -- Appendix 4. Sources of Technical Information -- A4-1 Conferences -- A4-2 Periodicals -- A4-3 Compendia -- A4-4 Textbooks.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 77
    ISBN: 9789400904217
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Cells and Development -- 1 Innervation of teeth: developmental aspects -- 2 Odontoblasts: developmental aspects -- 3 Dental pulp fibroblasts in culture -- 4 Concluding remarks -- Two Anatomical Aspects of the Pulp — Odontoblast and Vascular Architecture -- 5 Role of the odontoblast process -- 6 Change of vascular architecture of dental pulp with growth -- 7 Concluding remarks -- Three Physiological Aspects of the Pulp — Microcirculatory and Sensory Functions -- 8 Intradental sensory units -- 9 Microcirculation: function and regulation in microvasculature -- 10 Haemodynamic regulation of the dental pulp -- 11 Interstitial fluid pressure and transmicrovascular fluid flow -- 12 Concluding remarks -- Four Biochemical Aspects of the Pulp — Enzymes and Matrix -- 13 Enzymes of the glycolytic pathway-phosphofructokinase, pyruvate kinase and lactate dehydrogenase -- 14 Collagenase synthesis by odontoblast-like cells (RP cells) preparation of monoclonal antibodies against RP cell collagenase and characterization of the enzyme -- 15 Dental pulp matrix — collagens and glycoproteins -- 16 Glycosaminoglycans in dental pulp -- 17 Concluding remarks -- Five Neuroregulators — Classic Neurotransmitters -- 18 The adrenergic system and dental pulp -- 19 The cholinergic system and the dental pulp -- 20 Concluding remarks -- Six Neuroregulators — Neuropeptides -- 21 Distribution of peptidergic nerves -- 22 Functions of peptidergic nerves -- 23 Concluding remarks -- Seven Bioactive Substances -- 24 Neurotrophic substances -- 25 Bradykinin and enkephalins -- 26 Prostaglandins and leukotrienes in dental pulp: their possible roles in pulp pathophysiology -- 27 Concluding remarks -- Eight Pathological Aspects of the Pulp and Medication -- 28 Reactions of dental sensory innervation to injury and inflammation -- 29 Proteases in inflammation -- 30 Arachidonic acid metabolism and antiseptics -- 31 Concluding Remarks.
    Abstract: This book presents a circumspective overview and update of the present existing knowledge of the biology, chemistry and pathophysiology of the dental pulp. It details numerous observations of a group of highly specialized investigators who have united in the common purpose of presenting their observations for the benefit of clinicians, teachers, researchers and students. Fortunately, the dental literature presents abundant research findings about pulp biology and the pulp's responses to various stimuli. This abundance has resulted in an increased interest and expansion of research on this subject. For example, publications abound on the response of pulp tissue to various medications and to a variety of types of dental materials which may be placed near to or at some distance from the pulp through the medium of dentine. One of the reasons the pulp is of such interest is that it not only provides the vitality to the teeth but also produces the dentine - both the primary and secondary, as well as reparative. The latter-type dentine is a result of the pulp's functions in response to disease as the former dentine is in response to health. As an example, some investigators have reported the effects of cutting of dentine and the placement of restorations in dentine which in turn reflect changes on the pulp tissue. These reports have raised a number of questions, which in turn have created a need for answers.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Cells and Development1 Innervation of teeth: developmental aspects -- 2 Odontoblasts: developmental aspects -- 3 Dental pulp fibroblasts in culture -- 4 Concluding remarks -- Two Anatomical Aspects of the Pulp - Odontoblast and Vascular Architecture -- 5 Role of the odontoblast process -- 6 Change of vascular architecture of dental pulp with growth -- 7 Concluding remarks -- Three Physiological Aspects of the Pulp - Microcirculatory and Sensory Functions -- 8 Intradental sensory units -- 9 Microcirculation: function and regulation in microvasculature -- 10 Haemodynamic regulation of the dental pulp -- 11 Interstitial fluid pressure and transmicrovascular fluid flow -- 12 Concluding remarks -- Four Biochemical Aspects of the Pulp - Enzymes and Matrix -- 13 Enzymes of the glycolytic pathway-phosphofructokinase, pyruvate kinase and lactate dehydrogenase -- 14 Collagenase synthesis by odontoblast-like cells (RP cells) preparation of monoclonal antibodies against RP cell collagenase and characterization of the enzyme -- 15 Dental pulp matrix - collagens and glycoproteins -- 16 Glycosaminoglycans in dental pulp -- 17 Concluding remarks -- Five Neuroregulators - Classic Neurotransmitters -- 18 The adrenergic system and dental pulp -- 19 The cholinergic system and the dental pulp -- 20 Concluding remarks -- Six Neuroregulators - Neuropeptides -- 21 Distribution of peptidergic nerves -- 22 Functions of peptidergic nerves -- 23 Concluding remarks -- Seven Bioactive Substances -- 24 Neurotrophic substances -- 25 Bradykinin and enkephalins -- 26 Prostaglandins and leukotrienes in dental pulp: their possible roles in pulp pathophysiology -- 27 Concluding remarks -- Eight Pathological Aspects of the Pulp and Medication -- 28 Reactions of dental sensory innervation to injury and inflammation -- 29 Proteases in inflammation -- 30 Arachidonic acid metabolism and antiseptics -- 31 Concluding Remarks.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 78
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400908413
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Software Developments Introduction -- Scientific software in Ada -- Linear algebra support modules for approximation and other software -- Packages for solving almost block diagonal linear systems arising in spline collocation at Gaussian points with monomial basis functions -- Developments in the NAG library software for parabolic equations -- Recent developments in mathematical software at IMSL -- Two Processing Techniques: parallel processing, neural networks, and computer arithmetic Introduction -- Scientific library software for highly parallel computers -- Fortran 8x features and the exploitation of parallelism -- An introduction to neural networks -- Algorithms for the elementary functions in level-index arithmetic -- Three Symbolic and Exact Computation Introduction -- Symbolic algebra systems in teaching and research -- Recent developments in automatic differentiation -- An efficient algorithm for the generation of homogeneous harmonic polynomials -- Four Software Enhancements: computer graphics and expert systems Introduction -- Computer graphics for scientific computing -- What do we mean by expert systems? -- Expert systems for numerical software -- Numerical problem-solving environments — current and future trends -- An advisory expert system for curve and surface fitting.
    Abstract: The main aim of this book is to present a broader view of scientific software than has been common in the past. The provision of scientific software is no longer a matter of just writing 'good computer programs', but rather it is concerned with the development of an integrated software system wI-,ich offers the user facilities which approach all that he needs in terms of speed, accuracy and convenience. This means that due account must, for example, be taken of the high-speed computing capabilities of parallel processors, the exact computing features of symbolic mathematical systems, the presentational potentialities of computer graphics, and the advisory aspects of knowledge-based and expert systems. When suites of numerical software programs or routines are supported by such ranges of facilities, then they can be justly described as 'scientific software systems', and that is why we have adopted such a title here. The assembly of this book was a direct consequence of the running of a one-day international symposium, with the same broad aim of advocating a 'systems approach', under the title 'Scientific Software and Systems'. This Symposium was held at the Royal Military College of Science (RMCS) in Shrivenham on July 11, 1988 and was attended by 85 people. A very busy but most enjoyable day included invited talks, poster presentations and demonstrations of software products, not to mention various social activi­ ties.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Software Developments IntroductionScientific software in Ada -- Linear algebra support modules for approximation and other software -- Packages for solving almost block diagonal linear systems arising in spline collocation at Gaussian points with monomial basis functions -- Developments in the NAG library software for parabolic equations -- Recent developments in mathematical software at IMSL -- Two Processing Techniques: parallel processing, neural networks, and computer arithmetic Introduction -- Scientific library software for highly parallel computers -- Fortran 8x features and the exploitation of parallelism -- An introduction to neural networks -- Algorithms for the elementary functions in level-index arithmetic -- Three Symbolic and Exact Computation Introduction -- Symbolic algebra systems in teaching and research -- Recent developments in automatic differentiation -- An efficient algorithm for the generation of homogeneous harmonic polynomials -- Four Software Enhancements: computer graphics and expert systems Introduction -- Computer graphics for scientific computing -- What do we mean by expert systems? -- Expert systems for numerical software -- Numerical problem-solving environments - current and future trends -- An advisory expert system for curve and surface fitting.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 79
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781475713763
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 454 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Biology of the Channel Catfish -- 1. General Biology -- 2. Life History and Reproductive Biology -- 3. Genetics -- 4. Environmental Requirements -- 5. Nutrition -- 2 Cultural Practices -- 6. Breeding -- 7. Egg and Fry Production -- 8. Fingerling and Food-Fish Production in Ponds -- 9. Water Quality Management In Ponds -- 10. Feeds and Feeding Practices -- 11. Infectious Diseases -- 12. Harvesting and Transporting -- 13. Alternative Culture Systems -- Appendices.
    Abstract: Although catfish have been farmed for about 30 years and catfish farm­ ing is the most successful aquacultural enterprise in the United States, there are those who contend that catfish farming is still as much of an "art" as it is a science. This position is difficult to refute completely, particularly considering that some practices used in catfish farming ap­ pear to have little scientific basis. Skill coupled with a small dose of mysticism certainly playa role in the culture of catfish, and the catfish producer is faced with the unenviable task of rearing an animal in an environment that requires considerable management. Certain aspects may still be an "art" because research and technical information needed to support the industry have lagged behind industry growth; however, the basic principles underlying catfish farming are based on sound scientific evidence whose foundation was laid in the 1950s by work conducted at state and federal fish hatcheries in the southeastern and midwestern United States. Since that time, several university and government laboratories have expanded the scientific base for catfish farming. As a result, considerable information is available, but it is gen­ erally fragmented and exists in a multitude of diverse scientific and trade journals. The material is often too technical or abstract to be com­ prehensible to fish culturists and personnel in allied industries. This book fits the definition of the term handbook in the sense that it is intended as a book of instruction or guidance as well as a reference.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 80
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401138345
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Section 1 Introductory -- 1 General Introduction -- 2 Constitution and Formulation of PVC Materials -- Section 2 Constituents of PVC Compositions -- 3 PVC Polymers -- 4 Stabilisers -- 5 Plasticisers -- 6 Fillers -- 7 Lubricants -- 8 Polymeric Modifiers -- 9 Miscellaneous Additives -- Section 3 Production (Compounding) of Solid PVC Compositions -- 10 Solid (‘Dry’) PVC Compositions -- 11 Compounding: Operations and Equipment -- Section 4 Processing of Solid PVC Compositions into Products -- 12 Main Types of PVC Products and Methods of Their Production -- 13 Extrusion -- 14 Calendering -- 15 Blow Moulding -- 16 Injection Moulding -- 17 Other Processes -- Section 5 Liquid PVC Compositions: Nature, Preparation, Processing, and Applications -- 18 PVC Pastes -- 19 Solutions -- 20 PVC Latices -- Section 6 Post-production Processing of PVC Products -- 21 Fabrication, Conversion and Related Processing of PYC Sheet and Parts -- 22 External Treatments of PVC Products -- Section 7 Applications of PVC Products, and Some Important Application-Related Properties -- 23 Miscellaneous PVC Products and Their Applications -- 24 PVC Properties of Special Significance in Some Important Usage Contexts -- Appendix 1 Some Material Properties of PVC Products and Compounds -- Appendix 2 Quantities and Units: The SI System: Unit Conversion Tables -- Appendix 3 Abbreviations (Letter Symbols) Used in This Book for Some Polymers, Their Derivative Plastics, and Certain Monomers.
    Abstract: This book originated from my Publisher's request for anew, concise account of PVC plastics in terms of their nature, properties, process­ ing, and applications. There is thus, inevitably, an extensive thematic overlap with my-still relatively recent-PVC Technology (4th edi­ tion), and I have drawn liberally on that source for a substantial amount of relevant basic material. However, the present book is by no means merely an abridgement of the earlier one: whilst indeed considerably shorter, it is not only comparable in scope and general coverage of the subject, but also contains much new information. I have made a point of again strongly featuring the numerous standards relevant-and in many cases cardinal-to the testing and characterisa­ tion of PVC materials and products, and to the evaluation of their properties and performance: these standards are an indispensable part of the technology of PVC plastics, and nobody concerned with any aspect of this complex subject should fail to recognise that fact. It is ever a pleasure to express appreciation and thanks where they are due. I am grateful to Dipl-Ing. H. E. Luben of Brabender OHG, Duisburg, FRG, not only for the up-to-date information he provided on Brabender equipment, but also most particularly for his exception­ ally friendly, helpful attitude in all our contacts, and for the trouble he took to make some illustrations and figures available in the form convenient for direct reproduction.
    Description / Table of Contents: Section 1 Introductory1 General Introduction -- 2 Constitution and Formulation of PVC Materials -- Section 2 Constituents of PVC Compositions -- 3 PVC Polymers -- 4 Stabilisers -- 5 Plasticisers -- 6 Fillers -- 7 Lubricants -- 8 Polymeric Modifiers -- 9 Miscellaneous Additives -- Section 3 Production (Compounding) of Solid PVC Compositions -- 10 Solid (‘Dry’) PVC Compositions -- 11 Compounding: Operations and Equipment -- Section 4 Processing of Solid PVC Compositions into Products -- 12 Main Types of PVC Products and Methods of Their Production -- 13 Extrusion -- 14 Calendering -- 15 Blow Moulding -- 16 Injection Moulding -- 17 Other Processes -- Section 5 Liquid PVC Compositions: Nature, Preparation, Processing, and Applications -- 18 PVC Pastes -- 19 Solutions -- 20 PVC Latices -- Section 6 Post-production Processing of PVC Products -- 21 Fabrication, Conversion and Related Processing of PYC Sheet and Parts -- 22 External Treatments of PVC Products -- Section 7 Applications of PVC Products, and Some Important Application-Related Properties -- 23 Miscellaneous PVC Products and Their Applications -- 24 PVC Properties of Special Significance in Some Important Usage Contexts -- Appendix 1 Some Material Properties of PVC Products and Compounds -- Appendix 2 Quantities and Units: The SI System: Unit Conversion Tables -- Appendix 3 Abbreviations (Letter Symbols) Used in This Book for Some Polymers, Their Derivative Plastics, and Certain Monomers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 81
    ISBN: 9781475720853
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXXVI, 2062 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 82
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401197717
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Preservation -- Nutrition -- 1 General Classification of Yeast -- Classification -- Impact of Recent Taxonomic Revision on Industry -- Yeasts of Economic Importance -- Culture Collection -- 2 Yeast Genetics -- Life Cycle -- Techniques Applicable to Yeast Strain Development -- Baker’s Yeast -- Brewer’s Yeast -- 3 Brewer’s Yeast -- General Characteristics of Yeast -- Yeast Characteristics Important for Brewing -- Brewing Process -- Brewery Contaminants -- Biochemistry of Brewing -- Recent Developments -- 4 Wine Yeasts -- Ecology -- Terminology -- Natural Yeasts and Their Occurrence on Grapes and in Musts -- Natural Fermentations -- Description of Species -- Selected Pure Culture Yeasts and Active Dry Wine Yeasts -- Preparation of Starter Cultures -- Biochemistry of Wine Fermentation165 -- The Killer Factor184 -- By-products of the Alcoholic Fermentation and Aroma Compounds -- Microbiological Reduction of Acids193 -- Genetic Manipulation of Wine Yeasts198 -- Microbial Spoilage of Wines199 -- B?otrytis cineria 201 -- Biogenic Amines and Ethyl Carbamate202 -- Technology of Wine Making204 -- Further Readings -- 5 Distiller’s Yeasts -- Whisky227 -- Distillates from Sugar-Containing Raw Materials238 -- Characteristics and Strains of Distiller’s Yeasts242 -- Flavor Compounds248 -- Fermentation Alcohol as Fuel252 -- Further Readings -- 6 Baker’s Yeast Production -- Manufacturing Process Outline262 -- Strains263 -- Principles of Aerobic Growth264 -- Raw Materials271 -- Environmental Parameters280 -- Practice of Aerobic Growth284 -- Further Readings -- 7 Use of Yeast in Baking -- Function of Yeast in Baking316 -- Bread Flavor334 -- White Pan Bread Technology336 -- Active Dry Yeast -- Further Readings -- 8 Yeast-Derived Products -- Flavor Products and Flavor Enhancers370 -- Nutritional Yeast385 -- Colorants Derived from Yeast390 -- Yeast-Derived Enzymes393 -- Products of Pharmaceutical and Cosmetic Value, -- 9 Food and Feed Yeast -- Composition415 -- Use of Yeast as a Major Protein Source424 -- Production of Biomass426 -- Further Readings -- 10 Use of Yeasts in the Dairy Industry -- Cheese441 -- Lactose-free Milk441 -- Acidophilus-Yeast Milk442 -- Kefir442 -- Koumiss444 -- Desugaring of Eggs.
    Abstract: Yeasts are the active agents responsible for three of our most important foods - bread, wine, and beer - and for the almost universally used mind/ personality-altering drug, ethanol. Anthropologists have suggested that it was the production of ethanol that motivated primitive people to settle down and become farmers. The Earth is thought to be about 4. 5 billion years old. Fossil microorganisms have been found in Earth rock 3. 3 to 3. 5 billion years old. Microbes have been on Earth for that length of time carrying out their principal task of recycling organic matter as they still do today. Yeasts have most likely been on Earth for at least 2 billion years before humans arrived, and they playa key role in the conversion of sugars to alcohol and carbon dioxide. Early humans had no concept of either microorganisms or fermentation, yet the earliest historical records indicate that by 6000 B. C. they knew how to make bread, beer, and wine. Earliest humans were foragers who col­ lected and ate leaves, tubers, fruits, berries, nuts, and cereal seeds most of the day much as apes do today in the wild. Crushed fruits readily undergo natural fermentation by indigenous yeasts, and moist seeds germinate and develop amylases that produce fermentable sugars. Honey, the first con­ centrated sweet known to humans, also spontaneously ferments to alcohol if it is by chance diluted with rainwater. Thus, yeasts and other microbes have had a long history of 2 to 3.
    Description / Table of Contents: PreservationNutrition -- 1 General Classification of Yeast -- Classification -- Impact of Recent Taxonomic Revision on Industry -- Yeasts of Economic Importance -- Culture Collection -- 2 Yeast Genetics -- Life Cycle -- Techniques Applicable to Yeast Strain Development -- Baker’s Yeast -- Brewer’s Yeast -- 3 Brewer’s Yeast -- General Characteristics of Yeast -- Yeast Characteristics Important for Brewing -- Brewing Process -- Brewery Contaminants -- Biochemistry of Brewing -- Recent Developments -- 4 Wine Yeasts -- Ecology -- Terminology -- Natural Yeasts and Their Occurrence on Grapes and in Musts -- Natural Fermentations -- Description of Species -- Selected Pure Culture Yeasts and Active Dry Wine Yeasts -- Preparation of Starter Cultures -- Biochemistry of Wine Fermentation165 -- The Killer Factor184 -- By-products of the Alcoholic Fermentation and Aroma Compounds -- Microbiological Reduction of Acids193 -- Genetic Manipulation of Wine Yeasts198 -- Microbial Spoilage of Wines199 -- B?otrytis cineria 201 -- Biogenic Amines and Ethyl Carbamate202 -- Technology of Wine Making204 -- Further Readings -- 5 Distiller’s Yeasts -- Whisky227 -- Distillates from Sugar-Containing Raw Materials238 -- Characteristics and Strains of Distiller’s Yeasts242 -- Flavor Compounds248 -- Fermentation Alcohol as Fuel252 -- Further Readings -- 6 Baker’s Yeast Production -- Manufacturing Process Outline262 -- Strains263 -- Principles of Aerobic Growth264 -- Raw Materials271 -- Environmental Parameters280 -- Practice of Aerobic Growth284 -- Further Readings -- 7 Use of Yeast in Baking -- Function of Yeast in Baking316 -- Bread Flavor334 -- White Pan Bread Technology336 -- Active Dry Yeast -- Further Readings -- 8 Yeast-Derived Products -- Flavor Products and Flavor Enhancers370 -- Nutritional Yeast385 -- Colorants Derived from Yeast390 -- Yeast-Derived Enzymes393 -- Products of Pharmaceutical and Cosmetic Value, -- 9 Food and Feed Yeast -- Composition415 -- Use of Yeast as a Major Protein Source424 -- Production of Biomass426 -- Further Readings -- 10 Use of Yeasts in the Dairy Industry -- Cheese441 -- Lactose-free Milk441 -- Acidophilus-Yeast Milk442 -- Kefir442 -- Koumiss444 -- Desugaring of Eggs.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 83
    ISBN: 9781468489385
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Molecular and Ionic Mechanisms of Chemoreception and Chemotransduction -- 2. Arterial Chemoreceptors – Biochemistry and Electrophysiology -- 3. Arterial Chemo0Receptors in Physiological and Experimental Conditions -- 4. Arterial Chemoreceptors –Reflex Mechanisms in Exercise and Hypoxia -- 5. Almitrine and Arterial Chemoreflexes -- 6. Central Neuronal Organization of Arterial Chemoreceptor Reflexes -- 7. Arterial Chemoreflexes in Pathological Conditions.
    Abstract: This volume records the papers presented in Warsaw on the meeting of the International Society of Arterial Chemoreception (LS. A. C. ) organized as a Satellite Symposium of the XXXI International Congress of the Union of Physiological Sciences (I. U. P. S. ) in Helsinki in July 1989. It is a 30 years old tradition to hold periodically international meetings on recent developments in chemoreceptor research and to exchange information between those of us interested in chemoreception. The first meeting was organized by B. B. Lloyd in Oxford in 1959. Later on, similar international meetings were held at irregular intervals. In 1966, R. W. Torrance organized the second meeting again in Oxford. In 1973, the third meeting was organized in Bristol (U. K. ) by M. J. Purves. In 1974, a fourth meeting combined with the XXVI I. U. P. S. Congress in Delhi was organized by A. S. Paintal in Srinagar (Kashmir, India). In 1976, H. Acker organized the fifth meeting in Dortmund (F. R. G. ), and in 1979, C. Belmonte in Valla­ dolid (Spain) organized the sixth international meeting commemorating the 50th anniversary of Fernando de Castro publishing his classical work on the structure and possible function of the carotid body. In 1982, the seventh meeting was due to D. J. Pallot in Leicester (U. K. ), in 1985 - the eighth one due to A. J.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Molecular and Ionic Mechanisms of Chemoreception and Chemotransduction2. Arterial Chemoreceptors - Biochemistry and Electrophysiology -- 3. Arterial Chemo0Receptors in Physiological and Experimental Conditions -- 4. Arterial Chemoreceptors -Reflex Mechanisms in Exercise and Hypoxia -- 5. Almitrine and Arterial Chemoreflexes -- 6. Central Neuronal Organization of Arterial Chemoreceptor Reflexes -- 7. Arterial Chemoreflexes in Pathological Conditions.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 84
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781461569022
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXXVIII, 1378 p) , online resource
    Edition: Third Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: A -- B -- C -- D -- E -- F -- G -- H -- I -- K -- L -- M -- N -- O -- P -- Q -- R -- S -- T -- U -- V -- W -- X.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 85
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400907478
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction to the Photo-oxidative Degradation Mechanisms of Polymers -- 1.1 Definitions of Photostability of Polymeric Materials -- 1.2 General Mechanism of Polymer Photo-oxidation -- 1.3 Photoinitiation of Polymer Degradation -- 1.4 Chain Propagation -- 1.5 Chain Branching -- 1.6 Photo-reactions of Carbonyl Groups -- 1.7 Hydrogen Abstraction -- 1.8 Photodecomposition of Hydroperoxide Groups -- 1.9 Formation of Acids and Peracids -- 1.10 Formation of Unsaturated Groups -- 1.11 Termination Reactions -- 1.12 Phenyl Ring Opening Photo-reactions -- 1.13 Kinetics of Photo-oxidative Degradation of Polymers -- 1.14 Role of Polymer Morphology in Photo-oxidation -- 1.15 Role of Polymer Manufacturing -- 1.16 Role of Metals or Metallic Compounds in Thermal and/or Photo-oxidative Degradation of Polymers -- 1.17 Role of Processing in Thermal Oxidation of Polymers -- 1.18 Mechanisms Involved in the Photolysis of the Thermally Oxidized Polyolefins During Processing -- 1.19 Physical Processes in the Photo-oxidation of Polymers -- 2 Introduction to the Oxidative and Photo- stabilization of Polymers -- 2.1 Antioxidants -- 2.2 Photostabilizers -- 2.3 Stabilizers in a Polymer Matrix -- 2.4 Distribution of Stabilizers in a Polymer Matrix -- 2.5 Quenchers -- 2.6 Singlet Oxygen Deactivators -- 2.7 Photostability of Additives -- 2.8 Synergism and Antagonism between Additives -- 3 Antioxidants -- 3.1 Hindered Phenols -- 3.2 Hydroxygalvinol/Galvinoxy Radical System -- 3.3 Phenolic Sulphides -- 3.4 Monosulphides -- 3.5 Thiophenols and Dithiobisphenols -- 3.6 Sulphoxides and Sulphones -- 3.7 Synergistic Effects between Hindered Phenols and Sulphur- Containing Compounds -- 3.8 Dixanthogens and Thiophosphoryl Disulphides -- 3.9 Metal Dithiolates as Antioxidants -- 3.10 4-Alkyl-2-mercaptothiazolines -- 3.11 Sulphur Dioxide Role in Antioxidizing Systems -- 3.12 Role of the Antioxidant Structure in Stabilization Processes -- 3.13 Oven Ageing Antioxidant Performance -- 3.14 Polyquinones as Antioxidants -- 3.15 Lignin Derivatives as Stabilizers -- 3.16 Organophosphorus Antioxidants -- 3.17 Pentaerythrityl Diphosphites -- 3.18 Organoboron Antioxidants -- 3.19 Macrocyclic Ligands -- 3.20 Aromatic Amine Antioxidants -- 3.21 Nitroso Compounds and Nitrones -- 3.22 Antioxidant Properties of Nitrosoamines -- 3.23 Antioxidant Properties of Antistatic Agents (Tensides) -- 4 Pigments -- 4.1 Photostabilizing Properties of Pigments -- 4.2 Titanium Dioxide -- 4.3 Zinc Oxide -- 4.4 Metal Salts Coatings -- 4.5 Carbon Black -- 5 Photostabilizers -- 5.1 Alkyl-Substituted p-Hydroxybenzoates -- 5.2 Phenyl Esters of Benzoic Acid -- 5.3 Salicylanilides and Oxanilides -- 5.4 Diketones -- 5.5 Benzylidene Malonate -- 5.6 Esters of ?-Cyano-?-phenylcinnamic Acid -- 5.7 Hydroxybenzophenones -- 5.8 Chromanone and Tetralone Photostabilizers -- 5.9 Hydroxybenzotriazoles -- 5.10 Organic Metal Photostabilizers -- 5.11 Metal Stearates -- 5.12 Metal Salts of Organic Acids -- 5.13 Metal Oxime Chelates -- 5.14 Nickel(II) Mono-oxime (Hydrazone) Chelates -- 5.15 Metal Salicylate Chelates -- 5.16 Nickel(II) Bis(stilbene dithiolate) Chelates -- 5.17 Pyrazole Chelates -- 5.18 Nickel(II) Thiopicoline Anilide Chelate -- 5.19 Nickel(II) 2,2?-Thiobis(4-tert.-octylphenolato)-n-butylamine -- 5.20 Nickel(II) Bis(o-butyl-3,5-di-tert.-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-phosphonate -- 5.21 Metal Dithiolates as Photostabilizers -- 5.22 Metal Chelates as Pro-oxidants and Photoinitiators -- 5.23 Dithiocarbamate Iron Complex Acting as Photoinitiator of Polymer Degradation -- 5.24 Metal Acetylacetonates -- 5.25 Metal Deactivators -- 5.26 Organotellurium Compounds as Photostabilizers -- 6 Hindered Amine Light Stabilizers (HALS) -- 6.1 Mechanisms of HALS Reactions -- 6.2 Mechanisms of Nitroxy Radical Reactions -- 6.3 Transformations of Hindered Amines and Nitroxy Radicals During Processing of Polymers -- 6.4 Stabilizing Properties of HALS in Commercial Polymers -- 6.5 Synergistic/Antagonistic Effects of HALS with Other Additives -- 6.6 Novel HALS -- 7 Polymer-Bound Additives -- 7.1 Properties of Polymer-Bound Additives -- 7.2 Polymeric Antioxidants -- 7.3 Polymeric Photostabilizers -- 7.4 Hindered Amine (HALS) Monomers and Polymers -- 7.5 Polymers with Hindered N-oxy Group in the Main Chain -- 8 Industrial Aspects of Polymer Stabilization -- 8.1 Industrial Methods of Incorporating Additives -- 8.2 Toxicity of Photostabilizers -- 8.3 ‘World Index of Polyolefine Stabilizers’ -- 8.4 Industrial Application of Antioxidants -- 8.5 Photostabilization of Low-Density Polyethylene for Agricultural Applications -- 8.6 Commercially Produced Polymeric HALS -- 8.7 Photostabilization of Polypropylene Tapes and Fibres -- 8.8 Photostabilization of Rubber-Modified Plastics -- 8.9 Photostabilization of Poly(vinyl chloride) by Surface Photografting -- 8.10 Photostabilization of Coatings -- 8.11 Additives in a Space Environment -- 9 Experimental Methods in Polymer Degradation and Stabilization -- 9.1 Preparation of a Test Specimen -- 9.2 Determination of the Additive Content after Polymer Photo-oxidative Degradation -- 9.3 Quantitative Determination of Antioxidants -- 9.4 Determination of Effectiveness of Antioxidants -- 9.5 Measurement of Evaporation of Additives from Polymer Samples -- 9.6 Absorption Spectroscopy -- 9.7 Chemiluminescence Measurements -- 9.8 Photoacoustic Spectroscopy -- 9.9 Electron Spin Resonance Spectroscopy -- 9.10 Electron Spectroscopy for Chemical Analysis (ESCA) -- 9.11 Analytical Methods for the Determination of Hydroperoxide Groups -- 9.12 Studies of the Kinetics of Oxidation by Oxygen Uptake Measurements -- 9.13 Determination of the Quenching of Singlet Oxygen -- 9.14 Radioactive Labelling Techniques -- 9.15 Viscosity Measurements -- 9.16 Determination of Chain Scission -- 9.17 The Gloss Loss Test -- 9.18 Testing Methods of Thermo-oxidative Degradation and Stability of Polymers and Plastics -- 9.19 Mechanical Testing of Polymer (Plastic) Samples -- 9.20 Testing of Weathering in Polymers -- 9.21 Computer Modelling of Photo-oxidation and Photostabilization -- References -- Appendices.
    Abstract: During the last two decades, the production of polymers and plastics has been increasing rapidly. In spite of developing new polymers and polymeric materials, only 40-60 are used commercially on a large scale. It has been estimated that half of the annual production of polymers is employed outdoors. Increasing the stability of polymers and plastics towards heat, light, atmospheric oxygen and other environmental agents and weathering conditions has always been a very important problem. The photochemical instability of most of polymers limits them to outdoor application, where they are photo­ degraded fast over periods ranging from months to a few years. To the despair of technologists and consumers alike, photodegrada­ tion and environmental ageing of polymers occur much faster than can be expected from knowledge collected in laboratories. In many cases, improved methods of preparation and purification of both monomers and polymers yield products of better quality and higher resistance to heat and light. However, without stabilization of polymers by applica­ tion of antioxidants (to decrease thermal oxidative degradation) and photostabilizers (to decrease photo-oxidative degradation) it would be impossible to employ polymers and plastics in everyday use.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction to the Photo-oxidative Degradation Mechanisms of Polymers1.1 Definitions of Photostability of Polymeric Materials -- 1.2 General Mechanism of Polymer Photo-oxidation -- 1.3 Photoinitiation of Polymer Degradation -- 1.4 Chain Propagation -- 1.5 Chain Branching -- 1.6 Photo-reactions of Carbonyl Groups -- 1.7 Hydrogen Abstraction -- 1.8 Photodecomposition of Hydroperoxide Groups -- 1.9 Formation of Acids and Peracids -- 1.10 Formation of Unsaturated Groups -- 1.11 Termination Reactions -- 1.12 Phenyl Ring Opening Photo-reactions -- 1.13 Kinetics of Photo-oxidative Degradation of Polymers -- 1.14 Role of Polymer Morphology in Photo-oxidation -- 1.15 Role of Polymer Manufacturing -- 1.16 Role of Metals or Metallic Compounds in Thermal and/or Photo-oxidative Degradation of Polymers -- 1.17 Role of Processing in Thermal Oxidation of Polymers -- 1.18 Mechanisms Involved in the Photolysis of the Thermally Oxidized Polyolefins During Processing -- 1.19 Physical Processes in the Photo-oxidation of Polymers -- 2 Introduction to the Oxidative and Photo- stabilization of Polymers -- 2.1 Antioxidants -- 2.2 Photostabilizers -- 2.3 Stabilizers in a Polymer Matrix -- 2.4 Distribution of Stabilizers in a Polymer Matrix -- 2.5 Quenchers -- 2.6 Singlet Oxygen Deactivators -- 2.7 Photostability of Additives -- 2.8 Synergism and Antagonism between Additives -- 3 Antioxidants -- 3.1 Hindered Phenols -- 3.2 Hydroxygalvinol/Galvinoxy Radical System -- 3.3 Phenolic Sulphides -- 3.4 Monosulphides -- 3.5 Thiophenols and Dithiobisphenols -- 3.6 Sulphoxides and Sulphones -- 3.7 Synergistic Effects between Hindered Phenols and Sulphur- Containing Compounds -- 3.8 Dixanthogens and Thiophosphoryl Disulphides -- 3.9 Metal Dithiolates as Antioxidants -- 3.10 4-Alkyl-2-mercaptothiazolines -- 3.11 Sulphur Dioxide Role in Antioxidizing Systems -- 3.12 Role of the Antioxidant Structure in Stabilization Processes -- 3.13 Oven Ageing Antioxidant Performance -- 3.14 Polyquinones as Antioxidants -- 3.15 Lignin Derivatives as Stabilizers -- 3.16 Organophosphorus Antioxidants -- 3.17 Pentaerythrityl Diphosphites -- 3.18 Organoboron Antioxidants -- 3.19 Macrocyclic Ligands -- 3.20 Aromatic Amine Antioxidants -- 3.21 Nitroso Compounds and Nitrones -- 3.22 Antioxidant Properties of Nitrosoamines -- 3.23 Antioxidant Properties of Antistatic Agents (Tensides) -- 4 Pigments -- 4.1 Photostabilizing Properties of Pigments -- 4.2 Titanium Dioxide -- 4.3 Zinc Oxide -- 4.4 Metal Salts Coatings -- 4.5 Carbon Black -- 5 Photostabilizers -- 5.1 Alkyl-Substituted p-Hydroxybenzoates -- 5.2 Phenyl Esters of Benzoic Acid -- 5.3 Salicylanilides and Oxanilides -- 5.4 Diketones -- 5.5 Benzylidene Malonate -- 5.6 Esters of ?-Cyano-?-phenylcinnamic Acid -- 5.7 Hydroxybenzophenones -- 5.8 Chromanone and Tetralone Photostabilizers -- 5.9 Hydroxybenzotriazoles -- 5.10 Organic Metal Photostabilizers -- 5.11 Metal Stearates -- 5.12 Metal Salts of Organic Acids -- 5.13 Metal Oxime Chelates -- 5.14 Nickel(II) Mono-oxime (Hydrazone) Chelates -- 5.15 Metal Salicylate Chelates -- 5.16 Nickel(II) Bis(stilbene dithiolate) Chelates -- 5.17 Pyrazole Chelates -- 5.18 Nickel(II) Thiopicoline Anilide Chelate -- 5.19 Nickel(II) 2,2?-Thiobis(4-tert.-octylphenolato)-n-butylamine -- 5.20 Nickel(II) Bis(o-butyl-3,5-di-tert.-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-phosphonate -- 5.21 Metal Dithiolates as Photostabilizers -- 5.22 Metal Chelates as Pro-oxidants and Photoinitiators -- 5.23 Dithiocarbamate Iron Complex Acting as Photoinitiator of Polymer Degradation -- 5.24 Metal Acetylacetonates -- 5.25 Metal Deactivators -- 5.26 Organotellurium Compounds as Photostabilizers -- 6 Hindered Amine Light Stabilizers (HALS) -- 6.1 Mechanisms of HALS Reactions -- 6.2 Mechanisms of Nitroxy Radical Reactions -- 6.3 Transformations of Hindered Amines and Nitroxy Radicals During Processing of Polymers -- 6.4 Stabilizing Properties of HALS in Commercial Polymers -- 6.5 Synergistic/Antagonistic Effects of HALS with Other Additives -- 6.6 Novel HALS -- 7 Polymer-Bound Additives -- 7.1 Properties of Polymer-Bound Additives -- 7.2 Polymeric Antioxidants -- 7.3 Polymeric Photostabilizers -- 7.4 Hindered Amine (HALS) Monomers and Polymers -- 7.5 Polymers with Hindered N-oxy Group in the Main Chain -- 8 Industrial Aspects of Polymer Stabilization -- 8.1 Industrial Methods of Incorporating Additives -- 8.2 Toxicity of Photostabilizers -- 8.3 ‘World Index of Polyolefine Stabilizers’ -- 8.4 Industrial Application of Antioxidants -- 8.5 Photostabilization of Low-Density Polyethylene for Agricultural Applications -- 8.6 Commercially Produced Polymeric HALS -- 8.7 Photostabilization of Polypropylene Tapes and Fibres -- 8.8 Photostabilization of Rubber-Modified Plastics -- 8.9 Photostabilization of Poly(vinyl chloride) by Surface Photografting -- 8.10 Photostabilization of Coatings -- 8.11 Additives in a Space Environment -- 9 Experimental Methods in Polymer Degradation and Stabilization -- 9.1 Preparation of a Test Specimen -- 9.2 Determination of the Additive Content after Polymer Photo-oxidative Degradation -- 9.3 Quantitative Determination of Antioxidants -- 9.4 Determination of Effectiveness of Antioxidants -- 9.5 Measurement of Evaporation of Additives from Polymer Samples -- 9.6 Absorption Spectroscopy -- 9.7 Chemiluminescence Measurements -- 9.8 Photoacoustic Spectroscopy -- 9.9 Electron Spin Resonance Spectroscopy -- 9.10 Electron Spectroscopy for Chemical Analysis (ESCA) -- 9.11 Analytical Methods for the Determination of Hydroperoxide Groups -- 9.12 Studies of the Kinetics of Oxidation by Oxygen Uptake Measurements -- 9.13 Determination of the Quenching of Singlet Oxygen -- 9.14 Radioactive Labelling Techniques -- 9.15 Viscosity Measurements -- 9.16 Determination of Chain Scission -- 9.17 The Gloss Loss Test -- 9.18 Testing Methods of Thermo-oxidative Degradation and Stability of Polymers and Plastics -- 9.19 Mechanical Testing of Polymer (Plastic) Samples -- 9.20 Testing of Weathering in Polymers -- 9.21 Computer Modelling of Photo-oxidation and Photostabilization -- References -- Appendices.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 86
    ISBN: 9789400908376
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Patterns and processes in helminth parasite communities: an overview -- 2 Host populations as resources defining parasite community organization -- 3 Spatial scale and the processes structuring a guild of larval trematode parasites -- 4 Guild structure of larval trematodes in molluscan hosts: prevalence, dominance and significance in competition -- 5 Helminth communities in marine fishes -- 6 Helminth communities in freshwater fish: structured communities of stochastic assemblages? -- 7 Helminth communities of amphibians and reptiles: comparative approaches to understanding patterns and processes -- 8 Helminth communities in avian hosts: determinants of pattern -- 9 Helminth community of mammalian hosts: concepts at the infracommunity, component and compound community levels -- 10 Models for multi-species parasite-host communities -- 11 Free-living communities and alimentary tract helminths: hypotheses and pattern analyses -- 12 Concluding remarks.
    Abstract: We first discussed the possibility of organizing a symposium on helminth communities in June, 1986. At that time, we were engaged in writing a joint paper on potential structuring mechanisms in helminth communities; we disagreed on a number of issues. We felt the reason for such debate was because the discipline was in a great state of flux, with many new concepts and approaches being introduced with increasing frequency. After consider­ able discussion about the need, scope and the inevitable limitations of such a symposium, we decided that the time was ripe to bring other ecologists, engaged in similar research, face-to-face. There were many individuals from whom to choose; we selected those who were actively publishing on helminth communities or those who had expertise in areas which we felt were particularly appropriate. We compiled a list of potential participants, contacted them and received unanimous support to organize such a symposium. Our intent was to cover several broad areas, fully recognizing that breadth negates depth (at least with a publisher's limitation on the number of pages). We felt it important to consider patterns amongst different kinds of hosts because this is where we had disagreed among ourselves.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Patterns and processes in helminth parasite communities: an overview2 Host populations as resources defining parasite community organization -- 3 Spatial scale and the processes structuring a guild of larval trematode parasites -- 4 Guild structure of larval trematodes in molluscan hosts: prevalence, dominance and significance in competition -- 5 Helminth communities in marine fishes -- 6 Helminth communities in freshwater fish: structured communities of stochastic assemblages? -- 7 Helminth communities of amphibians and reptiles: comparative approaches to understanding patterns and processes -- 8 Helminth communities in avian hosts: determinants of pattern -- 9 Helminth community of mammalian hosts: concepts at the infracommunity, component and compound community levels -- 10 Models for multi-species parasite-host communities -- 11 Free-living communities and alimentary tract helminths: hypotheses and pattern analyses -- 12 Concluding remarks.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 87
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400907850
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 88
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401160445
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- How (and Why) Circuits Are Tested -- Key Testability Techniques -- Testability Definitions -- Why Is Testability Important? -- Testability Awareness -- Testability Commitment -- Testability Benefits -- Testability Trends for the Future -- Design-to-Test Overview -- 2 System Level Guidelines -- System Analysis -- System Level Testability Guidelines -- 3 General Digital Circuit Guidelines -- Initialization -- Asynchronous Circuits and One-Shots -- Interfaces -- Built-in Test Diagnostics -- Feedback Loops -- Oscillators and Clocks -- Fan-in and Fan-out Considerations -- Bussed Logic -- Buffers -- Visibility Points -- Partitioning Functions into Logically Separable Units -- Wired OR/AND Functions -- Counters and Shift Registers -- Additional General Digital Board Guidelines -- Guidelines for Programmable Logic Devices -- 4 General Analog Circuit Guidelines -- General Analog Testability Guidelines -- Analog Circuit Elements -- Frequency Considerations -- High-Frequency Analog Circuits 81 Additional General Analog Circuit Guidelines -- Testability Guidelines for Hybrid Circuits -- 5 LSI/VLSI Board Level Guidelines -- LSI/VLSI Board Advantages and Disadvantages -- Partitioning of LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Controllability of LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Visibility on LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Initialization -- Synchronization -- Self-Tests -- Device Standardization -- Summary of LSI/VLSI Board Guidelines -- 6 Merchant Devices on Boards -- General Guidelines Using Merchant Devices -- The 8080A Microprocessor Family -- The 8085A Microprocessor Family -- The 8048 Microprocessor Family -- The 8086 Microprocessor Family -- The 80186 Processor -- The 80286 Processor -- The 80386 Processor -- The Z80 Microprocessor Family -- The Z8000 Microprocessor Family -- The 6800 Microprocessor Family -- The 2901 Microprocessor Family -- The 68000 Processor Family -- The 68020 Processor -- The 68030 Processor -- The 88000 RISC Processor Family -- The 320C2x DSP Device Family -- Merchant Semiconductor Use Guidelines Summary -- 7 LSI/VLSI ASIC Level Techniques -- Level Sensitive Scan Design (LSSD) -- Scan Path -- Scan/Set Logic -- Random Access Scan 169 Built-in Logic Block Observation (BILBO) -- Signature Analysis -- Reduced Intrusion Scan Path (RISP) -- Using Device Scan Paths for Board Level Testing -- Cross Check Technology Embedded Testability -- 8 Boundary Scan -- Board Test Problems as a Basis for Boundary Scan -- Boundary Scan Description -- Test Access Port Description -- Boundary Scan TAP Interconnection and Operation -- Types of Tests Using Boundary Scan -- Boundary Scan Cell Designs -- 9 Built-in Test (BIT) Approaches -- BIT Implementation Requirements -- BIT Access Bus Alternatives -- Chip Level BIT Implementations -- Dual-Port BIT Bus Implementations -- Built-in Test and Human Interactions -- Real-Time On-line Monitoring -- 10 Testability Busses -- The Proposed IEEE Standard Testability Bus -- Testability Busses and LSSD -- Testability Busses and Boundary Scan -- Testability Busses and Scan/Set -- TM and E-TM Testability Busses -- Testability Busses and the TAP -- Real-Time Testability Busses and Multiplexing -- Combination Serial/Real-Time Testability Bus -- Analog Testability Bus Implementation -- Testability Bus Configuration Options -- Testability Busses and ATE -- 11 Mechanical Guidelines -- Overall Test Philosophy -- Accessibility -- Connectors -- Board Layout Guidelines -- Adjustments -- Other Physical Guidelines -- 12 Surface Mount Technology Guidelines -- Mechanical Guidelines for SMT Board Design -- Electrical Guidelines for SMT Board Design -- 13 Software Guidelines -- Hardware Design Factors Required for Software Testability -- General Software Design Guidelines -- Specific Guidelines for Test Control -- Specific Guidelines for Test Modules -- Specific Guidelines for System Level Diagnostics -- Memory Tests -- Specific Guidelines for LRU Testing -- Test Software Development Plans -- 14 Testability Documentation -- Test Software Documentation -- Hardware Documentation -- 15 Implementation Guidelines -- Testability Program Flow -- Design Reviews -- Digital T-Score Rating System and Checklists -- 16 Test Techniques and Strategies -- Production Test Flows -- Cable, Backplane, and Bare Board Continuity Testing -- Loaded Board Opens and Shorts Testing -- In-Circuit Inspection Board Testing -- Manufacturing Defects Testing -- Digital Functional Testing -- Analog PCB Test Equipment -- Combinational Testers -- Choosing a Test Strategy -- Appendix A Testability Checklists -- Appendix B Digital T-Score Rating System.
    Abstract: This book is the second edition of Design to Test. The first edition, written by myself and H. Frank Binnendyk and first published in 1982, has undergone several printings and become a standard in many companies, even in some countries. Both Frank and I are very proud of the success that our customers have had in utilizing the information, all of it still applicable to today's electronic designs. But six years is a long time in any technology field. I therefore felt it was time to write a new edition. This new edition, while retaining the basic testability prin­ ciples first documented six years ago, contains the latest material on state-of-the-art testability techniques for electronic devices, boards, and systems and has been completely rewritten and up­ dated. Chapter 15 from the first edition has been converted to an appendix. Chapter 6 has been expanded to cover the latest tech­ nology devices. Chapter 1 has been revised, and several examples throughout the book have been revised and updated. But some­ times the more things change, the more they stay the same. All of the guidelines and information presented in this book deal with the three basic testability principles-partitioning, control, and visibility. They have not changed in years. But many people have gotten smarter about how to implement those three basic test­ ability principles, and it is the aim of this text to enlighten the reader regarding those new (and old) testability implementation techniques.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 IntroductionHow (and Why) Circuits Are Tested -- Key Testability Techniques -- Testability Definitions -- Why Is Testability Important? -- Testability Awareness -- Testability Commitment -- Testability Benefits -- Testability Trends for the Future -- Design-to-Test Overview -- 2 System Level Guidelines -- System Analysis -- System Level Testability Guidelines -- 3 General Digital Circuit Guidelines -- Initialization -- Asynchronous Circuits and One-Shots -- Interfaces -- Built-in Test Diagnostics -- Feedback Loops -- Oscillators and Clocks -- Fan-in and Fan-out Considerations -- Bussed Logic -- Buffers -- Visibility Points -- Partitioning Functions into Logically Separable Units -- Wired OR/AND Functions -- Counters and Shift Registers -- Additional General Digital Board Guidelines -- Guidelines for Programmable Logic Devices -- 4 General Analog Circuit Guidelines -- General Analog Testability Guidelines -- Analog Circuit Elements -- Frequency Considerations -- High-Frequency Analog Circuits 81 Additional General Analog Circuit Guidelines -- Testability Guidelines for Hybrid Circuits -- 5 LSI/VLSI Board Level Guidelines -- LSI/VLSI Board Advantages and Disadvantages -- Partitioning of LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Controllability of LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Visibility on LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Initialization -- Synchronization -- Self-Tests -- Device Standardization -- Summary of LSI/VLSI Board Guidelines -- 6 Merchant Devices on Boards -- General Guidelines Using Merchant Devices -- The 8080A Microprocessor Family -- The 8085A Microprocessor Family -- The 8048 Microprocessor Family -- The 8086 Microprocessor Family -- The 80186 Processor -- The 80286 Processor -- The 80386 Processor -- The Z80 Microprocessor Family -- The Z8000 Microprocessor Family -- The 6800 Microprocessor Family -- The 2901 Microprocessor Family -- The 68000 Processor Family -- The 68020 Processor -- The 68030 Processor -- The 88000 RISC Processor Family -- The 320C2x DSP Device Family -- Merchant Semiconductor Use Guidelines Summary -- 7 LSI/VLSI ASIC Level Techniques -- Level Sensitive Scan Design (LSSD) -- Scan Path -- Scan/Set Logic -- Random Access Scan 169 Built-in Logic Block Observation (BILBO) -- Signature Analysis -- Reduced Intrusion Scan Path (RISP) -- Using Device Scan Paths for Board Level Testing -- Cross Check Technology Embedded Testability -- 8 Boundary Scan -- Board Test Problems as a Basis for Boundary Scan -- Boundary Scan Description -- Test Access Port Description -- Boundary Scan TAP Interconnection and Operation -- Types of Tests Using Boundary Scan -- Boundary Scan Cell Designs -- 9 Built-in Test (BIT) Approaches -- BIT Implementation Requirements -- BIT Access Bus Alternatives -- Chip Level BIT Implementations -- Dual-Port BIT Bus Implementations -- Built-in Test and Human Interactions -- Real-Time On-line Monitoring -- 10 Testability Busses -- The Proposed IEEE Standard Testability Bus -- Testability Busses and LSSD -- Testability Busses and Boundary Scan -- Testability Busses and Scan/Set -- TM and E-TM Testability Busses -- Testability Busses and the TAP -- Real-Time Testability Busses and Multiplexing -- Combination Serial/Real-Time Testability Bus -- Analog Testability Bus Implementation -- Testability Bus Configuration Options -- Testability Busses and ATE -- 11 Mechanical Guidelines -- Overall Test Philosophy -- Accessibility -- Connectors -- Board Layout Guidelines -- Adjustments -- Other Physical Guidelines -- 12 Surface Mount Technology Guidelines -- Mechanical Guidelines for SMT Board Design -- Electrical Guidelines for SMT Board Design -- 13 Software Guidelines -- Hardware Design Factors Required for Software Testability -- General Software Design Guidelines -- Specific Guidelines for Test Control -- Specific Guidelines for Test Modules -- Specific Guidelines for System Level Diagnostics -- Memory Tests -- Specific Guidelines for LRU Testing -- Test Software Development Plans -- 14 Testability Documentation -- Test Software Documentation -- Hardware Documentation -- 15 Implementation Guidelines -- Testability Program Flow -- Design Reviews -- Digital T-Score Rating System and Checklists -- 16 Test Techniques and Strategies -- Production Test Flows -- Cable, Backplane, and Bare Board Continuity Testing -- Loaded Board Opens and Shorts Testing -- In-Circuit Inspection Board Testing -- Manufacturing Defects Testing -- Digital Functional Testing -- Analog PCB Test Equipment -- Combinational Testers -- Choosing a Test Strategy -- Appendix A Testability Checklists -- Appendix B Digital T-Score Rating System.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 89
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468466621
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Some fundamentals of geological maps -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 The topographic base map -- 1.3 Geological aspects -- 1.4 Summary chapter -- 1.5 Selected further reading -- 2 The nature of geological maps: the Ten Mile map of the UK and the 1: 2 500 000 map of the USA -- 2.1 Introduction: cartographic matters -- 2.2 Interpretation of the maps: geology and relief -- 2.3 Map patterns and geological structure -- 2.4 Conclusion -- 2.5 Summary of chapter -- 3 The three-dimensional aspect: structure contours -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 The nature of structure contours -- 3.3 Examples of structure contours on maps -- 3.4 Structure contours derived from borehole/well information -- 3.5 Structure contours derived from topography: the theory -- 3.6 Structure contours derived from topography: the practice -- 3.7 Structure contours from topography and boreholes -- 3.8 Straight structure contours -- 3.9 Summary of chapter -- 3.10 Selected further reading -- 4 Measurements in three dimensions: strike and dip, formation thickness and depth -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Strike and dip -- 4.3 Apparent dip -- 4.4 Formation thickness -- 4.5 Formation depth -- 4.6 The ‘three-point’ method -- 4.7 Summary of chapter -- 4.8 Selected further reading -- 5 Geological cross-sections -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Line of section -- 5.3 Scale and vertical exaggeration -- 5.4 Manual drawing of cross-sections -- 5.5 Structure and stratigraphic sections -- 5.6 Three-dimensional diagrams -- 5.7 Summary of chapter -- 5.8 Selected further reading -- 6 Visual assessment of outcrop patterns -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Horizontal formation -- 6.3 Dipping formations -- 6.4 Vertical formations -- 6.5 Assessment of formation thickness -- 6.6 Summary of chapter -- 6.7 Exercises on visual assessment -- 7 Unconformities -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Terminology -- 7.3 Recognition on maps -- 7.4 Associated features -- 7.5 Use on maps -- 7.6 Palaeogeological maps -- 7.7 Summary of chapter -- 7.8 Selected further reading -- 8 Folds -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Description from maps -- 8.3 Visual assessment on maps -- 8.4 Measurements on maps -- 8.5 Summary of chapter -- 9 Faults: the fundamentals -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Fault parts, orientation and dimensions -- 9.3 Fault displacement -- 9.4 Classification of faults -- 9.5 Visual assessment on maps -- 9.6 Measurements on maps -- 9.7 Summary of chapter -- 10 More on faults: contraction (thrust), extension, and strike-slip faults -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Contraction (thrust) faults -- 10.3 Extension faults -- 10.4 Strike-slip faults -- 10.5 Summary of chapter -- 10.6 Selected further reading -- 11 Igneous and metamorphic rocks; mineral deposits -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Igneous rocks -- 11.3 Metamorphic rocks -- 11.4 Mineral deposits -- 11.5 Summary of chapter -- 11.6 Selected further reading -- 12 Geological history from maps -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Sedimentary successions -- 12.3 Deformed rocks -- 12.4 Non-sedimentary rocks -- 12.5 Reading a geological map -- 12.6 Writing a map report -- 12.7 Summary of chapter -- 13 The production of geological maps -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 The field survey -- 13.3 Preparation of maps for publication -- 13.4 Map reports -- 13.5 Availability of maps -- 13.6 Conclusions -- 14 The heritage of geological maps -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 A short history of geological maps -- 14.3 The contributions of some individuals -- 15 Current trends in geological maps -- 15.1 Introduction -- 15.2 New technologies in geologicam mps -- 15.3 New forms in geological maps -- 15.4 Specialised and thematic maps -- 15.5 Summary of chapter -- 15.6 Selected further reading -- References.
    Abstract: A recent national survey of geology students indicated that, In a subject so fundamental and yet so varied, every although they saw the need for a basic training in map­ geologist will have his own views on geological maps - the work, the three-dimensional aspects involved formed the matters needing emphasis, the best methods of interpreta­ single most difficult part of an introductory geology tion, good examples of maps, and so on. Instructors may course, and that it was generally taught in a way both ab­ therefore urge in their taught courses different priorities stract and dull. At the same time, there was no book which from those given here, and, although a wide range of maps puzzled students could turn to for explanations; no book and map exercises is included, will prefer to continue to which told them more about real geological maps. This use their own 'pet' examples. But this is meant primarily to book is an attempt to fill that need. It is based on the view be a book for the student - to turn to for clarification, for that in these days of increasing specialisation the geological further information, and simply to learn a little more about map remains the vital coordinating document, and that the geological maps.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Some fundamentals of geological maps1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 The topographic base map -- 1.3 Geological aspects -- 1.4 Summary chapter -- 1.5 Selected further reading -- 2 The nature of geological maps: the Ten Mile map of the UK and the 1: 2 500 000 map of the USA -- 2.1 Introduction: cartographic matters -- 2.2 Interpretation of the maps: geology and relief -- 2.3 Map patterns and geological structure -- 2.4 Conclusion -- 2.5 Summary of chapter -- 3 The three-dimensional aspect: structure contours -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 The nature of structure contours -- 3.3 Examples of structure contours on maps -- 3.4 Structure contours derived from borehole/well information -- 3.5 Structure contours derived from topography: the theory -- 3.6 Structure contours derived from topography: the practice -- 3.7 Structure contours from topography and boreholes -- 3.8 Straight structure contours -- 3.9 Summary of chapter -- 3.10 Selected further reading -- 4 Measurements in three dimensions: strike and dip, formation thickness and depth -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Strike and dip -- 4.3 Apparent dip -- 4.4 Formation thickness -- 4.5 Formation depth -- 4.6 The ‘three-point’ method -- 4.7 Summary of chapter -- 4.8 Selected further reading -- 5 Geological cross-sections -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Line of section -- 5.3 Scale and vertical exaggeration -- 5.4 Manual drawing of cross-sections -- 5.5 Structure and stratigraphic sections -- 5.6 Three-dimensional diagrams -- 5.7 Summary of chapter -- 5.8 Selected further reading -- 6 Visual assessment of outcrop patterns -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Horizontal formation -- 6.3 Dipping formations -- 6.4 Vertical formations -- 6.5 Assessment of formation thickness -- 6.6 Summary of chapter -- 6.7 Exercises on visual assessment -- 7 Unconformities -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Terminology -- 7.3 Recognition on maps -- 7.4 Associated features -- 7.5 Use on maps -- 7.6 Palaeogeological maps -- 7.7 Summary of chapter -- 7.8 Selected further reading -- 8 Folds -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Description from maps -- 8.3 Visual assessment on maps -- 8.4 Measurements on maps -- 8.5 Summary of chapter -- 9 Faults: the fundamentals -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Fault parts, orientation and dimensions -- 9.3 Fault displacement -- 9.4 Classification of faults -- 9.5 Visual assessment on maps -- 9.6 Measurements on maps -- 9.7 Summary of chapter -- 10 More on faults: contraction (thrust), extension, and strike-slip faults -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Contraction (thrust) faults -- 10.3 Extension faults -- 10.4 Strike-slip faults -- 10.5 Summary of chapter -- 10.6 Selected further reading -- 11 Igneous and metamorphic rocks; mineral deposits -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Igneous rocks -- 11.3 Metamorphic rocks -- 11.4 Mineral deposits -- 11.5 Summary of chapter -- 11.6 Selected further reading -- 12 Geological history from maps -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Sedimentary successions -- 12.3 Deformed rocks -- 12.4 Non-sedimentary rocks -- 12.5 Reading a geological map -- 12.6 Writing a map report -- 12.7 Summary of chapter -- 13 The production of geological maps -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 The field survey -- 13.3 Preparation of maps for publication -- 13.4 Map reports -- 13.5 Availability of maps -- 13.6 Conclusions -- 14 The heritage of geological maps -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 A short history of geological maps -- 14.3 The contributions of some individuals -- 15 Current trends in geological maps -- 15.1 Introduction -- 15.2 New technologies in geologicam mps -- 15.3 New forms in geological maps -- 15.4 Specialised and thematic maps -- 15.5 Summary of chapter -- 15.6 Selected further reading -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 90
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468414554
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Ornamental Grasses -- Types and Kinds -- Garden Types -- Adaptation -- Uses -- Selected Species -- Reference -- 2 Bamboo -- Origin, Types, Propagation, and Growth Habit -- Economic and Horticultural Importance -- Establishment, Maintenance, and Eradication -- Shade Tolerance and Winter Hardiness -- Uses -- Selected Species -- References -- 3 Grasslike Plants -- Variation among Grasslike Plants -- Plant Tolerance -- Winter Hardiness -- Uses -- Selected Species -- References -- 4 Rushes and Sedges -- Composition, Characteristics, and Distribution -- Cyperaceae or Sedge Family -- Winter Hardiness, Size, Form, Color, and Growth Habit -- The Rush Family, Juncaceae -- Selected Species -- References -- Appendix 1 Uses of Ornamental Grasses -- Appendix 2 Uses of Bamboo -- Appendix 3 Uses of Grasslike Plants -- Appendix 4 Uses of Rushes and Sedges -- Appendix 5 Plant Hardiness Zones Map.
    Abstract: The Gramineae, or grass family, is second in size only to the Compositeae, or sunflower family. It is among the most important plant families in the world. The major food crops of the world are found in the grass family. From time immemorial, grasses have provided food and shelter for humanity, domesticated livestock, and wildlife; without grasses, these forms of life might cease to exist. The grass family is large in size, diverse in habit, and ubiquitous in distribution. Earth would be bleak and bare, indeed, in the absence of this life-sustaining plant family. In addition to its economic and industrial value, the grass family has some ornamental value. It provides us with physical sustenance and gives us much pleasure and satisfaction in its ornamental forms. The purpose of this book is to point out the value and usefulness of grasses as ornamentals and to deline:tte their attributes and uses in the home, in the garden, and in the landscape. Ornamental grasses serve a unique and significant purpose in ornamental horticulture. Horticulturists, other plant scientists, and nursery personnel are more fully aware of the value and usefulness of grasses as ornamentals than is the general public. It is mainly for this reason that this work is directed toward the home gardener and the scientist alike, in the hope of enhancing reader appreciation of the roie grasses play in ornamental horti­ culture.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Ornamental GrassesTypes and Kinds -- Garden Types -- Adaptation -- Uses -- Selected Species -- Reference -- 2 Bamboo -- Origin, Types, Propagation, and Growth Habit -- Economic and Horticultural Importance -- Establishment, Maintenance, and Eradication -- Shade Tolerance and Winter Hardiness -- Uses -- Selected Species -- References -- 3 Grasslike Plants -- Variation among Grasslike Plants -- Plant Tolerance -- Winter Hardiness -- Uses -- Selected Species -- References -- 4 Rushes and Sedges -- Composition, Characteristics, and Distribution -- Cyperaceae or Sedge Family -- Winter Hardiness, Size, Form, Color, and Growth Habit -- The Rush Family, Juncaceae -- Selected Species -- References -- Appendix 1 Uses of Ornamental Grasses -- Appendix 2 Uses of Bamboo -- Appendix 3 Uses of Grasslike Plants -- Appendix 4 Uses of Rushes and Sedges -- Appendix 5 Plant Hardiness Zones Map.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 91
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401168687
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Marketing. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: to Marketing Communications -- One Communications and the Marketing Mix -- 1 A Broader Look at the Marketing Mix -- 2 Communications in Relation to the Product Life Cycle -- 3 How Well do Names and Brands Communicate? -- 4 The Product Image and Packaging -- 5 How Does Price Communicate? -- 6 Corporate Identity -- Two Internal Communications -- 7 Internal Communications: Media and Methods -- 8 Sales Conferences -- 9 Sales Contests and Incentives -- 10 Communicating with Sales Staff -- Three Communicating with the Trade -- 11 Dealer Activities -- 12 Communicating with the Trade -- Four Communications with Customers -- 13 Consumer Behaviour -- 14 Market Education -- 15 The After Market -- Five Special Communication Techniques -- 16 Advertising -- 17 Sales Promotion -- 18 Direct Response Marketing -- 19 Public Relations -- 20 Sponsorships -- 21 Marketing Research -- Appendix I Bibliography -- Appendix II Associations and Educational Bodies -- Appendix III Syllabus for Marketing Communications, Chartered Institute of Marketing Diploma (as revised 1988).
    Abstract: Marketing communications is a subject which has become popular in both marketing and public relations circles, but sometimes with different parameters. There are those who prefer to confine marketing communications to promotional activities, which is mostly an academic point of view, and there are those who see the subject in broader terms, embracing every form of communication used in marketing, which is how the subject is practised in the business world. While the author has long experience as a teacher and examiner, he also continues to be a professional practitioner. Consequently, the book aims to serve those concerned with both the academic and the professional in terpreta tions of marketing comm unica tions. I t is of course hoped that those who adopt the academic approach to the subject will eventually acknowledge that there is more to marketing communi­ cations than advertising, sales promotion, selling, marketing research and public relations. It is also necessary to realise that public relations embraces much more than the 'publicity' in the 4Ps promotion box. Without wishing to be contentious, this broad approach is proposed so that communications of all kinds throughout the marketing strategy can have maximum effect. Very little has been published on this subject, and the book is therefore a pioneer attempt to establish the practical parameters of modern marketing communications. There are so many broad and narrow interpretations of marketing communications, but it is hoped that this book will be useful to teachers, students and practitioners of the subject.
    Description / Table of Contents: to Marketing CommunicationsOne Communications and the Marketing Mix -- 1 A Broader Look at the Marketing Mix -- 2 Communications in Relation to the Product Life Cycle -- 3 How Well do Names and Brands Communicate? -- 4 The Product Image and Packaging -- 5 How Does Price Communicate? -- 6 Corporate Identity -- Two Internal Communications -- 7 Internal Communications: Media and Methods -- 8 Sales Conferences -- 9 Sales Contests and Incentives -- 10 Communicating with Sales Staff -- Three Communicating with the Trade -- 11 Dealer Activities -- 12 Communicating with the Trade -- Four Communications with Customers -- 13 Consumer Behaviour -- 14 Market Education -- 15 The After Market -- Five Special Communication Techniques -- 16 Advertising -- 17 Sales Promotion -- 18 Direct Response Marketing -- 19 Public Relations -- 20 Sponsorships -- 21 Marketing Research -- Appendix I Bibliography -- Appendix II Associations and Educational Bodies -- Appendix III Syllabus for Marketing Communications, Chartered Institute of Marketing Diploma (as revised 1988).
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 92
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400904415
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIII, 634 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Planar Processing and Basic Devices -- 2. Wafers -- 3. Wafer Measurements -- 4. Equilibrium Concepts -- 5. Oxidation -- 6. Diffusion: Predeposition -- 7. Diffusion; Redistribution -- 8. Ion Implantation -- 9. Chemical Vapor Deposition; Epitaxy -- 10. Etching -- 11. Lithography -- 12. Physical Vapor Deposition; Sputtering -- Appendix A. Four-Point-Probe Derivations; Optical Interference -- A.1 Semi-Infinite (S-I) Sample -- A.2 Thickness Correction for l-t Samples -- A.3 Logarithmic Potential Derivation for Thin Samples -- A.4 Optical Interference -- Appendix B. Ion/Field Interactions -- Appendix C. The Glow Discharge -- C.1 General Gas Discharge -- C.2 The Glow -- C.3 A-C/R-F Glow Discharge -- C.4 R-F Problems -- C.5 Modified Techniques -- Appendix D. Gas Systems -- D.1 Basic Concepts -- D.2 Conductance Calculations -- D.3 Gas Supply Systems -- D.4 Gas Distribution Systems -- D.5 Exhaust Pump Considerations -- F.5.4. Dry Oxidation Curves for (111) Silicon Showing the Effect of Oxidant Pressure -- F.5.5. Dry Oxidation Curves of (111) Silicon with Added Chlorides -- F.5.6. Wet Oxidation of (111) Silicon and Silicon Nitride -- F.5.7. MBASIC Program for Oxidation of Silicon at Atmospheric Pressure -- F.6.1. Diffusion Data -- F.6.2. Error Function Properties -- F.6.3. Error Function Table -- F.6.5. Irvin Sheet Resistance Curves -- F.6.6. Oxide Masking Curves for Boron Predep -- F.6.7. Oxide Masking Curves for Phosphorus Predep -- F.6.8. Vapor Pressure Curves of Liquid Predep Sources -- F.6.10 Boron Nitride Predep Curves -- F.8.1. Ion Implantation: Effective Range Data -- Appendix G. Numerical Constants -- Appendix H. Furnace Construction.
    Abstract: Planar Processing Primer is based on lecture notes for a silicon planar process­ ing lecture/lab course offered at the University of Illinois-UC for over fifteen years. Directed primarily to electrical engineering upperclassmen and graduate students, the material also has been used successfully by graduate students in physics and ceramic and metallurgical engineering. It is suitable for self-study by engineers trained in other disciplines who are beginning work in the semiconductor fields, and it can make circuit design engineers aware of the processing limitations under which they must work. The text describes and explains, at an introductory level, the principal processing steps used to convert raw silicon into a semiconductor device or integrated circuit. First-order models are used for theoretical treatments (e.g., of diffusion and ion implantation), with reference made to more advanced treatments, to computer programs such as SUPREM that include higher order effects, and to interactions among sequential processes. In Chapters 8, 9, and to, the application of silicon processes to compound semiconductors is discussed briefly. Over the past several years, the size of transistors has decreased markedly, allowing more transistors per chip unit area, and chip size has increased.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 93
    ISBN: 9781461597384
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXI, 665 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Introduction to Rheology -- 1.1 What is Rheology? -- 1.2 Why Rheological Properties are Important -- 1.3 Stress as a Measure of Force -- 1.4 Strain as a Measure of Deformation -- 1.4.1 Strain Measures for Simple Extension -- 1.4.2 Shear Strain -- 1.5 Rheological Phenomena -- 1.5.1 Elasticity; Hooke’s Law -- 1.5.2 Viscosity -- 1.5.3 Viscoelasticity -- 1.5.4 Structural Time Dependency -- 1.5.5 Plasticity and Yield Stress -- 1.6 Why Polymeric Liquids are Non-Newtonian -- 1.6.1 Polymer Solutions -- 1.6.2 Molten Plastics -- 1.7 A Word About Tensors -- 1.7.1 Vectors -- 1.7.2 What is a Tensor? -- 1.8 The Stress Tensor -- 1.9 A Strain Tensor for Infinitesimal Deformations -- 1.10 The Newtonian Fluid -- 1.11 The Basic Equations of Fluid Mechanics -- 1.11.1 The Continuity Equation -- 1.11.2 Cauchy’s Equation -- 1.11.3 The Navier-Stokes Equation 40 References -- 2. Linear Viscoelasticity -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 The Relaxation Modulus -- 2.3 The Boltzmann Superposition Principle -- 2.4 Relaxation Modulus of Molten Polymers -- 2.5 Empirical Equations for the Relaxation Modulus -- 2.5.1 The Generalized Maxwell Model -- 2.5.2 Power Laws and an Exponential Function -- 2.6 The Relaxation Spectrum -- 2.7 Creep and Creep Recovery; The Compliance -- 2.8 Small Amplitude Oscillatory Shear -- 2.8.1 The Complex Modulus and the Complex Viscosity -- 2.8.2 Complex Modulus of Typical Molten Polymers -- 2.8.3 Quantitative Relationships between G*(?) and MWD -- 2.8.4 The Storage and Loss Compliances -- 2.9 Determination of Maxwell Model Parameters -- 2.10 Start-Up and Cessation of Steady Simple Shear and Extension -- 2.11 Molecular Theories: Prediction of Linear Behavior -- 2.11.1 The Modified Rouse Model for Unentangled Melts -- 2.11.1.1 The Rouse Model for Dilute Solutions -- 2.11.1.2 The Bueche Modification of the Rouse Theory -- 2.11.1.3 The Bueche-Ferry Law -- 2.11.2 Molecular Theories for Entangled Melts -- 2.11.2.1 Evidence for the Existence of Entanglements -- 2.11.2.2 The Nature of Entanglement Coupling -- 2.11.2.3 Reptation -- 2.11.2.4 The Doi-Edwards Theory -- 2.11.2.5 The Curtiss-Bird Model -- 2.11.2.6 Limitations of Reptation Models -- 2.12 Time-Temperature Superposition -- 2.13 Linear Behavior of Several Polymers 94 References -- 3. Introduction to Nonlinear Viscoelasticity -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Nonlinear Phenomena -- 3.3 Theories of Nonlinear Behavior -- 3.4 Finite Measures of Strain -- 3.4.1 The Cauchy Tensor and the Finger Tensor -- 3.4.2 Strain Tensors -- 3.4.3 Reference Configurations -- 3.4.4 Scalar Invariants of the Finger Tensor -- 3.5 The Rubberlike Liquid -- 3.5.1 A Theory of Finite Linear Viscoelasticity -- 3.5.2 Lodge’s Network Theory and the Convected Maxwell Model -- 3.5.3 Behavior of the Rubberlike Liquid in Simple Shear Flows -- 3.5.3.1 Rubberlike Liquid in Step Shear Strain -- 3.5.3.2 Rubberlike Liquid in Steady Simple Shear -- 3.5.3.3 Rubberlike Liquid in Oscillatory Shear -- 3.5.3.4 Constrained Recoil of Rubberlike Liquid -- 3.5.3.5 The Stress Ratio (N1/?) and the Recoverable Shear -- 3.5.4 The Rubberlike Liquid in Simple Extension -- 3.5.5 Comments on the Rubberlike Liquid Model -- 3.6 The BKZ Equation -- 3.7 Wagner’s Equation and the Damping Function -- 3.7.1 Strain Dependent Memory Function -- 3.7.2 Determination of the Damping Function -- 3.7.3 Separable Stress Relaxation Behavior -- 3.7.4 Damping Function Equations for Polymeric Liquids -- 3.7.4.1 Damping Function for Shear Flows -- 3.7.4.2 Damping Function for Simple Extension -- 3.7.4.3 Universal Damping Functions -- 3.7.5 Interpretation of the Damping Function in Terms of Entanglements -- 3.7.5.1 The Irreversibility Assumption -- 3.7.6 Comments on the Use of the Damping Function -- 3.8 Molecular Models for Nonlinear Viscoelasticity -- 3.8.1 The Doi-Edwards Constitutive Equation -- 3.9 Strong Flows; The Tendency to Stretch and Align Molecules -- References -- 4. Steady Simple Shear Flow and the Viscometric Functions -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Steady Simple Shear Flow -- 4.3 Viscometric Flow -- 4.4 Wall Slip and Edge Effects -- 4.5 The Viscosity of Molten Polymers -- 4.5.1 Dependence of Viscosity on Shear Rate -- 4.5.2 Dependence of Viscosity on Temperature -- 4.6 The First Normal Stress Difference -- 4.7 Empirical Relationships Involving Viscometric Functions -- 4.7.1 The Cox-Merz Rules -- 4.7.2 The Gleissle Mirror Relations -- 4.7.3 Other Relationships 176 References -- 5. Transient Shear Flows Used to Study Nonlinear Viscoelasticity -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Step Shear Strain -- 5.2.1 Finite Rise Time -- 5.2.2 The Nonlinear Shear Stress Relaxation Modulus -- 5.2.3 Time-Temperature Superposition -- 5.2.4 Strain-Dependent Spectrum and Maxwell Parameters -- 5.2.5 Normal Stress Differences for Single-Step Shear Strain -- 5.2.6 Multistep Strain Tests -- 5.3 Flows Involving Steady Simple Shear -- 5.3.1 Start-Up Flow -- 5.3.2 Cessation of Steady Simple Shear -- 5.3.3 Interrupted Shear -- 5.3.4 Reduction in Shear Rate -- 5.4 Nonlinear Creep -- 5.4.1 Time-Temperature Superposition of Creep Data -- 5.5 Recoil and Recoverable Shear -- 5.5.1 Creep Recovery -- 5.5.1.1 Time-Temperature Superposition; Creep Recovery -- 5.5.2 Recoil During Start-Up Flow -- 5.5.3 Recoverable Shear Following Steady Simple Shear -- 5.6 Superposed Deformations -- 5.6.1 Superposed Steady and Oscillatory Shear -- 5.6.2 Step Strain with Superposed Deformations -- 5.7 Large Amplitude Oscillatory Shear -- 5.8 Exponential Shear; A Strong Flow -- 5.9 Usefulness of Transient Shear Tests -- References -- 6. Extensional Flow Properties and Their Measurement -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Extensional Flows -- 6.3 Simple Extension -- 6.3.1 Material Functions for Simple Extension -- 6.3.2 Experimental Methods -- 6.3.3 Experimental Observations for LDPE -- 6.3.4 Experimental Observations for Linear Polymers -- 6.4 Biaxial Extension -- 6.5 Planar Extension -- 6.6 Other Extensional Flows -- References -- 7. Rotational and Sliding Surface Rheometers -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Sources of Error for Drag Flow Rheometers -- 7.2.1 Instrument Compliance -- 7.2.2 Viscous Heating -- 7.2.3 End and Edge Effects -- 7.2.4 Shear Wave Propagation -- 7.3 Cone-Plate Flow Rheometers -- 7.3.1 Basic Equations for Cone-Plate Rheometers -- 7.3.2 Sources of Error for Cone-Plate Rheometers -- 7.3.3 Measurement of the First Normal Stress Difference -- 7.4 Parallel Disk Rheometers -- 7.5 Eccentric Rotating Disks -- 7.6 Concentric Cylinder Rheometers -- 7.7 Controlled Stress Rotational Rheometers -- 7.8 Torque Rheometers -- 7.9 Sliding Plate Rheometers -- 7.9.1 Basic Equations for Sliding Plate Rheometers -- 7.9.2 End and Edge Effects for Sliding Plate Rheometers -- 7.9.3 Sliding Plate Melt Rheometers -- 7.9.4 The Shear Stress Transducer -- 7.10 Sliding Cylinder Rheometers -- References -- 8. Flow in Capillaries, Slits and Dies -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Flow in a Round Tube -- 8.2.1 Shear Stress Distribution -- 8.2.2 Shear Rate for a Newtonian Fluid -- 8.2.3 Shear Rate for a Power Law Fluid -- 8.2.4 The Rabinowitch Correction -- 8.2.5 The Schummer Approximation -- 8.2.6 Wall Slip in Capillary Flow -- 8.3 Flow in a Slit -- 8.3.1 Basic Equations for Shear Stress and Shear Rate -- 8.3.2 Use of a Slit Rheometer to Determine N1 -- 8.3.2.1 Determination of N1 from the Hole Pressure -- 8.3.2.2 Determination of N1 from the Exit Pressure -- 8.4 Pressure Drop in Irregular Cross Sections -- 8.5 Entrance Effects -- 8.5.1 Experimental Observations -- 8.5.2 Entrance Pressure Drop—the Bagley End Correction -- 8.5.3 Rheological Significance of the Entrance Pressure Drop -- 8.6 Capillary Rheometers -- 8.7 Flow in Converging Channels -- 8.7.1 The Lubrication Approximation -- 8.7.2 Industrial Die Design -- 8.8 Extrudate Swell -- 8.9 Extrudate Distortion -- 8.9.1 Surface Melt Fracture—Sharkskin -- 8.9.2 Oscillatory Flow in Linear Polymers -- 8.9.3 Gross Melt Fracture -- 8.9.4 Role of Slip in Melt Fracture -- 8.9.5 Gross Melt Fracture Without Oscillations -- References -- 9. Rheo-Optics and Molecular Orientation -- 9.1 Basic Concepts—Interaction of Light and Matter -- 9.1.1 Refractive Index and Polarization -- 9.1.2 Absorption and Scattering -- 9.1.3 Anisotropic Media; Birefringence and Dichroism -- 9.2 Measurement of Birefringence -- 9.3 Birefringence and Stress -- 9.3.1 Stress-Optical Relation -- 9.3.2 Application of Birefringence Measurements -- References -- 10. Effects of Molecular Structure -- 10.1 Introduction and Qualitative Overview of Molecular Theory -- 10.2 Molecular Weight Dependence of Zero Shear Viscosity -- 10.3 Compliance and First Normal Stress Difference -- 10.4 Shear Rate Dependence of Viscosity -- 10.5 Temperature and Pressure Dependence -- 10.5.1 Temperature Dependence of Viscosity -- 10.5.2 Pressure Dependence of Viscosity -- 10.6 Effects of Long Chain Branching -- References -- 11. Rheology of Multiphase Systems -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Effect of Rigid Fillers -- 11.2.1 Viscosity -- 11.2.2 Elasticity -- 11.3 Deformable Multiphase...
    Abstract: This book is designed to fulfill a dual role. On the one hand it provides a description of the rheological behavior of molten poly­ mers. On the other, it presents the role of rheology in melt processing operations. The account of rheology emphasises the underlying principles and presents results, but not detailed deriva­ tions of equations. The processing operations are described qualita­ tively, and wherever possible the role of rheology is discussed quantitatively. Little emphasis is given to non-rheological aspects of processes, for example, the design of machinery. The audience for which the book is intended is also dual in It includes scientists and engineers whose work in the nature. plastics industry requires some knowledge of aspects of rheology. Examples are the polymer synthetic chemist who is concerned with how a change in molecular weight will affect the melt viscosity and the extrusion engineer who needs to know the effects of a change in molecular weight distribution that might result from thermal degra­ dation. The audience also includes post-graduate students in polymer science and engineering who wish to acquire a more extensive background in rheology and perhaps become specialists in this area. Especially for the latter audience, references are given to more detailed accounts of specialized topics, such as constitutive relations and process simulations. Thus, the book could serve as a textbook for a graduate level course in polymer rheology, and it has been used for this purpose.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 94
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400904118
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The underwater visual environment -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Definition of terms -- 1.3 The photic environment -- 1.4 Underwater vision and ultraviolet light -- 1.5 Dynamic changes in underwater light - spatiotemporal properties -- 1.6 The underwater polarized light field -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 2 The optical system of fishes -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.1 Optics -- 2.3 Accommodation -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 3 Optical variability of the fish lens -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Lens shape -- 3.3 Relative focal length (Matthiessen’s ratio) -- 3.4 Spherical aberration -- 3.5 Chromatic aberration -- 3.6 Functional significance of fish lens quality -- 3.7 Concluding remarks -- References -- 4 Visual pigments of fishes -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Visual pigment structure -- 4.3 Receptor types -- 4.4 Distribution of visual pigments -- References -- 5 Retinal structure of fishes -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Diversity of retinal structure -- 5.3 Differentiation, structure and connectivity of retinal cells -- 5.4 Cyclic changes of cell morphology in the outer retina -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 6 Electrophysiological characteristics of retinal neurones: synaptic interactions and functional outputs -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Receptive field organizations: spatial and spectral aspects -- 6.3 Voltage-dependent conductances -- 6.4 Specific synaptic interactions -- 6.5 Efferent inputs -- 6.6 Concluding remarks -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 7 Neurotransmitters and neuromodulators of the fish retina -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Neurotransmitters of the distal retina -- 7.3 Neurotransmitters of the proximal retina -- 7.4 Summary -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 8 Tectal morphology: connections, neurones and synapses -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Retinal projections -- 8.3 Tectal position and lamination -- 8.4 Tectal afferents -- 8.5 Intrinsic structural organization of the tectum -- 8.6 Tectal efferents -- 8.7 Concluding remarks -- Abbreviations -- References -- 9 The physiology of the teleostean optic tectum -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 General physiological properties -- 9.3 Tectal input pathways: the retinotectal pathway -- 9.4 The marginal fibre pathway -- 9.5 The retinal efferents (retinopetal component) -- 9.6 The tectoreticular pathway -- 9.7 Conclusion -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 10 The visual pathways and central non-tectal processing -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Visual structures in the diencephalon including the pretectum -- 10.3 Visual structures in the telencephalon -- 10.4 Visual structures in the ventral mesencephalon -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 11 Behavioural studies of fish vision: an analysis of visual capabilities -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Behavioural methods -- 11.3 Visual capabilities -- References -- 12 Development of the visual system -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Development of the optics of the eye -- 12.3 Development of the retina -- 12.4 Development of the optic tectum -- References -- 13 Haplochromis burtoni: a case study -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Visually guided behaviour -- 13.3 Social regulation of growth -- 13.4 Retinal structure -- 13.5 Retinal growth -- 13.6Summary -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 14 Vision in elasmobranchs -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Physiological optics -- 14.3 Tapetum lucidum -- 14.4 Retinal anatomy and physiology -- 14.5 Concluding remarks -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 15 Stimulus, environment and vision in fishes -- 15.1 Introduction -- 15.2 The underwater light environment -- 15.3 Visual adaptations to the environment -- 15.4 Fish as visual stimuli -- 15.5 Summary -- References -- Species index.
    Abstract: A question often asked of those of us who work in the seemingly esoteric field of fish vision is, why? To some of us the answer seems obvious - how many other visual scientists get to dive in a tropical lagoon in the name of science and then are able to eat their subjects for dinner? However, there are better, or at least scientifically more acceptable, reasons for working on the visual system of fish. First, in terms of numbers, fish are by far the most important of all vertebrate classes, probably accounting for over half (c. 22 000 species) of all recognized vertebrate species (Nelson, 1984). Furthermore, many of these are of commercial importance. Secondly, if one of the research aims is to understand the human visual system, animals such as fish can tell us a great deal, since in many ways their visual systems, and specifically their eyes, are similar to our own. This is fortunate, since there are several techniques, such as intracellular retinal recording, which are vital to our understanding of the visual process, that cannot be performed routinely on primates. The cold­ blooded fish, on the other hand, is an ideal subject for such studies and much of what we know about, for example, the fundamentals of information processing in the retina is based on work carried out on fish (e. g. Svaetichin, 1953).
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The underwater visual environment1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Definition of terms -- 1.3 The photic environment -- 1.4 Underwater vision and ultraviolet light -- 1.5 Dynamic changes in underwater light - spatiotemporal properties -- 1.6 The underwater polarized light field -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 2 The optical system of fishes -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.1 Optics -- 2.3 Accommodation -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 3 Optical variability of the fish lens -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Lens shape -- 3.3 Relative focal length (Matthiessen’s ratio) -- 3.4 Spherical aberration -- 3.5 Chromatic aberration -- 3.6 Functional significance of fish lens quality -- 3.7 Concluding remarks -- References -- 4 Visual pigments of fishes -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Visual pigment structure -- 4.3 Receptor types -- 4.4 Distribution of visual pigments -- References -- 5 Retinal structure of fishes -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Diversity of retinal structure -- 5.3 Differentiation, structure and connectivity of retinal cells -- 5.4 Cyclic changes of cell morphology in the outer retina -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 6 Electrophysiological characteristics of retinal neurones: synaptic interactions and functional outputs -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Receptive field organizations: spatial and spectral aspects -- 6.3 Voltage-dependent conductances -- 6.4 Specific synaptic interactions -- 6.5 Efferent inputs -- 6.6 Concluding remarks -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 7 Neurotransmitters and neuromodulators of the fish retina -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Neurotransmitters of the distal retina -- 7.3 Neurotransmitters of the proximal retina -- 7.4 Summary -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 8 Tectal morphology: connections, neurones and synapses -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Retinal projections -- 8.3 Tectal position and lamination -- 8.4 Tectal afferents -- 8.5 Intrinsic structural organization of the tectum -- 8.6 Tectal efferents -- 8.7 Concluding remarks -- Abbreviations -- References -- 9 The physiology of the teleostean optic tectum -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 General physiological properties -- 9.3 Tectal input pathways: the retinotectal pathway -- 9.4 The marginal fibre pathway -- 9.5 The retinal efferents (retinopetal component) -- 9.6 The tectoreticular pathway -- 9.7 Conclusion -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 10 The visual pathways and central non-tectal processing -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Visual structures in the diencephalon including the pretectum -- 10.3 Visual structures in the telencephalon -- 10.4 Visual structures in the ventral mesencephalon -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 11 Behavioural studies of fish vision: an analysis of visual capabilities -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Behavioural methods -- 11.3 Visual capabilities -- References -- 12 Development of the visual system -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Development of the optics of the eye -- 12.3 Development of the retina -- 12.4 Development of the optic tectum -- References -- 13 Haplochromis burtoni: a case study -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Visually guided behaviour -- 13.3 Social regulation of growth -- 13.4 Retinal structure -- 13.5 Retinal growth -- 13.6Summary -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 14 Vision in elasmobranchs -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Physiological optics -- 14.3 Tapetum lucidum -- 14.4 Retinal anatomy and physiology -- 14.5 Concluding remarks -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 15 Stimulus, environment and vision in fishes -- 15.1 Introduction -- 15.2 The underwater light environment -- 15.3 Visual adaptations to the environment -- 15.4 Fish as visual stimuli -- 15.5 Summary -- References -- Species index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 95
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400907515
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Nutrient supply to the newborn ruminant -- 2. Energy nutrition of rumen micro-organisms -- 3. Manipulation of rumen fermentation and associative effects -- 4. Host animal control of microbial fermentation and host animal digestion -- 5. Absorption of nutrients -- 6. Energy metabolism of the host animal -- 7. Utilization of the energy of absorbed nutrients -- 8. Feed quality and feed intake -- 9. Feed evaluation, past and present -- 10. Towards future feed evaluation systems.
    Abstract: This book is intended to be a companion volume to 'Protein Nutrition in Ruminants' (1982, Academic Press), which emphasized both the role of proteins and new systems for their evaluation. Here the focus is on energy-yielding nutrients and problems involved in evaluating them. Nonetheless in both volumes there is explicit recognition of the interdependence of energy and protein nutrition. I have not attempted to review comprehensively all the literature relating to ruminant energy nutrition and must apologize to colleagues whose work is not fully reported. Where possible tables and figures are taken from the studies of our group at the Rowett Research Institute since, if for no other reason, I am most familiar with these data. I have first considered the nutrition of the newborn and have stressed the role of behaviour 'in determining whether nutrients enter or bypass the rumen. The development of the rumen, the of anaerobic fermentation and the roles of various principles . species of rumen bacteria, protozoa and fungi in relation to different substrates, are summarized. This is followed by accounts of the factors affecting the utilization of different substrates and the v vi Preface absorption and metabolism of the end-products of fermentation and digestion, together with estimates of digestive capacity in various segments of the gut. The ruminant's requirements for energy-yielding nutrients is considered in relation to the per­ formance of various activities and to environmental conditions, particular attention being paid to the requirement for glucose precursors.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Nutrient supply to the newborn ruminant2. Energy nutrition of rumen micro-organisms -- 3. Manipulation of rumen fermentation and associative effects -- 4. Host animal control of microbial fermentation and host animal digestion -- 5. Absorption of nutrients -- 6. Energy metabolism of the host animal -- 7. Utilization of the energy of absorbed nutrients -- 8. Feed quality and feed intake -- 9. Feed evaluation, past and present -- 10. Towards future feed evaluation systems.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 96
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468414233
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Engineering. ; Life sciences. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities. ; Science. ; Mathematics.
    Abstract: 1 Formulas from Algebra, Trigonometry and Analytic Geometry -- 2 Elements of Analysis -- 3 Vector Analysis -- 4 Tensors -- 5 Functions of a Complex Variable -- 6 Ordinary Differential and Difference Equations -- 7 Special Functions -- 8 First Order Partial Differential Equations -- 9 Partial Differential Equations of Second and Higher Order -- 10 Integral Equations -- 11 Transform Methods -- 12 Asymptotic Methods -- 13 Oscillations -- 14 Perturbation Methods -- 15 Wave Propagation -- 16 Matrices and Linear Algebra -- 17 Functional Approximation -- 18 Numerical Analysis -- 19 Mathematical Models and Their Formulation -- 20 Optimization Techniques -- 21 Probability and Statistics.
    Abstract: Most of the topics in applied mathematics dealt with in this handbook can be grouped rather loosely under the term analysis. They involve results and techniques which experience has shown to be of utility in a very broad variety of applications. Although care has been taken to collect certain basic results in convenient form, it is not the purpose of this handbook to duplicate the excellent collections of tables and formulas available in the National Bureau of Standards Handbook of Mathematical Functions (AMS Series 55, U.S. Government Printing Office) and in the references given therein. Rather, the emphasis in the present handbook is on technique, and we are indeed fortunate that a number of eminent applied mathe­ maticians have been willing to share with us their interpretations and experiences. To avoid the necessity of frequent and disruptive cross-referencing, it is expected that the reader will make full use of the index. Moreover, each chapter has been made as self-sufficient as is feasible. This procedure has resulted in occasional duplication, but as compensation for this the reader may appreciate the availability of different points of view concerning certain topics of current interest. As editor, I would like to express my appreciation to the contributing authors, to the reviewers, to the editorial staff of the publisher, and to the many secretaries and typists who have worked on the manuscript; without the partnership of all of these people, this handbook would not have been possible.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Formulas from Algebra, Trigonometry and Analytic Geometry2 Elements of Analysis -- 3 Vector Analysis -- 4 Tensors -- 5 Functions of a Complex Variable -- 6 Ordinary Differential and Difference Equations -- 7 Special Functions -- 8 First Order Partial Differential Equations -- 9 Partial Differential Equations of Second and Higher Order -- 10 Integral Equations -- 11 Transform Methods -- 12 Asymptotic Methods -- 13 Oscillations -- 14 Perturbation Methods -- 15 Wave Propagation -- 16 Matrices and Linear Algebra -- 17 Functional Approximation -- 18 Numerical Analysis -- 19 Mathematical Models and Their Formulation -- 20 Optimization Techniques -- 21 Probability and Statistics.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 97
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401170475
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Electronics Packaging Design and Engineering -- 2 Project Planning -- 3 Human Factors Engineering -- 4 Fabrication Processes -- 5 Mechanical Fasteners -- 6 Heat Transfer and Thermal Control -- 7 Shock and Vibration Design -- 8 Subassemblies and Assemblies -- 9 Design Considerations for Space Electronics -- 10 Material Plating and Finishes -- 11 Radio Frequency and Electromagnetic Shielding -- 12 Design and Development of Miniature Electronics Systems -- 13 Wire and Cabling -- 14 Materials and Processes -- 15 Safety -- 16 Printed Circuits -- 17 Electrical Interconnection Systems -- 18 Forced Air Cooling Systems -- 19 Preferred Materials for Electronic Packaging -- 20 Selection of Plastics for Various Environments -- 21 Mechanics of Simple Stresses -- 22 Formulas and Conversions -- 23 Design Reviews—An Instrument for Decision Making -- 24 Slide Mount Considerations for Electronic Assemblies -- 25 Reference Designations for Electrical and Electronic Parts and Equipment -- 26 Metal Alloy and Temper Designation Systems -- Appendix A -- Appendix B.
    Abstract: The Handbook of Electronics Packaging Design and Engineering has been writ­ ten as a reference source for use in the packaging design of electronics equip­ ment. It is designed to provide a single convenient source for the solution of re­ curring design problems. The primary consideration of any design is that the end product meet or exceed the applicable product specifications. The judicious use of uniform design practices will realize the following economies and equipment improvements: • Economics of design. Uniform design practices will result in less engineering and design times and lower costs. They will also reduce the number of changes that may be required due to poor reliability, maintainability, or producibility. • Improved design. Better designs with increased reliability, maintainability, and producibility will result from the use of uniform design practices. • Production economies. Uniform designs employing standard available tools, materials, and parts will result in the cost control of manufacturing. The Handbook is intended primarily for the serious student of electronics packaging and for those engineers and designers actively engaged in this vital and interesting profession. It attempts to present electronics packaging as it is today. It can be used as a training text for instructional purposes and as a reference source for the practicing designer and engineer.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Electronics Packaging Design and Engineering2 Project Planning -- 3 Human Factors Engineering -- 4 Fabrication Processes -- 5 Mechanical Fasteners -- 6 Heat Transfer and Thermal Control -- 7 Shock and Vibration Design -- 8 Subassemblies and Assemblies -- 9 Design Considerations for Space Electronics -- 10 Material Plating and Finishes -- 11 Radio Frequency and Electromagnetic Shielding -- 12 Design and Development of Miniature Electronics Systems -- 13 Wire and Cabling -- 14 Materials and Processes -- 15 Safety -- 16 Printed Circuits -- 17 Electrical Interconnection Systems -- 18 Forced Air Cooling Systems -- 19 Preferred Materials for Electronic Packaging -- 20 Selection of Plastics for Various Environments -- 21 Mechanics of Simple Stresses -- 22 Formulas and Conversions -- 23 Design Reviews-An Instrument for Decision Making -- 24 Slide Mount Considerations for Electronic Assemblies -- 25 Reference Designations for Electrical and Electronic Parts and Equipment -- 26 Metal Alloy and Temper Designation Systems -- Appendix A -- Appendix B.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 98
    ISBN: 9789401178167
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I: Characterization of Interface -- II: Surface of Reinforcements -- III: Controlled Interphase -- IV: Interfacial Theories -- V: Influence of Interface on Mechanical and Physical Properties -- Author Index.
    Abstract: The third International Conference on Composite Interfaces (ICCI-III) was held under the auspecies of ASM International, The Aluminum Company of America (Alcoa), The Edison Polymer Innovation Co. (EPIC), Case Western Reserve University, Nippon Glass Fiber Co., Nitto Boseki Co., Office of Naval Reserach (ONR), SAMPE Japan, Teijin Co., Mobay Co., Union Carbide Co., and Vetrotex Sain-Gobain. The underlying philosophy of the conference continues to be the promotion of fundamental understanding of the structure and role of composite interfaces. With the growth of composite interface studies, the research direction naturally changes from characterization and understanding of interfacial structure to controlling this structure. For this reason, the conference was subtitled, "Controlled Interphase Structure." The rather unfamiliar phrase "interphase" is used to emphasize the interfacial region whose properties are different from the bulk. The importance of the interphase to the mechanochemical properties has been rapidly recognized among composite researchers in recent years. The conference incorporated nine sessions. No concurrent sessions were planned because of the strong interest among panicipants and organizers to intennix researchers from different disciplines. Papers presented were redistributed in Pans I throught V. Because of this, both the conference and proceedings are not organized based on the traditional disciplines or materials, but rather around concepts.
    Description / Table of Contents: I: Characterization of InterfaceII: Surface of Reinforcements -- III: Controlled Interphase -- IV: Interfacial Theories -- V: Influence of Interface on Mechanical and Physical Properties -- Author Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 99
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Boston, MA : Springer US
    ISBN: 9781468476828
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Fifth Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: What is Plant Disease? -- Plant Pathology in the United States -- Principals of Control -- 1. Garden Chemicals and Their Application -- Fungicides -- Bactericides -- Nematicides -- Virocides -- Sources of Pesticides -- Applying the Chemicals -- Mixing the Chemicals -- All-Purpose Sprays and Dusts -- Integrated Pest Management -- 2. Classification of Plant Pathogens -- Fungi -- Bacteria -- Viruses -- Nematodes -- 3. Plant Diseases and Their Pathogens -- Anthracnose -- Bacterial Diseases -- Black Knot -- Blackleg -- Black Mildew -- Black-spot -- Blights -- Blotch Diseases -- Broomrapes -- Cankers and Diebacks -- Club Root -- Damping-off -- Dodder -- Downy Mildews -- Fairy Rings -- Fruit Spots -- Galls -- Leaf Blister and Leaf Curl Diseases -- Leaf Scorch -- Leaf Spots -- Lichens -- Mistletoe -- Molds -- Needle Casts -- Nematodes -- Nonparasitic Diseases -- Powdery Mildews -- Rots -- Rusts -- Scab -- Surf -- Slime Molds -- Smuts -- Snow-mold -- Sooty Mold -- Spot Anthracnose -- Virus Diseases -- White Rusts -- Wilt Diseases -- Witchweed -- 4. Host Plants and Their Diseases -- List of Land-Grant Institutions and Agricultural Experiment Stations in The United States -- Selected Bibliography.
    Abstract: It was a compliment to me to be asked to prepare the fourth edition of Westcott's Plant Disease Handbook, and the decision to accept the responsi­ bility for the fourth edition and now the fifth edition was not taken lightly. The task has been a formidable one. I have always had a great respect professionally for Dr. Cynthia Westcott. That respect has grown considerably with the completion of the two editions. I now fully realize the tremendous amount of effort expended by Dr. Westcott in developing the Handbook. A book such as this is never finished, since one is never sure that everything has been included that should be. I would quote and endorse the words of Dr. Westcott in her preface to the first edition: "It is easy enough to start a book on plant disease. It is impossible to finish it. " This revision of the Handbook retains the same general format contained in the previous editions. The chemicals and pesticides regulations have been updated; a few taxonomic changes have been made in the bacteria, fungi, and mistletoes; the changing picture in diseases caused by viruses and/or viruslike agents has been described. A few new host plants have been added, and many recently reported diseases as well as previously known diseases listed now on new hosts have been included. In addition, photographs have been replaced where possible, and the color photograph section has been retained.
    Description / Table of Contents: What is Plant Disease?Plant Pathology in the United States -- Principals of Control -- 1. Garden Chemicals and Their Application -- Fungicides -- Bactericides -- Nematicides -- Virocides -- Sources of Pesticides -- Applying the Chemicals -- Mixing the Chemicals -- All-Purpose Sprays and Dusts -- Integrated Pest Management -- 2. Classification of Plant Pathogens -- Fungi -- Bacteria -- Viruses -- Nematodes -- 3. Plant Diseases and Their Pathogens -- Anthracnose -- Bacterial Diseases -- Black Knot -- Blackleg -- Black Mildew -- Black-spot -- Blights -- Blotch Diseases -- Broomrapes -- Cankers and Diebacks -- Club Root -- Damping-off -- Dodder -- Downy Mildews -- Fairy Rings -- Fruit Spots -- Galls -- Leaf Blister and Leaf Curl Diseases -- Leaf Scorch -- Leaf Spots -- Lichens -- Mistletoe -- Molds -- Needle Casts -- Nematodes -- Nonparasitic Diseases -- Powdery Mildews -- Rots -- Rusts -- Scab -- Surf -- Slime Molds -- Smuts -- Snow-mold -- Sooty Mold -- Spot Anthracnose -- Virus Diseases -- White Rusts -- Wilt Diseases -- Witchweed -- 4. Host Plants and Their Diseases -- List of Land-Grant Institutions and Agricultural Experiment Stations in The United States -- Selected Bibliography.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 100
    ISBN: 9789401168656
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Perspective and overview -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Optical fibre fundamentals -- 1.3 Loss mechanisms in optical fibre materials -- 1.4 Long wavelength fibre materials -- 1.5 Fluoride glasses and optical fibres -- 1.6 Applications for infrared optical fibres -- 1.7 Future prospects -- References -- 2 Properties of fluoride glasses -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Glass-forming systems, structure and crystallization -- 2.3 Thermal properties -- 2.4 Other properties -- 2.5 Optical properties -- References -- 3 Propagation in optical fibres -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Multimode fibres -- 3.3 Monomode fibres -- References -- 4 Manufacture of infrared fibres -- 4.1 Materials preparation -- 4.2 Melting techniques -- 4.3 Fibre fabrication -- 4.4 Problems -- 4.5 Fibre results -- References -- 5 Intrinsic loss measurements -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Rayleigh scattering -- 5.3 IR multiphonon edge -- 5.4 Minimum intrinsic loss -- 5.5 Longer wavelength transmitting fibres -- References -- 6 Extrinsic absorption -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Spectrometer measurements -- 6.3 Absorption due to water -- 6.4 Absorption due to transition metal ions -- 6.5 Absorption due to rare earth ions -- 6.6 Other impurities -- References -- 7 Extrinsic scattering -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Identification of scattering centres -- 7.3 Scattering theory -- 7.4 Scattering solutions for limiting cases -- 7.5 Solutions for metallic (absorbing) spheres -- 7.6 Applications to practical examples -- 7.7 Calculations of scattering loss -- 7.8 Scattering loss in fibres -- 7.9 Conclusions -- References -- 8 Measured losses in fibres -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Available techniques -- 8.3 Total loss -- 8.4 Absorption -- 8.5 Scattering -- 8.6 Recent results -- 8.7 Predicted minimum loss -- References -- 9 Mechanical properties -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Fracture and glass parameters -- 9.3 Strength measuring methods -- 9.4 Fibre strengths -- 9.5 Identification of flaws and effect on strength -- 9.6 Ultimate strength and maximum practical strength -- 9.7 Strength and homogeneous crystal growth -- 9.8 Durability -- 9.9 Conclusions -- References -- 10 Applications -- 10.1 Mid-IR communication systems -- 10.2 Active fibres -- 10.3 Laser surgery -- 10.4 Infrared fibre sensors -- References.
    Abstract: One of the most exciting prospects for optical fibres made from fluoride glasses is the possibility of providing long distance optical communication systems without the need for repeaters. This objective has stimulated much of the work into fluoride glasses over the past ten years, and has prompted the writing of this book. It has also emerged that fluoride fibres can transmit both visible and infrared energy (from about 0.5 to 5 ,urn) and that they have many applications outside the field of telecommunications. These include optical fibre sensors (particularly in remote infrared spectroscopy), laser surgery and fibre lasers. Several companies are now established in the field, and good quality fluoride fibres are available from sources throughout the USA, Europe and Japan. Moreover, the first commercial instruments based on fluoride fibres are finding their way to the market place and these fibres will undoubtedly form the basis of many more instruments yet to be developed. The work presented in this book represents the field both from an academic understanding of the materials and ways to convert them into fibre, and from a practical and commercial viewpoint. The principal author and some of the co­ authors are based at the British Telecom Research Laboratories in the UK.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Perspective and overview1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Optical fibre fundamentals -- 1.3 Loss mechanisms in optical fibre materials -- 1.4 Long wavelength fibre materials -- 1.5 Fluoride glasses and optical fibres -- 1.6 Applications for infrared optical fibres -- 1.7 Future prospects -- References -- 2 Properties of fluoride glasses -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Glass-forming systems, structure and crystallization -- 2.3 Thermal properties -- 2.4 Other properties -- 2.5 Optical properties -- References -- 3 Propagation in optical fibres -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Multimode fibres -- 3.3 Monomode fibres -- References -- 4 Manufacture of infrared fibres -- 4.1 Materials preparation -- 4.2 Melting techniques -- 4.3 Fibre fabrication -- 4.4 Problems -- 4.5 Fibre results -- References -- 5 Intrinsic loss measurements -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Rayleigh scattering -- 5.3 IR multiphonon edge -- 5.4 Minimum intrinsic loss -- 5.5 Longer wavelength transmitting fibres -- References -- 6 Extrinsic absorption -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Spectrometer measurements -- 6.3 Absorption due to water -- 6.4 Absorption due to transition metal ions -- 6.5 Absorption due to rare earth ions -- 6.6 Other impurities -- References -- 7 Extrinsic scattering -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Identification of scattering centres -- 7.3 Scattering theory -- 7.4 Scattering solutions for limiting cases -- 7.5 Solutions for metallic (absorbing) spheres -- 7.6 Applications to practical examples -- 7.7 Calculations of scattering loss -- 7.8 Scattering loss in fibres -- 7.9 Conclusions -- References -- 8 Measured losses in fibres -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Available techniques -- 8.3 Total loss -- 8.4 Absorption -- 8.5 Scattering -- 8.6 Recent results -- 8.7 Predicted minimum loss -- References -- 9 Mechanical properties -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Fracture and glass parameters -- 9.3 Strength measuring methods -- 9.4 Fibre strengths -- 9.5 Identification of flaws and effect on strength -- 9.6 Ultimate strength and maximum practical strength -- 9.7 Strength and homogeneous crystal growth -- 9.8 Durability -- 9.9 Conclusions -- References -- 10 Applications -- 10.1 Mid-IR communication systems -- 10.2 Active fibres -- 10.3 Laser surgery -- 10.4 Infrared fibre sensors -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
Close ⊗
This website uses cookies and the analysis tool Matomo. More information can be found here...